The URL can be used to link to this page

Rancho Santana TR 31202 12-0357 (SFD) 2010 Code UpdateBin # City of La Quinta Building 8r Safety Division P.O. Box 1504, 78-495 Calle Tampico La Quinta, CA 92253 - (760) 777-7012 Building Permit Application and Tracking Sheet Permit # Project Address: f,)-Z2� Owner's Name: - V A. P. Number: Legal Description': -/i14e 1 L-3110-2— Address: City, ST, Zip: �a Contractor: Telephone: 7( t 7 7 7 MIN Address: 91 a 7 Project Description: r City, ST, Zip: C, < A r.9 d Telephone: 7ii State Lic. # 7 City Li,. J,.) Arch., Engr., Designer - Address: City, ST, Zip: Telephone: x. xx.. State Lie. #: Name of Contact Person: /A, 4 Construction T ype: Occupancy: Project type (circle on<New Add'n Alter Repair Demo — Sq. Ft.: # Storie"s: F# Units: Telephone 0 of Contact Person: (,O/<' Estimated Value of Project: it O tl 3 APPLICANT: DO NOT WRITE BELOW THIS LINE 'Submittal Req'd Rec'd TRACKING PERMIT FEES Plan Sets Plan Check submitted Item Amount Structural Ca Ics. Reviewed, ready for corrections t 111V 0111an Check Deposit Truss CaIcs. /a,] Called Contact Person Plan Check Balance Title 24 CaIcs. d RIP- Plans picked up Construction Flood plain plan Plans resubmitted Mechanical Grading plan 2" Review, ready for ue 2 Electrical Subcontactor List Called Contact Person 0 Plumbing Grant Deed Plans picked up S.M.I. H.O.A. Approval Plans resubmitted Grading IN HOUSE:- Review, ready for corrections/issue Developer Impact Fee Planning Approval Called Contact Person A.I.P.P. Pub. Wks. Appr Date of permit issue School Fees Total Permit Fees 0z" 49./.4f / j 2- DATE: JULY 24, 2012 JURISDICTION: LA QUINTA PLAN CHECK NO.:.12-539 EsGil Corporation. In Partnership with Government for Building Safety SET: I PROJECT ADDRESS: TRACT # 31202-1, 2, 3 & 4 a .gRI E •' JURIS. �� ❑ PLAN REVIEWER ❑ FILE PROJECT NAME: RANCHO SANTANA (4-Plan Tract Homes — Code Update) ® The plans transmitted herewith have been corrected where necessary and substantially comply with the jurisdiction's building codes. ❑ The plans transmitted herewith will substantially comply with the jurisdiction's codes when minor deficiencies identified below are resolved and checked by building department staff. ❑ The plans transmitted herewith have significant deficiencies identified on the enclosed check list and should be corrected and resubmitted for a complete recheck. ❑ The check list transmitted herewith is for your information. The plans are being held at Esgil Corporation until corrected plans are submitted for recheck. ❑ The applicant's copy of the check list is enclosed for the jurisdiction to forward to the applicant contact person. ❑ The applicant's copy of the check list has been sent to: ® EsGil Corporation staff did not advise the applicant that the plan check has been completed. ❑ EsGil Corporation staff did advise the applicant that the plan check has been completed. Person contacted: Telephone #: Date contacted: (by: ) Email:. Fax #: Mail Telephone Fax In Person ® REMARKS: "EsGil Corporation did not perform the original review for this project. Per the Building Official's direction, we have only verified adequate plan changes/responses to the correction lists prepared by others." pC LLDC�OdC By: ALI SADRE Enclosures: JUL 25 2012 EsGil Corporation ❑ GA ❑ EJ ❑ PC 7/24 By 9320 Chesapeake Drive, Suite 208 ♦ San Diego, California 92123 ♦ (858) 560-1468 ♦ Fax (858) 560-1576 S1adden Engineering 45M Coif Center Parkway, Suite F, Indin, CA'92201 (760) 863.0713 Fax (760) 863.0847 6782 Stanton Avcnuc; Suitc A, Buena Park, CA 90621 (714) 523.0952 Fax (714) 523-1369 450 Egan Avcnuc; Rcaumont. CA 92223 (951) 845-7743 Fax (951) 845-8863 800 E. Florida Avenue, Hemet, CA 92543 (951) 766-8777 Fax (951) 766-8778 July 5, 2012 Project No. 544-3001 12-07-165 Desert Cheyenne, Inc. 78401 Highway 111, Suite X La Quinta, California 92253 Project: Rancho Santana - Tract No. 31.202 SWC Monroe Street and Avenue 52 La" Quinta, California Subject: Foundation Plan Review — Plans 2, 3 and 4 Ref: Geotechnical Update.prepared by Sladden Engineering dated March 28,:2012; Project No. 544-3001, Report No.12-03-076 Geotechnical Update prepared by Sladdcn Engineering dated July 23, 2008, Project No. 544-3001, Report No. 08-07-410 . Geotechnical Investigation report prepared by Sladdcn Engincering'dated February 6, 2003; Project No. 544-A001, Report No. 03-02-068 As requested, we have reviewed the foundation Plans and Details prepared by ESI/FME, Inc, for Len Nobel Company for the new residences proposed f6r, the Rancho Santana residential development in the City of La Quinta, California. The plans reviewed included foundation plans and details for Floor Plans 2, 3 and 4. Based on our review, it is. our opinion that the recommendations provided in the above referenced Geotechnical Investigation and Update Reports have been properly incorporated into these.plans. If you have questions regarding this memo, please contact the undersigned. Respectfully submitted, SLADDEN ENGINEERING Brett L. Anderson y Principal Engineer No, CAB Letter/gl • cnuFo��P Copies: Q Desert Elite, Inc. Sladden Engineering_ 45090 Gulf Center Parkway, Suite F, Indio. CA 92201(760) 86370713 Fax (760) $63-0847 6782 Stanton. Avenue, Suite A, Buena Park, CA 90621 (714) 523-0952 Fax (714) 523-1369 450 Egan Avcnuc, Scaumont, CA 92223 (951) 845-7743 Fax (951) 845-8863 800 E. Florida Avenue, Hemet, CA 92543 (951) 7664777 Fax (951) 766.8778 March 28, 2012 Desert Elite, Inc. 78-401 Highway 111, Suite G La Quinta, California 92253 Project: Rancho Santana —.Tract 31202 SWC Monroe Street and Avenue 52 La Quinta, California Subject: G:eotechnical Update Project No. 544-3001 12-03-076 Reference: GeotechnicaI Update prepared by Sladden Engineering dated July .23, 2008; Project No. 544 3001,. Report No. 08-07-410 Geotechnical. Investigation report prepared- by Sladden Engineering dated February 6, 2003; Project No. 544-3001, Report No. 03-02-068 Grading Report prepared by Sladden ,Engineering dated May 15, 2006; Project No. 522-3001, Report No. 06-05-400 As requested, we have reviewed the referenced GeotechnicaI reports as they relate to the design and construction of the new homes proposed for the Rancho Santana development. In addition, we have visited the project site to observe the present conditions. The project site is located on .the southwest corner Of,Monroe Street and Avenue 52 in the City of La Quinta, California. The referenced Geotechnical.Investigation Report includes recommendations for remedial site grading and the design and construction of the proposed structure foundations. Based uponour .review of the referenced report -and our recent site observations, it is our opinion that the recommendations included in the referenced Geotechnical Investigation Report remain appiicable. The structural values included.in the referenced report should be applicable for use in the design of the structure foundations. Conventional shallow spread footings should be at least 12 inches deep and bottomed into firm compacted soil. Continuous footings at least 1 foot wide and isolated pad footings at least 2 feet square may be designed using allowable bearing pressures of 1200 and 1400 pounds per, square foot (psf), respectively. Allowable increases of 200 psf for each additional 1foot of width and 300 psi for each additional 6 inches of embedment depth may be utilized. The maximum allowable bearing pressure should be 2000 psf. The allowable bearing pressures are for dead and frequently applied live loads and may be increased by 1/3 to resist wind, seismic or other transient loading. i 't CD w March 28, 2012 -2- Project No. 544-300I 12-03-076 Settlements may -result from the anticipated foundation loads. These estimated ultimate settlements arc calculated to be a maximum of. 1 inch when using the recommended bearing . values. As a practical matter, differential settlements between footings can be assumed as one- half of the total settlement. These elastic settlements are expected to occur during construction. Resistance to lateral loads.may be provided by a combination of friction acting at the base of the slabs or foundations and passive earth pressure along the sides of the foundations. A coefficient of friction of 0.49 between soil and concrete may be used for dead load forces only. A passive earth pressure of 300 pounds per square foot, per foot of depth, may be used along the sides of footings that are placed against properly compacted soils. Passive earth pressure should be ignored within the upper 1 foot except where confined (such as beneath.a floor slab). Retaining walls may be required. to accomplish the proposed construction. Cantilever retaining walls may be designed using "active" pressures. Active pressures may be estimated using an equivalent fluid weight of 35 pcf for native backfill soils - with level free -draining backfill conditions. For walls that are restrained, "at rest pressures should be utilized in design. At rest pressures may be estimated using an equivalent fluid weight of 55 pcf. Walls should be provided with adequate drainage. It is our opinion that the remedial grading initially performed including overexcavation and recompaction of the surface soil within the proposed building areas remains applicable. Because the pads have been rough graded, the remedial grading necessary at this time should be minimal. The building pad areas should be cleared of any surface vegetation and root systems prior to grading. The exposed surface should be scarified, moisture conditioned and compacted to a minimum of 90 percent relative compaction. Fill material may then be placed in thin lifts at near optimum moisture content and compacted to at least 90 percent relative compaction. Compaction should be verified by testing. It should be noted that the site is located within a seismically active area of Southern California and it is likely that the' proposed residential structures and associated improvements will experience strong ground shaking as a result of an earthquake event along one of the faults in the region during the expected life of the development. As a minimum, structures should be designed based upon Seismic Zone 4 design. criteria included in the Uniform Building Code (UBC). The potential for liquefaction or other geologic/seismic hazards occurring at the site is, considered to be negligible. Based on our field observations and understanding of local geologic conditions, the soil profile type judged applicable to this site is So, generally described as stiff soil. The following presents additional coefficients and factors relevant to seismic mitigation for new construction based upon the 2010 California Building Code (CBC). Sladden Engineering March 28, 2012 -3- Project. No. 544-3001 12-03-076 The seismic design category for a structure may be determined in accordance with Section 1.613 of the 2010 CBC or ASCE7. According, to the 2010 CBC, Site Class D may be used to -estimate design seismic loading for the proposed structures. The period of the structures should be less than 'h second. This assumption should be verified by the project structural engineer. The 2010 Ut Seismic Design Parameters are summarised below. Occupancy Category (Table 1604:5): II Site Class (Table 1613.5.5): D Ss (Figure 1613..5.1:1,50g S1 (figure 1613.5.1: 0.60g Fa (Table 1.613.5.3(1)):1.0 Fv (Table.1.613.5.3(2)):1,5 5= (Equation 16-36 [Fa X Ss)):1.50g . Snil (Equation 16-37 Iry X Si)): 0.90g SnS (Equation 16-38(2/3 X Srius)):1.00g SM (Equation 16-39 (2/3 X Sm1)): 0.60g Seismic Design Category D if you have questions regarding this letter or the referenced reports, please contact the undersigned. Respectfully submitted, SLADDEN ENGINEERING Brett L. Anderson Principal Engineer SER/gl Copies; 4/ Desert Elite, Inc. GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION PROPOSED 80 ACRE, RESIDENTIAL DEVELOPMENT MONROE RANCH S WC MONROE STREET AND A V EN U.E 52 LA QUINTA, CALIFORNIA t -Prepared 'By- Sladden Engineering 39-725 Garand Lane, Suite G Palm Desert, California 92211 (760) 772-3893 D�C�IIIML l.Lf JUL 11 2012 �4� Gep OF Sladden Engineering 6782 Stanton Ave., Suite A, Buena Park, CA 90621 (714) 523-0952 Fax (714) 523.1369 39-725 Garand Ln., Suite G, Palm Desert, CA 92211 (760) 772-3893 Fax (760) 772-3895 f February 6, 2003 Project No. 544-3001 03-02-068 Desert Elite, Inc. 78-401 Highway 1 11, Suite G La Quinta, California 92253' Attention: Mr. John Pedalino Subject: Geotechnical Investigation Project: Proposed 80 Acre Residential Development Monroe Ranch — APN 767-200-004 and 005 SWC Monroe Street and Avenue 52 La Quinta, California Presented herewith is the report of our Geotechnical Investigation at the site of the proposed approximately 80 acre residential subdivision located on the southwest corner of Monroe Street and Avenue 52 in the City of La Quinta, California. The investigation was performed in order to provide recommendations for site preparation and to'assist in foundation design for the proposed single-family residences and the related site improvements. This report presents the results of our field investigation and laboratory testing along with conclusions and recommendations for foundation design and site preparation. This report completes our original scope of services as understood. We appreciate the opportunity to provide service to you on this project. If you have any questions regarding this report, please contact the undersigned Respectfully submitted, ' SLADDEN ENGINEERING Brett'L. Anderson Principal Engineer SER/pc Copies: 6/Desert Elite, Inc. GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION PROPOSED 80 ACRE RESIDENTIAL DEVELOPMENT MONROE RANCH SWC MONROE STREET AND AVENUE 52 LA QUINTA, CALIFORNIA February 6, 2003 TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION.........:......................................................................................... ..........:..... SCOPEOF WORK................................................................................................................... I PROJECT DESCRIPTION......................................................................................................... l GEOLOGY AND SEISMICITY................................................................................................. 2 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS.......!..:.....................................................................................1. 2 LIQUEFACTION........................................................................................:............................... 3 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS...................................................................... 3 FoundationDesign................................................................................................................ 4 Settlements.................................................................................................................. 4 LateralDesign.................................................................................................................. 4 RetainingWalls................................................................................................................ 5 ExpansiveSoils..........................................................................:.......................................... 5 ConcreteSlabs-on-Grade...................................................................................................... 5 Soluble Sulfates........................:............................. 5 "Tentative Pavement Design.................................................................................................. 5 Shrinkage and Subsidence .................. ... 6 GeneralSite Grading............................................................................................................ 6 1. Site Clearing....................................`........................................................................... 6 2. Preparation of Building and Foundation Areas.......................................................... 6 3. Placement of Compacted Fill..................................................................................... 6 4. Preparation of Slab and Pavement Areas ............................. .................... I.................. 6 5. Testing and Inspection................................................................................................ 7 GENERAL..........................................................................I...... . ...................................... 7 REFERENCES........................................................................................................................... 8 APPENDIX A - Site Plan and Boring bogs Field Exploration APPENDIX B - Laboratory Testing Laboratory Test Results APPENDIX C - 1997 UBC Seismic Design Criteria February 6, 2003 li►Y Il 11 11l01I D)Zl Project No. 544-3001 03-02-068 This report presents the results of our Geotechnical Investigation performed .in order to provide recommendations for site preparation and to assist in the design and construction of the foundations for the proposed residential structures. The project site is located on the southwest corner of Monroe Street and Avenue 52 in the City of La Quinta, California. The preliminary plans indicate that the proposed project will include single-family residences along with various associated site improvements. Associated improvements will include paved roadways, concrete driveways, walkways and patios, underground utilities, and landscape areas. SCOPE OF WORK The purpose of our investigation was to determine certain engineering characteristics of the near surface soils on the site in order to develop recommendations for foundation design and site preparation. Our investigation included field exploration, laboratory testing, literature review, engineering analysis and the preparation of this report. Evaluation of hazardous materials or other environmental concerns was not within the scope of services provided. Our investigation was performed in accordance with contemporary geotechnical engineering principles and practice. We make no other warranty, either express or implied. PROJECT DESCRIPTION The site is located on the southwest corner of Monroe Street and Avenue 52 in the City of La Quinta, California, It is our understanding that the project will consist of single-family residences along with various associated site improvements. tt is our understanding that the proposed residences will be of relatively lightweight wood -frame construction and will be supported by conventional shallow spread footings and concrete slabs on grade. The associated improvements will include paved roadways, concrete walkways, patios, driveways, landscape areas and various underground utilities. The majority of the subject site is presently vacant and the ground surface is covered with turf. The properties surrounding the site to the south are presently occupied by agricultural fields. Avenue 52 and Monroe Street are paved adjacent to the site and underground and overhead utilities exist along the streets. There are underground irrigation pipes along the edges of the site and traversing the site. Based upon our previous experience with lightweight residential structures, we expect that isolated column loads will be less than 30 kips and wall loading will be less than to 2.0 kips per linear foot. Grading is expected to include minor cuts and fills to match the nearby elevations and to construct slightly elevated building pads to accommodate site drainage. This does not include removal and recompaction of the bearing soils within the building areas. If the anticipated foundation loading or site grading varies substantially from that assumed the recommendations included in this report should be reevaluated. Sladden Engineering February 6, 2003 -2- Project No. 544-3001 03-02-068 GEOLOGY AND SEISMICITY The project site is located within the central Coachella Valley that is part of the broader Salton Trough geomorphic province. The Salton Trough is a northwest trending depression that extends from the Gulf of California to the Banning Pass. Structurally the Salton Trough is dominated by several northwest trending faults, most notable of which is the San Andreas system. A relatively thick sequence of sedimentary rocks have been deposited in the Coachella Valley portion of the Salton Trough from Miocene to present times. These sediments are predominately terrestrial in nature with some lacustrian and minor marine deposits. The mountains surrounding the Coachella Valley are composed primarily of Precambrian metamorphic and Mesozoic granitic rock. The Coachella Valley is situated in one of the more seismically active areas of California. The San Andreas fault zone is considered capable of generating a maximum credible earthquake of magnitude 8.0 and due to its proximity to the project site the distance of approximately 6.5 kilometers should be considered in design fault for the project. Seismic activity along the nearby faults continues to affect the area and the Coachella Valley is considered one of the more seismically active regions in California. A computer program and pertinent geologic literature were utilized to compile data related -to earthquake fault zones in the region and previous seismic activity that may have affected the site. E.Q. Fault Version 3.00 (Blake) provides a compilation of data related to earthquake faults in the region. The program searches available databases and provides both distances to causitive faults and the corresponding accelerations that may be experienced on the site due to earthquake activity along these faults. The attenuation relationship utilized for this project was based upon Joyner & Boore (1987) attenuation curves. The information generated was utilized in our liquefaction evaluation The site is not located in any Earthquake Fault 7ones as designated by the State but is mapped in the County's Liquefaction and Ground Shaking Hazard Zone V. Several significant seismic events have occurred within the Coachella Valley during the past 50 years. The events include Desert Hot Springs - 1948 (6.5 Magnitude), Palm Springs - 1986 (5.9 Magnitude), Desert Hot Springs - 1992 (6.1 Magnitude), Landers - 1992 (7.5 Magnitude) and .Big Bear - 1992 (6.6 Magnitude). SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS The soils underlying the site consist primarily of silty sands, sandy silts and clayey silts. As is typical for the area, the silty sand and sandy silt layers are interbedded and vary in thickness. Silty sands were the most prominent soils within our exploratory borings but several prominent clayey silt and silty clay layers were also encountered. The sandy silts and silty sands encountered near the existing ground surface appeared somewhat loose but the deeper soils appeared relatively firm. Sampler penetration resistance (as measured by field bloweounts) indicate that density generally increases with depth. Relatively undisturbed samples indicated dry density varying from 79 to 113 pcf. The site soils were dry near the surface but wet below a depth of 5 or 10 feet. Measured moisture content varied from 4 to 42 percent. Laboratory testing indicates that the surface soils within the upper 5 feet consist primarily of an inconsistent mixture of silty sands and sandy silts. Expansion testing indicates an expansion index of 0 for the surface silty sands that are classified as "very low" expansion category soils in accordance with Table 18-I-B of the 1997 Uniform Building Code. Sludden Engineering February 6, 2003 -3- Project No. 544-3001 03-02-068 Groundwater was encountered at a depth of approximately 43 feet below the existing ground surface within boring 1. The presence of groundwater should not impact site grading or construction. LfQUEFACTION Liquefaction occurs with sudden loss of soil strength due to rapid increases in pore pressures within eohesionless soils as a result of repeated cyclic loading during seismic events. Several conditions must be present for liquefaction to occur including; the presence of relatively shallow groundwater, generally loose soils conditions, the susceptibility of soils to liquefaction based upon grain -size characteristics and the generation of significant and repeated seismically induced ground accelerations. Liquefaction affects primarily loose, uniform grained cohesionless sands with low relative densities. . In the case of this project site, several of the factors required for liquefaction to occur are present. As previously indicated, groundwater was encountered at a depth of approximately 43 feet below the existing ground surface on the site. Several relatively uniform grained sand and silty sand layers were encountered within our borings. The site is located near an active fault system. Groundwater was encountered at a depth of approximately 43 feet below the existing ground surface. Due to the depth to groundwater, the potential for liquefaction affecting the site is limited. Although several silty sand layers appear susceptible to liquefaction based upon grain -size characteristics, the lack of groundwater within the upper 40 feet should minimize liquefaction potential. CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS Based upon our field investigation and laboratory testing, it is our opinion that the proposed residential development is feasible from a soil mechanic's standpoint provided that the recommendations included in this report are considered in building foundation design and site preparation. Due to the somewhat loose condition of the surface soils and the potential for delineated settlements, remedial grading is recommended for the building areas. We recommend that remedial grading within the proposed building areas include the overexeavation and recompaction of the primary foundation bearing soils. Specific recommendations for site preparation are presented in the Site Grading section of this report. Based upon the depth to groundwater, it is our opinion that the potential for liquefaction affecting the site is negligible. The remedial grading recommended for building areas will result in the construction of a uniform compacted soil mat beneath all footings. In our opinion, liquefaction related mitigation measures in addition to the site grading and foundation design recommendations included in this report should not be necessary. The site is located in one of the more seismically active areas in California. Design professionals should be aware of the site setting and the potential for earthquake activity during the anticipated life of the structure should be acknowledged. The accelerations that may be experienced on the site (as previously discussed) should be considered in design. The seismic provisions included in the Uniform Building Code for Seismic Zone 4 should be considered the minimum design criteria. Pertinent 1997 UBC Seismic Design Criteria is summarized in Appendix C. Sladden Engineering February 6, 2003 -4- Project No. 544-3001 03-02-068 Caving did occur within our boring and the potential for caving should be expected within deeper excavations. All excavations should be constructed in accordance with the normal CaIOSHA excavation criteria. On the basis of our observations of the materials encountered, we anticipate that the near surface sandy silts and silty sands will be classified by CalOSHA as Type C. Soil conditions should be verified in the field by a "Competent person" employed by the Contractor. The near surface soils encountered during our investigation were found to be non -expansive. laboratory testing indicated an Expansion Index of 0 for the surface silty sands that corresponds with the "very low" expansion category in accordance with UBC Table 18-I-B. The following recommendations present more detailed design criteria that have been developed on the basis of our field and laboratory investigation. The recommendations are based upon non -expansive soils criteria. Foundation Design: The results of our investigation indicate that either conventional shallow continuous footings or isolated pad footings that are supported upon properly compacted soils, may be expected to provide adequate support for the proposed structure foundations. Building pad grading should be performed as described in the Site Grading Section of this report to provide for uniform and firm bearing conditions for the structure foundations. Footings should extend at least 12 inches beneath lowest adjacent grade. Isolated square or rectangular footings should be at least 2 feet square and continuous footings should be at least 12 inches wide. Continuous footings may be designed using an allowable bearing value of 1500 pounds per square foot (psf) and isolated pad footings may be designed using an allowable bearing pressure of 1800 psf. The allowable bearing pressures are applicable to dead and frequently applied live loads. The allowable bearing pressures may be increased by 1/3 to resist wind and seismic loading. Care should be taken to see that bearing or subgrade soils are not allowed to become saturated from the ponding of rainwater or irrigation. Drainage from the building area should be rapid and complete. The recommendations provided in the preceding paragraph are based on the assumption that all footings will be supported upon properly compacted engineered fill soils. All grading should be performed under the testing and inspection of the Soils Engineer or his representative. Prior to the placement of concrete, we recommend that the footing excavations be inspected in order to verify that they extend into compacted soil and are free of loose and disturbed materials. Settlements: Settlements resulting from the anticipated foundation loads should be minimal provided that the recommendations included in this report are considered in foundation design and construction. The estimated ultimate settlements are calculated to be.approximately one inch when using the recommended bearing values. As a practical matter, differential settlements between footings can be assumed as one-half of the total settlement. Lateral Design: Resistance to lateral loads can be provided by a combination of friction acting at the base of the slabs or foundations and passive earth pressure along the sides of the foundations. A coefficient of friction of 0.40 between soil' and concrete may be used with consideration to dead load forces only. A passive earth pressure of 250 pounds per square foot, per foot of depth, may be used for the sides of footings that are poured against properly compacted native or approved non -expansive importsoils. Passive earth pressure should be ignored within the upper 1 foot except where confined (such as beneath a floor slab). Sladden Engineering February 6, 2003 -5- Project No. 544-3001 03-02-068 Retaining Walls: Retaining walls may be necessary to accomplish the proposed construction. Lateral pressures for use in retaining wall design can be estimated using an equivalent fluid weight of 40 pcf for level free -draining native backfill conditions. For walls that are to be restrained at the top, the equivalent fluid weight should be increased to 60 pcf for level free - draining native backfill conditions. Backdrains should be provided for the full height of the walls. Expansive Soils: Due to the prominence of "very low" expansion category soils near the surface, the expansion potential of the foundation bearing soils should not be a controlling factor in foundation or floor slab design. Expansion potential should be reevaluated subsequent to grading, Concrete Slabs -on -Grade: All surfaces to receive concrete slabs -on -grade should be underlain by a minimum compacted non -expansive fill thickness of 24 inches, placed as described in the Site Grading Section of this report. Where slabs are to receive moisture sensitive floor coverings or where dampness of the floor slab is not desired, we recommend the use of an appropriate vapor barrier or an adequate capillary break, Vapor barriers should be protected by sand in order to reduce the possibility of puncture and to aid in obtaining uniform concrete curing. Reinforcement of slabs -on -grade in order to resist expansive soil pressures should not be necessary. However, reinforcement will have a beneficial effect in containing cracking due to concrete shrinkage_ Temperature and shrinkage related cracking should be anticipated in all concrete slabs -on -grade. Slab reinforcement and the spacing of control joints should be determined by the Structural Engineer. Soluble Sulfates: The soluble sulfate concentrations of the surface soils were determined to be 100 parts per million (ppm), which is generally considered non corrosive with respect to concrete. The use of Type V cement and specialized sulfate resistant concrete mix designs should not be necessary. Tentative Pavement Design: All paving should be underlain by a minimum compacted fill thickness of 12 inches (excluding aggregate base). This may be performed as described in the Site Grading Section of this report. R-Value testing was not conducted during our investigation but based upon the silty nature of the surface soils, an R-Value of approximately 50 appears appropriate for preliminary pavement design for onsite roadways. The following preliminary pavement section is based upon a design R-Value of 50. Parking areas and areas limited to auto and light truck traffic (Traffic Index = 5.0) Use 3.0 inches of asphalt on 4.0 inches of Class 2 base material Aggregate base should conform to the requirements for Class 2 Aggregate base in Section 26 of CalTrans Standard Specifications, January 1992. Asphaltic concrete should conform to Section 39 of the CalTrans Standard Specifications. The recommended sections should be provided with a uniformly compacted subgradc and precise control of thickness and elevations during placement. Pavement and slab designs are tentative and should be confirmed at the completion of site grading when the subgradc soils are in -place. This will include sampling and testing of the actual subgrade soils and an analysis based upon the specific traffic information Sladden Engineering February 6, 2003 -6- Project No, 544-3001 03-02-068 Shrinkage and Subsidence: Volumetric shrinkage of the material that is excavated and replaced as controlled compacted fill should be anticipated. We estimate that this shrinkage could vary from 15 to 20 percent. Subsidence of the surfaces that are scarified and compacted should be between 0.1 and 0.3 tenths of a foot. This will vary depending upon the type of equipment used, the moisture content of the soil at the time of grading and the actual degree of compaction attained. These values for shrinkage and subsidence are exclusive of losses that will occur due to the stripping of the organic material from the site and the removal of oversize material. General Site Grading: All grading should be performed in accordance with the grading ordinance of the City of La Quinta, California. The following recommendations have been developed on the basis of our field and laboratory testing and are intended to provide a uniform compacted mat of soil beneath the building slabs and foundations. L Site Clearing: Proper site clearing will be very important. Any existing vegetation, slabs, foundations, abandoned underground utilities or irrigation lines should be removed from the proposed building areas and the resulting excavations should be properly backfilled. Soils that are disturbed during site clearing should be removed and replaced as controlled compacted fill under the direction of the Soils Engineer. 2. Preparation of Building and Foundation Areas: In order to provide adequate and uniform bearing conditions, we recommend overexcavation throughout the proposed building areas. The building areas should be overexcavated to a depth of at least 3 feet below existing grade or 2 feet below the bottom of the footings, whichever is deeper. The exposed soils should then be scarified to a depth of 1 foot, moisture conditioned and recompacted to at least 90 percent relative compaction. The excavated material may then be replaced as engineered fill material as recommended below. 3. Placement of Compacted Fill: Within the building pad areas, fill materials should be spread in thin lifts, and compacted at near optimum moisture content to a minimum of 90 percent relative compaction. Imported fill material shall have an Expansion Index not exceeding 20. The contractor shall notify the Soils Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of importing soils in order to provide sufficient time for the evaluation of proposed import materials. The contractor shall be responsible for delivering material to the site that complies with the project specifications. Approval by the Soils Engineer will be based upon material delivered to the site and not the preliminary evaluation of import sources. Our observations of the materials encountered during our investigation indicate that compaction within the native soils will be most readily obtained by means of heavy rubber tired equipment and/or sheepsfoot compactors. A 'uniform and near optimum moisture content should be maintained during fill placement and compaction. 4. Preparation of Slab and Paving Areas: All surfaces to receive asphalt concrete paving or exterior concrete slabs -on -grade, should be underlain by a minimum compacted fill thickness of 12 inches. This may be accomplished by a combination of overexcavation, scarification and reeompaction of the surface, and replacement of the excavated material as controlled compacted fill. Compaction of the slab and pavement areas should be to a minimum of 90 percent relative compaction. Sladden Engineering February 6, 2003 -7- Project No. 544-3001 03-02-068 5. Testing and Inspection: During grading tests and observations should be performed by the Soils Engineer or his representative in order to verify that the grading is being performed in accordance with the project specifications, Field density testing shall be performed in accordance with applicable ASTM test standards. The minimum acceptable degree of compaction shall be 90 percent of the maximum dry density as obtained by the ASTM D1557-91 test method. Where testing indicates insufficient density, additional compactive effort shall be applied until retesting indicates satisfactory compaction. GENERAL The findings and recommendations presented in this report are based upon an interpolation of the soil conditions between boring locations and extrapolation of these conditions throughout the proposed building area. Should conditions encountered during grading appear different than those indicated in this report, this office should be notified, This report is considered to be applicable for use by Desert Elite, Inc., Inc. for the specific site and project described herein. The use of this report by other parties or for other projects is not authorized. The recommendations of this report are contingent upon monitoring of the grading operations by a representative of Sladden Engineering. All recommendations are considered to be tentative pending our review of the grading operations and additional testing, if indicated. If others are employed to perform any soil testing, this office should be notified prior to such testing in order to coordinate any required site visits by our representative and to assure indemnification of Sladden Engineering. We recommend that a pre job conference be held on the site prior to the initiation of site grading. The purpose of this meeting will be to assure a complete understanding of the recommendations presented in this report as they apply to the actual grading performed. Sladden Engineering February 6, 2003 -8- Project No. 544-300 l 03-02-068 REFERENCES ASCE Journal of Gcotcchnical Engineering Division, April 1974. Boore, Joyner and Fumal (1994) Estimation of Response .Spectra and Peak Acceleralionsfrom North American Earthquakes, U. S. Geological Survey, Open File Reports 94-127 and 93-509. Finn, W. E. Liam, (1996) Evaluation of Liquefaction Potential for Different Earthquake Magnitudes and Site Conditions, National Center for Earthquake Engineering Research Committee. Joyner and Boore, (1988) Measurements, Characterization and Prediction of Strong Ground Motion, ASCE Journal of Gcotcchnical Engineering, Special Publication No. 20. Lee & Albaisa (1974) "Earthquake Induced Settlements in Saturated Sands". Seed and ldriss (1982) Ground Motions and Soil Liquefaction During Earthquakes, Earthquake Engineering Research Institute Monograph. Seed, Tokimatsu; Harder and Chung, (1985), Influence of SPT Procedures in Soil Liquefaction Resistance Evaluations, ASCE Journal of Gcotechnical Engineering, Volume 111, No. 12, December. Rogers, Thomas H., Geologic Map of California, Santa Ana Map Sheet. Riverside County, 1984, Seismic Safety Element of the Riverside County General Plan Sladden Engineering APPENDIX A Site Plan Boring Logs APPENDIX A FIELD EXPLORATION For our field investigation, 10 exploratory borings were excavated on January 3 and 10, 2003, using a truck mounted hollow stem auger rig (Mobile B-61) in the approximate locations indicated on the site plan included in this appendix. Continuous log of the materials encountered were prepared on the site by a representative of Sladden Engineering. Boring logs are included in this appendix. Representative undisturbed samples were obtained within our boring by driving a thin -walled steel penetration sampler (California split spoon sampler) or a Standard Penetration Test (SPT) sampler with a 140 pound hammer dropping approximately 30 inches (ASTM D 1586): The number of blows required to drive the samplers 18 inches was recorded (generally in 6 inch increments). Blowcounts are indicated on the boring log. The California samplers arc 3.0 inches in diameter, carrying brass sample rings having inner diameters of 2.5 inches. The standard penetration samplers are 2.0 inches in diameter with an inner diameter of 1.5 inches. Undisturbed samples were removed from the sampler and placed in moisture sealed containers in order to preserve the natural soil moisture content. Bulk samples were obtained from the excavation spoils and samples were then transported to our laboratory for further observations and testing. Vol Pa-e(kVi' Avenue 52 - • ITE' ,r ......:...:. e rr' � � ✓ 'j70 am 40 Figure 1 - Vicinity Map Monroe Ranch Proposed 80-acre Residential Development North SWC Monroe Street & Avenue 52 Indio Area Riverside County; California No Scale Sladden Engineering Project Number- 544-3001 1 Date: 2-10-03 1 II 1 1 M O G-0,8 -03 It slightly sandy - `--- —� 25 319/9 Sandy Silt: Brown, slightly clayey ML ••• 29 64%, passing #200 Proposed 80 Acre Residential Development A.P.N. 767-200-004 & -005 / S.W.C. Monroe Street & Avenue 52 / Ifidio California Date: 1-3-03 Borine No. 2 44-300 1 p o DESCRIPTION., qZ REMARKS 0 3/515 Silty Sand.. Brown, SM 97 8 - fine grained 5 5/7/10 104 6 .._ Sand: Brown, fine grained SP 104 4 -•- 10 - 6/11112 15 6/9/13 Silty Sand: Brown, fine grained SM 102 12 ... with interbedded clayey silt layers Silty Clay: Brown CL 88 35 20 2/314 Total Depth = 21.5' - Recovered Sample No Bedrock No Groundwater 25 Proposed 80 Acre Residential Development A.P.N. 767-200-004 & -005 / S.W.C. Monroe Street & Avenue 521 Indio California Date: 1-10-03 S rin No: 4 Jo DESCRIPTION °' A REMARKS G` n Cn pp U a) p V] r7.� e oe 0 o Silty Sand: Brown, SM fine grained 31213 Clayey Silt: Brown, sandy ML 95 28 io VIM Silty Clay: Brown with thin_ CL 87 S6 ' interbedded silty sand layers Silty Sand: Brown, SM 97 9 ___ la 3/6/7 _ very silty, fine grained 20 2/4/G Clayey Silt: Brown, sandy ML 89 31. Total Depth = 21. ' Recovered Sample No Bedrock No Groundwater Proposed 80 Acre Residential Development A.P.N. 767-200-004 & -005 / S.W.C. Monroe Street & Avenue 52 / Indio California Date: 1-10-03 BoringNo, 5 Job N • 544-3001 �w M 3� DESCRIPTION' Q REMARKS 0 Sand: Brown, SP/S _M 4/6/6 slightly silty, fine grained 100 , 6 9% passing #200 Silty Clay: Brown CL 91 32 -- 99% passing #200 a 2/9r4 io in im - Sand: Brown, fine grained with thin clay layers SP 97 6 •-- 7% passing #200 1a 0/7/10 _ Sand: Brown, fine grained SP 5 ••• 7% passing #200 20 4/6/8 Silty Sand: Brown, SM 8 ° passing fi200 20% fine grained Sand: Brown, SP/S G -- 9%passing 0200 25 5/9/12 • slightly silty, fine grained Proposed 80 Acre Residential Development A.P.N. 767-200-004 & -005 / S.W.C. Monroe Street & Avenue 52 / Indio California Date:1-10-03 orinLr o. 6 Job No.: 544-aQQI o DESCRIPTION d �` o 4� � � � REMARKS as% O 34 0 - Sand: Brown, SP/SM slightly silty, fine grained 6 4/7/11 103 6 — 10 _ ' 316/11 Sand: Brown, fine grained SF 94 7` -- ! 6/9/8 Sand: Brown, SP/SM 95 8 •_. slightly silty, fine grained 20 - 4/11/14 105 6 ••• - Recovered Sample Total Depth = 21.5' No Bedrock No Groundwater za 30 3b 4o 45 50 S Nate: The etratificetion line SS represent the approximate boundaries between the soil types; the transitions may be gradual. 0 1. Proposed 80 Acre Residential Development A.P.N. 767-200-004 & -005 / S.W.C, Monroe Street & Avenue 52 / Indio California Date: 1-10-03 Bo inJob No.: 544 DESCRIPTION, o REMARKS o Silty Sand: Brown, SM very silty, fine grained s 4/4/6 Silty Clay: Brown CL 88 34 -•- 10 _ 5/10/15 Sand: Brown, fore grained SP 104 5 1s 2/516 Silty Clay: Brown CL 82 38 ••- 20 Silty Sand: Brown, SM A/0/0 fine grained 102 7 ••• -Recovered Sample Total Depth = 21.5' No Bedrock " No Groundwater 25 ao t Proposed 80 Acre Residential Development A.P.N. 767-200-004 & -0051 S.W.C. Monroe Street & Avenue 52 / Indio California Date: 1-10-03 oring No.9 job No.: 544- b •� o tD DESCRIPTION d � A � 5 � REMARKS " Mzz" CO U as W 23 ;e �v 0 Silty Sand: Brown, SM very silty, fine grained a 2/2/7 96 21 10 21213 Silty Clay: Brown CL 79 42 ••- 15 213/3 81 41 --- 20 2161E Sandy Silt: Brown, clayey ML 87 25 Total Depth = 21.E • Recovered Sample No Bedrock No Groundwater 25 30 as ' 40 45 50 Note: The stratification lines _ represent the approximate 55 boundaries between the soil types; the transitions may be gradual. APPENDIX B Laboratory Testing Laboratory Test Results 0 r 0 APPENDIX B LABORATORY TESTING Representative bulk and relatively undisturbed soil samples were obtained in the field and returned to our laboratory for additional observations and testing. Laboratory testing was generally performed in two phases. The first phase consisted of testing in order to determine the compaction of the existing natural soil and the general engineering classifications of the soils underlying the site. This testing was performed in order to estimate the engineering characteristics of the soil and to serve as a basis for selecting samples for the second phase of testing. The second phase consisted of soil mechanics testing. This testing including consolidation, shear strength and expansion testing was performed in order to provide a means of developing specific design recommendations based on the mechanical properties of the soil. CLASSIFICATION AND COMPACTION TESTING Unit Weight and Moisture Content Determinations: Each undisturbed sample was weighed and measured in order to determine its unit weight. A small portion of each sample was then subjected to testing in order to determine its moisture content." This was used in order to determine the dry density of the soil in its natural condition. The results of this testing are shown on the boring Log. Maximum Density -Optimum Moisture Determinations: Representative soil types were selected for maximum density determinations. This testing was performed in accordance with the ASTM Standard D1557-91, 'Pest Method A. The results of this testing are presented graphically in this appendix. The maximum densities are compared to the field densities of the soil in order to determine the existing relative compaction to the soil. This is shown on the Boring'L.og, and is useful in estimating the strength and compressibility of the soil. Classification Testing:. Soil samples were selected for classification testing. This testing consists of mechanical grain size analyses and Atterberg Limits determinations. These provide information for developing classifications for the soil in accordance with the Unified Classification System. This classification system categorizes the soil into groups having similar engineering characteristics. The results of this testing are very useful in detecting variations in the soils and in selecting samples for further testing. SOIL MECHANIC'S TESTING Direct Shear Testing: One bulk sample was selected for Direct Shear Testing. This testing measures the shear strength of the soil under various normal pressures and is used in developing parameters for foundation design and lateral design. Testing was performed using recompacted test specimens, which were saturated prior to testing. Testing was performed using a strain controlled test apparatus with normal pressures ranging from 800 to 2300 pounds per square foot. Expansion Testing: One bulk sample was selected for Expansion testing. Expansion testing was performed in accordance with the U13C Standard 1.8-2. This testing consists of remolding 4-inch diameter by 1-inch thick test specimens to a moisture content and dry density corresponding to approximately 50 percent saturation. The samples are subjected to a surcharge of 144 pounds per square foot and allowed to reach equilibrium, At that point the specimens are inundated with distilled water. The linear expansion is then measured until complete. Consolidation Testing: .Four relatively undisturbed samples were selected for consolidation testing. for this testing one -inch thick test specimens are subjected to vertical loads varying from 575 psf to 11520 psf applied progressively. The consolidation at each load increment was recorded prior to placement of each subsequent load. The specimens were saturated at the 575 psf or 720 psf load increment. Maximum Density/Optimum Moisture ASTM D698%D 1557 Project Number: 544-3001 Project Name: Monroe & Ave 52 Lab ID Number: Sample Location: B 1 @ 0-5' Description: Silghtly Silty Sand Maximum Density: 110 pcf Optimum Moisture 13.5% 14 lac 115 130 w 125 .q d 120 A 115 110 105 Ion Sieve Size % Retained , 3/4" 3/8" #4 0.0 January 17, 2003 ASTM D-1557 A hammer Type: Machine 5 I0 15 20 25 Moisture Content, % Max Nnslty Sladden Engineering Revised 12/03/02 Direct Shear ASTM D 3080-90 (modified for unconsolidated, undrained conditions) Job Number 544-3001 . I January 17, 2003 Job Name Monroe & Ave 52 Initial Dry Density: 96.8 pcf Lab ID Numbe Initial Mosture Content: 14.0 % Sample ID Boring 1 @ 0-5' Peak Friction Angle (0): 270 Soil Descriptio Silty Sand Cohesion (c): 60 psf Sample Type Remolded @ 90% of Maximum Density Test Results 1 2 3 4 Avera c Moisture Content, % 20.1 20.1 20.1 20.1 20.1 Saturation, % 73.2 73.2 73.2 73.2 73.2 Normal Stress, kips 0.151 0.301 0.603 1 1.206 Peak Stress, kips 0.153 0.207 j 0.342 0.675 1.2 1.0 0.8 L r+ 0.6 d 0.4 0.2 0.0 � � Ptak Stress Linear (Peak Stress) 0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 Normal Stress 1.0 1.2 1.4 n Direct Shear Sladden Engineering Reviscd 12/03/02 Gradation ASTM C117 & C136 Project Number: 544-3001 January 17, 2003 Project Name: Monroe & Ave 52 Sample ID: Boring 1 @ 0-5 f Sieve Sieve Percent Size, in Size, mm Passing 1" 25.4 100 3/4" 19.1 100 1/2" 12.7 100 3/8" 9.53 100 #4 4.75. 100 #8 2.36 100 #16 1.18 100 #30 0.60 100 #50 0.30 95 #100 0.15 66 #200 0.074 37 II�Ih1�1111N�� I ., mmi�milliMilli i� mumlm►�i e��ni�olmillillikim i11�v0ii� mm[iiii ME '011111 1i'i1i'1 p1NO� INp,, o0��n� �o�■� OHIO IIII�01�■�Iq�� Ilq� In p ENEMIESillool � 11111im■m limommill ommiii 11 ME MINE iiiiiimmlllllllll mmiiiii m Ilion Emil M1111110 I�III1111115sm,, imommillillim N limmmililill��IlvvIIIIlI111I■ 1lm■=III�� Grudatioll Sladden Engineering Rcviscd II/20/02 Gradation ASTM C117 & C136 Project Number: 544-3001 January 17, 2003 Project Name: Monroe & Ave 52 Sample ID: 3@10 Sieve i Sieve Percent Size, in Size, mm Passing 1 " 25.4 100 3/4" 19.1 100 1/2" 12.7 100 3/8" 9.53 100 #4 4.75 100 #8 2.36 100 #16 1.18 100 #30 0.60 100 #50 0.30 94 #100 0.15 31 #200 0.074 7 .f anHn�am.�■mum ' lot �I�� i�iinui� man��nun�■�muu■= a��uu�.:��u.■�e��ve��eveme�� nnn� �miu�■�iranu�n nnu�i �m�o��unnu�n � credution Sladden Engineering Rcviycd 11/20/02 Gradation ASTM Cl 17 & C136 ` Project Number: 544-3001 January 17, 2003 Project Name: Monroe & Ave 52 Sample'ID: 5@15 , Sieve Sieve Percent Size, in --- Size, mm Passing 1" 25.4 100 3/4" 19.1 100 1 /2" 12.7 100 3/8" 9.53 1.00 #4 4.75 100 #8 . 2.36 100 #16 1.18 100 #30 0.60 100 #50 0.30 73 #100 0.15 27 #200 0.074 7 n ��ma�� ►��■�en��iGiv ,, ma�u�nm�■��nm�■��nu iu��n■�nu�n■�nw��iumu� na�u0u�n�■�mw��mma�imu■■� imm■�u��u■�me�u►�unnu�non�� 111111101t.11111011In ME �a Gradation Sladden Engineering Revised 1120/62 Gradation . ASTM C117 & C136 Project Number: 544-3001 Project Name: Monroe & Ave 52 Sample 1D: 8@10 Sieve Sieve Percent Size, in Size, mm Passing 1" 25.4 100 3/4" 19.1 100 -1/2" 12.7 100 3/8" 9.53 100 #4 4.75 100 #8 2.36 100 #16 1,18 100 430 0.60 100 #50 0.30 94 #100 0.15 39 #200 0.074 6 January '17, 2003 � ' ��i1��99;e:oe1B�:BBlo �Imiii Illj�llll�■■�IIIII�■��plq�■■�IIIII�■� � ��■�IIIII��■I�p1O�i■�IIIII�■� IIII�... 6 �IiiiHIM iMIRIMIIIIII:MIe6IIai9i■ �� I� Gii�iiiiiii■�naui■i�ia°iin m�■� nnn mmsmuna � Gradation Sladden Engineering Revised 11/20/62 One Dimensional Consolidation ASTM D2435 & D5333 •. u•- ,• 11 .� 11 C_■C__ ■C__■■®___ ___ ---_-J■�_____� ri _____�■�---�_ a�s____ ____USUMMEMM=M a■■ ____ ----- ---- `HMMMM Hi 'MMoslems -- MW ----- -M� .-SH-----°iE--------- MEMO M__° __=am___O _W7_.__MM _______0 _o=n n °sue-Ji��__�imm -is MM a____ �I______ nIN-.-MNMMM __ ____ _____ram ��•�� ___ _-■Ca��- ��_:I■C� ® ___ -___ °c--==6e=__am =:°°°ESE® man a Mimi! comma a= _° ___a9____ �'EMEM °_____ a■mE MMM Ems --- ---m®-----I------g .� minon � ism MINE A One Dimensional Consolidation. ASTM D2435 & D5333 Job Number: 544-3001 Job Name: Monroe & Ave 52 Sample ID: 1 @5 Soil Description: Silty Sand 1 n -2 •3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 0.0 January 17, 2003 Initial Dry Density, pcf: 91.6 Initial Moisture, %: 25 Initial Void Ratio: 0.819 Specific Gravity: 2.67 % Change in Height vs Normal Presssure Diagram —�Hefore Saturation �Aft:Saturata Rebound �HYConsoli= 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 Consolidation Sladden Engineering Rcviscd 11/20/02 One Dimensional Consolidation ASTM D2435 & D5333 Job Number: 544-3001 Job Name: Monroe & Ave 52 Sample ID: 6@5 Soil Description: Slightly Silty Sand 0 January 17, 2003 Initial Dry Density, pcf: 100.1 Initial Moisture, %: 6 'Initial Void Ratio: 0.665 Specific Gravity: 2.67 % Change in Height vs Normal Presssure Diagram Before Saturation —A After Saturation —0 Rebound —F-Hydro Consolidation MMWI MUM11!111:■::::::::-:■■■ . ■®a:■�a........ o......°I ®!■EEEEEEEEE== ==°E ��■■l9EEEEEE:EEEEEE ■■■■■■. :::: ■■........ MUN ......■. ■■■■�a ■11SUM::■o■. ■■m0�ii�iaiiiiiE-room®�■■�� mol Ie■■■■■■■■■111momil■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ US Im■■..-----on ------■..■..■■■-E---Ci■■■■EE E-�a®eellil6�� ee. ■■11 ■■■ ■■■■■■■ i■■®�EEEi - ■ ■■■� .■.EUE--■......�10■m-----.■...��EBai■�i■mo ■ --.... ■�e ■■ ■■■■■ ■■■i■ Imp-----�ale�----0001111l111■EW1som11158-------MUM111aaEliil ■ ■1ilE 1 11 Ism I :■■■■:■i... MEMO 111:■■■■■■■I11111111 clmmmmmm■ i■1:1!EEa�E®®6:68e�■�a��i■®osa::g�i smEEE�■i1iim One Dimensional Consolidation ASTM D2435 & D5333 Job Number: 544-3001 January 17, 2003 Job Name: Monroe & Ave 52 Initial Dry Density, pcf: 100.2 Sample 1D: 9@5 Initial Moisture, W 21 Soil Description: Silty Sand Initial Void Ratio: 0.663 Specific Gravity: 2.67 % Change in Height vs Normal Presssure Diagram --0-- Before Saturation —After Saturation a Rebound --E— Hydro Consolidation __ ■ ■■■ ■■■ ■■■■ ■■■■■ ■■■■■IN `��a ■■■■■ ■ ME O.■ ■■■■�CENMEEM■ MM■MO ..■■ ■■..- •• ■..■. ... ■.-- ��-...E�IE■...IIII..:.:�NINE MIMMM■ MOM ..■ .... MEIN■IN= ■■E.■ MEMO■■ �■ .a�■ _I. ■.I�■ _!■O■ ■. MM .. �C.■. C.. C... Cl ■0... .C.. MEMO.■ .... �.■■� ■■■R �..■■��s■ ■ ��■■■■��■■..■. °maa■C-a■aa■.°■aE:°::■EEi2::■■■eaa:::aa■aa--- as ■■ ■i■ °i■. ■ri■■ i■... RiaRi -■CiEN on 1a ■MI1�'--=�C....a�M■..°gE.....alEMEE aa■. ■- IEEE. a {i.. 8i -- 5 E IN will .. LIME. .... 'fail '1100 G CEa' ": m' mill ■: .. ine�. ■ C■ .■ie gad a �i6iE1.,B�s�E ° ..■� ..�® ...°6e...6�EC..■.� �... ..MEE.MEE .. E ills MEN '10101 M..RaE"..aEE...a �EMMIN".� �■MEEMER --'9 ■.aaa■■aaE ■■■■■aaea°■°aaa m■ai■°via:°aE°iEE° .. ■. ...silo .... .. ■C.'�C■.■7�C:. miC.■. a■C.. �� - ■C■■ Expansion Index ASTM D 4829/UBC 29-2 x Job Number: 544-3001 Date: 1/17/03 Job Name: Monroe & Ave 52 Tech: Leslie Lab ID: Sample ID: B 1 a 0-5 Soil Description: l Wet Density, pcf: 109.4 Dry Denstiy, pcf. 96.0 Saturation: 50.0 Expansion IRack # Date/Time 1/21/03 1 9:50 AM Initial Reading 0.500 hinal Reading 0.503 Expansion Index 3 . (Final - Initial) x 1000 EI Sladden Engineering Rcvised 12/10/02 ANAHEIM TEST LABORATORY 3008 S. ORANGE AVENUE SANTA ANA. CALIFORNIA 92707 PHONE (714) 549-7267 TO: SLADDEN ENGINEERING: y 1 f 15/03 6782 STANTON AVE. SUITE E DATE: BUENA PARK, CA. 90621 eo. W.Chain of Custody Shipper No. ATTN: BRETT/RAVE Lob. No. A-2575 SpeclflColipm Materipf: SOXL PROJECT: #544-3001 MONROE & AVE. 52 B1 @ 0-5' ANALYTICAL REPORT CORROSION SERIES SUMMARY OF DATA pH SOLUBLE SULFATES SOLUBLE CHLORIDES MIN. RESISTIVITY per Ca. 417 per Ca. 422 per Ca. 643 ppm ppm ohm -cm r 8.0 100 131 2,059 APPENDIX C 1997 USC Seismic Design Critcria February 6, 2003 -14- Project No. 544-3001 03-02-068 1997 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE SEISMIC DESIGN INFORMATION The International Conference of Building Officials 1997 Uniform. Building Code contains substantial revisions and additions to the earthquake engineering section in Chapter 16. Concepts contained in the code that will be relevant to construction of the proposed structures are summarized below. Ground shaking is expected to be the primary hazard most likely to affect the site, based upon proximity to significant faults capable of generating large earthquakes. Major fault zones considered to be most likely to create strong ground shaking at the site arc listed below. Fault Zone Approximate Distance From Site Fault Type 1997 UBC San Andreas 8.9 km A San Jacinto 32.7 km A Based on our field observations and understanding of local geologic conditions, the soil profile type judged applicable to this site is So, generally described as stiff or dense soil. The site is located within UBC Seismic Zone 4. The following table presents additional coefficients and factors relevant to seismic mitigation for new construction upon adoption of the 1997 code. Near:Source Near -Source Seismic Seismic Seismic Acceleration Velocity Coefficient Coefficient Source .Factor, N. Factor N CA C,, San Andreas 1.04 1.28 0.44NB 0.64N„ San Jacinto - .1.0 1.0 0.44NB 0.64N,, ,Sladden Engineering i C , ww+wwwwxxxxxwxxx*xxx*** x w * E Q F A U L T w Version 1.00 wwwwwxwwxxxxxxxxx***#*+ •. DETERMINISTIC ESTIMATION OF PEAK,ACCELERATION FROM DIGITIZED FAULTS JOB NUMBER: 544-3001 DATE: 01-17-2003 JOB NAME: SWC Avenue 52 & Monroe Street Indio Area Riverside County, California CALCULATION NAME: Test Run Analysis FAULT -DATA -FILE NAME: CDMGFLTE.DAT SITE COORDINATES: SITE LATITUDE: 33.6689 SITE LONGITUDE: 116.2383 SEARCH RADIUS: 100 mi ATTENUATION RELATION: 5) Boore et al. (1997) Horiz. - SOIL (310) UNCERTAINTY (M=Median, S=Sigma): M Number of Sigmas: 0.0 DISTANCE MEASURE: cd_2drp SCOND: 0 Basement Depth: 5.00 km' Campbell SSR: Campbell SHR: COMPUTE PEAK HORIZONTAL ACCELERATION FAULT -DATA FILE USED: CDMGFLTE.DAT MINIMUM DEPTH VALUE (km): 0.0 1 • C: --------------- EQFAULT SUMMARY ----------------------------- DETERMINISTIC SITE PARAMETERS Page 1 ESTIMATED MAX. EARTHQUAKE EVENT j APPROXIMATE ------------------------------- ABBREVIATED DISTANCE MAXIMUM I PEAK JEST. SITE FAULT NAME I mi (km) IEARTHQUAKEI SITE JINTENSITY MAG.(MW) I ACCEL. g IMOD.MERC. SAN ANDREAS - Coachella I 5.5( 8.9)I 7.1 I 0.366 j IX SAN ANDREAS - Southern I 5.5( 8.9)1 7.4 I 0.429 I X SAN JACINTO-ANZA I 20.3( 32.7)1 7.2 I 0.158 I Vill BURNT MTN. I 20.7( 33.3)I 6.4 I 0.102 I VII SAN JACINTO-COYOTE CREEK I 21.3( 34.3)I 6.8 I 0.123 I VII EUREKA PEAK I 21.4( 34.4)I 6.4 I 0.100 I VII SAN ANDREAS - San Bernardino I 22.3( 35.9)I 7.3 0.155 I VIII SAN JACINTO - BORREGO I 32.5( 52.3)I 6.6 0.080 I VII PINTO MOUNTAIN I 33.1( 53.2)I 7.0 I 0.098 I VII EMERSON So. - COPPER MTN. 1 33.9( 54.5)I 6.9 I 0.091 I VII PISGAH-BULLION MTN.-MESQUITE LK I 35.0( 56.4)I 7.1 I 0.099 I VII LANDERS I 35.7( 57.4)I 7.3 I 0.108 1 VII BRAWLEY SEISMIC ZONE I 37.8( 60.8)I 6.4 I 0.064 I VI EARTHQUAKE VALLEY I 39.0( 62.8)I 6.5 I 0.066 I VI SAN JACINTO-SAN JACINTO VALLEY 1 39.3( 63.3)1 6.9 I 0.081 I VII NORTH FRONTAL FAULT ZONE (East) I 40.8( 65.7)I 6.7 I 0.086 I VII ELSINORE-JULIAN I 43.0( 69.2)I 7.1 I 0.084 I VII ELMORE RANCH I 45.2( 72.7)I 6.6 I 0.062 I VI JOHNSON VALLEY (Northern) I 46.4( 74.7)I 6.7 I 0.064 I VI CALICO - HIDALGO I 47.7( 76.7)I 7.1 I 0.078 I VII ELSINORE-TEMECULA I 48.9( 78.7)I 6.8 1 0.065 I VI ELSINORE-COYOTE MOUNTAIN I 49.2( 79.1)I 6.8 I 0.065 I VI SUPERSTITION MTN. (San Jacinto) I 50.1( 80.7)I 6.6 I 0.057 I VI SUPERSTITION HILLS (San Jacinto)I 50.8( 81.8)I 6.6 1 0.057 I VI LENWOOD-LOCKHART-OLD WOMAN SPRGSI 52.5( 84.5)1 7.3 I 0.080 I VII NORTH FRONTAL FAULT ZONE (West) I .53.1( 85.4)I 7.0 I 0.083 I VII HELENDALE - S. LOCKHA•RDT I 60.6( 97.5)1 7.1 1 0.065 I VI SAN JACINTO-SAN BERNARDINO 1 62.3( 100.2)I 6.7 1 0.051 I VI ELSINORE-GLEN IVY I 63.8( 102.7)I 6.8 I 0.053 I VI IMPERIAL I 64.9( 104.4)1 7.0 I 0.058 I VI LAGUNA SALADA 68.4( 110.0)I 7.0 I 0.056 I VI CLEGHORN I 69.9( 112.5)I 6.5 I 0.042 I VI ROSE CANYON I 76.9( 123.7)I 6.9 I 0.048 I VI NEWPORT-INGLEWOOD (Offshore) I 77.1( 124.1)I 6.9 I 0.048 1 VI CHINO -CENTRAL AVE. (Elsinore) 1 77.2( 124.3)I 6.7 1 0.053 I VI CUCAMONGA I 77.4( 124.6)I 7.0 1 0.062 ( VI WHITTIER 181.5( 131.1)I 6.8 0.044 I VI SAN ANDREAS - Mojave 86.5( 139.2)I 7.1 0.049 I VI SAN ANDREAS - 1857 Rupture I 86.5( 139.2)I 7.8 I 0.071 I VI SAN JOSE 1 89.0( 143.2)I 6.5 1 0.043 1 VI ----------------------------- DETERMINISTIC SITE PARAMETERS ----------------------------- Page 2 ESTIMATED MAX. EARTHQUAKE EVENT APPROXIMATE ------------------------------- ABBREVIATED DISTANCE I MAXIMUM ( PEAK JEST. SITE FAULT NAME mi (km)� JEARTHQUAKEJ SITE JINTENSITY MAG.(Mw) I ACCEL. g IMOD.MERC. CORONADO BANK l 91.8( 147.7)1 7.4 l .......... 0.055 l VI SIERRA MADRE l 91.8( 147.8)1 7.0 l 0.054 I VI GRAVEL HILLS - HARPER LAKE 1 91.9( 147.9)1 6.9 l 0.042 VI ELYSIAN-PARK THRUST l 93.8( 151.G)l 6.7 l 0.045 l VI NEWPORT-INGLEWOOD (L.A.Basin) l 97.1( 156.2)1 6.9 l 0.040 l V *#*****#}*+}+}++**++*R*M*RRRRR+RRRRRRRRR*RRRRRRRR*****R*R*********#*#***#*}}}}} -END OF SEARCH- 45 FAULTS FOUND WITHIN THE SPECIFIED SEARCH RADIUS. THE SAN ANDREAS - Coachella FAULT IS CLOSEST TO THE SITE. IT IS ABOUT 5.5 MILES (8.9 km) AWAY. LARGEST MAXIMUM -EARTHQUAKE SITE ACCELERATION: 0.4290 g CALIFORNIA FAULT MAP SWC Avenue 52 & Monroe Strcct / Indio Area 1100 1000 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 1 200 100 _ SITE 0 -100 -400 -300 -200 -100 0 100 200 300 400 600 600 't 2 y STRIKE -SLIP FAULTS 5) Boore et al. (1997) Horiz. SOIL (310) M=5 M=6 M=7 M=8 1 .1 .01 .001 1 10 - 100 Distance [adist] (km) y V DIP -SLIP FAULTS 5) Boore et al. (1997) Horiz. - SOIL (310) M=5 M=6 M=7 M=8 p ►y El 1 .1 .01 .001 1 10 100 Distance `adistl (km) r BLIND -THRUST FAULTS 5) Boore et al. (1997) Horiz. - SOIL (310) M=5 'M=6 M=7 M=8 rn o4-0 .1 c� a� 10 100 Distance [adist] (km) MAXIMUM EARTHQUAKES SWC Avenue 52 & Monroe Street Indio Area rn o .01 1 10 100 Distance (mi) i EARTHQUAKE MAGNITUDES & DISTANCES SWC Avenue 52 & Monroe Street / Indio Area 7.75 7.50 7.25 a� -a 7.00 rn c� 6.75 6.50 .1 1 10 ,Distance (mi) 100 ice'. r Title 24 Energy Report RANCHO SANTANA La Quinta Climate Zone #15 Energy Code Com lianc BEG Project No.: 12027 Revised Report: Plan 4Y window ID #22 corrected R� M � 0 T I I JUL 112012 Desert Cheyenne, Inc. Len Nobel Company CITY OF LA QUINTA BUILDING & SAFETY DEPT. APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION DA Z By Heritage Energy Group, LLC May 4, 2012 Title 24 Energy Calculations & Mechanical Layouts 1 C— Tel: (949) 789-7221 / Fax: (949) 789-7222 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE:'RESIDENTIAL.COMPUTER.METHOD CF,-lR Page 1 Project Title. ..... Plan 2 � ? Date..04/10/12 09:23:58 Protect Address........ Rancho Santana _ ' 'La Quinta< r '*v8 1* Documentation Author... Rudy Sains. " Heritage'Energy Group,- LLC - „ •410 Wald. ` Irvine,,'CA' -92618. - (949): 789-7221 Climate•Zorie 15 " Compliance Method.:.... MICROPAS8'v8.1:f6r`2008 CEC'Standards (r03) - MICROPAS8 v8.1 File-12027P2 Wth-CTZ15S08 User#-MP0940 User-Heritage'Energy Group,"'LL Run - MICROPAS8 ENERGY USE SUMMARY Energy Use ;Standard-' ,Proposed' Compliance Percent (kTDV/sf-yr)' Design Design Margin Improvement Space Heating.......'... ,3.31' 3.63 -0:32. -9.7% Space Coolin P ga1,. y ....>� 77.01 '77'03 -0.02 - -0.0% Ventilation Fans....... 0.74 .0.74 0.00 0.0% Water Heating.....): 14.03 •12 97: 1.06 7.6% North Total" 95:09 94.37 0:72 0.8% Space Heating•' • V . �3.^31 3, 98 0 67. • -20.2% oling 77.0�76�89 0`12� 0.2% \.Space"Co entilat=io'n' Fans f0_74 w j 0.74 - f•-0.'00 0.0% Water 'Heati{n- g .�. 14 : 03 12!97r i.} 1.0.6 7`6""�--=-�... r 'Eastt Total 95 09 94 'S8 ZO �51 0r % r. _. Space Heating .` ..:. 3:31 ,4' 4 '24;. ' ` -0.93 -28.1% Space-Cooling...i. .. "', 77.01•. 76'99 0.02 0.0% -V tilation Fans) .. 0:74 ' , •0.74 ��0.00 0.0% Water. -Heating. 14.03-. 12.97 j, 1:06 7.6% South Total 95.09 .494:94_, f' 0.1-5 0.2% Space Heating.: 3.82 =0.51' -15.4% Space Cooling. 77.01 -75.551.46 1.9% Ventilation. Fans•.. . -..: 0.-74 • `'' 0:'74, 0.00 0.0% Water Heating....... _ .14.03, '12%97 1.06 7.6 - West, Total - 95:.09 ,• 93.08 y 2 01 2.1 ,*.**,Buildin4-complies with Computer Performance ***' *** HERS•Verification Required for Compliance *** CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE: RESIDENTIAL,,COMPUTER METHOD CF-1R c Page'2. Project'Title..... Plan 2 Date 04/10/12-09:23:58 GENERAL INFORMATION ' { HERS Verification.. ..... Required Conditioned Floor,Area. 2600 sf �Buil'ding,Type......::, Single Family Detached , Construction Type`'. _ Newt, ' Natural Gas at Site Yes -' Building•Front-Orientation. Cardinal - N,E,S,W, , Number of Dwelling -Units.,.'. - Number of Building Stories... IWeather Data°Type... .. Ful1Year Floor Construction,Type....'-Slab On' Grade , ' Number of�Building Zones... •2 Conditioned.Volume. 26000 cf , Slab -On -Grade Area......... 2600 sf Glazing Percentage.. 19.2 %.of -floor 'area, 'Average Glazing U-factor: 0.33 Btu/hr-sf-F „ Average Glazing SHGC' 0.28 .,Average Ceiling Height. 10.ft 1,, �'`f• BUILDING ZONE -INFORMATION•, Floor '# of # of Cond Thermo- Vent Vent Verified Area Volume Dwell Peop- it-• stat- 'Height Area Leakage or ;Zone Type,/(sf)� (cf). • Units le ioned- 'Type (ft) (sf) Housewrap , Residence 1176 117,60 0,.'45�°-2 2' ..Yes Setback 2,!'O�rMnidard 3 SLA Residence 1424 14240 0'.55 . +;;�2.8 Yes Setback 20 Standard 3_SLAw: PTTIC ANDROOFDETAILS'I C1_ 4 rame -..'. R ..,.•:R= Roof Roof ;Re- Emiss-•'Frame Spac Value Value Vent Massi Rise flect- ivity Depth ing Above Below Area Vent Roof Type (lb/sgft)- ance (in.), (in.) Deck. Deck Ratio High Tile Heavy. 4': 12 0.15 �` 0.85 ' 3.5 24 oc 0.00 0.00 1/300 0,.00 2 r. - Tile • Heavy, ' 4 - 12 0 .'1e5 _r 0 .85" 3.5 24 oc 0. 00, •,0. 00 1/300 .0 . 00 IA OPAQUE•SURFACES U- .` Sheath- Solar.Appendix Frame Area fact- Cavity ing Act • :Gains JA4 Location/ Surface Type (sf) or, R-val R-val Azm,Tilt Reference Comments 1 Wall Wood' 228 0.102 13' 0 > 180 ' 90� Yes 4 .3.1 A3 3 Wall Wood 296 0.102, 13 =0 270 90 Yes 4.3.1 A3 5 Wall Wood 54;.0.102'• 13,,' 0= 0 , ` 90 Yes, 4.3:1 A3 7 Wall Wood 50 0.102 . 13 0 90 ... 90 'Yes 4.3.1-A3. 9 Wall Wood 220-0:102 13- 0 0 '90 No 4.3.1 A3 10 AtticRad, Wood 111'6' 0*. 025 • 38 F 0 n/a..: O'•Yes 4 .2 . 1 A21' Reg: 212-N0017631A-000000000-0000 'Registration Date/Time: 2012/04/10 12:30:19 HERS Provider: Ca10ERTS, Inc 'CERTIFICATE,OF COMPLIANCE: RESIDENTIAL COMPUTER METHOD CF=1R Page 3', Project Title. .....:.Plan 2:_ Date..04/10/12 09:23:58 ` OPAQUE SURFACES " 3 U- Sheath- -Solar Appendix; Frame;Area fact- Cavity ing Act -Gains JA4 Location/ Surface —Type- (sf)' or. ,,R-vat; R-val Azm� Tilt Reference Comments 12 Door Wood 24 0.500... 0 0 • 0 90` Yes 4.5.1-A4 . 13 Door, Wood 20 0.500 0,-. 0' 0''' �90 No 4.5.1,A4 2 2 Wall Wood 128'.0.102 13 0 180 90 Yes 4:3.1 A3 4Wall Wood 277 0.102 13'.` 0 ., ' 270 90 Yes 4 . 3. 1 •M3' 6 Wall Wood 242 0.102 13� ' - 0=• 0 '90 Yes " .3.1-A3 r 8 Wall Wood 545 0.102 '13 01 90 90..Yes 4.3.1 A3 11 AtticRad Wood 1424 0.025 38% 'YO, •n/a .0 Yes,4.2.1'A21. ' PERIMETER LOSSES > Appendix , Length F2 Insul Solar', JA4 Location/ Surface .'(ft), Factor ;.'R-va1 _ Gains Reference Comments 21 14 SlabEdge -108 LO30 - R-0/Oin No' 4.4.7 Al Standard, Slab Edge 2 ., 15-SlabEdge, 14630, ,R-0/Oin y No 4.4.7 Al Standard Slab Edge FENESTRATION SURFACES „� z; ¢. Area7G,' t ,{ ,Shade . Orientation (sf) ..factor Tilt'�.Typ � ~Locat�lon/Comment 1 eel( 1rWin`d Back ' �(S) 52 .0�`0 340- 0. 300-'180a �90 Standard nyi Frame/.Operable/L 2 Wind Back `- (S) f 52 .0 0. 340 0` 300-*180'-.: 90 •='Standard 2/Vinyl' Frame/Operable/L 3 Door -Back (S) 48..0. 0.�270` 0:210 180 90, Standard 3/French Door low-e 5-Wind Right (W) 26.0 0.340 0.-300 270 90 Standard 5/Vinyl Frame/Operable/L ,6 Wind Right\(W) 30.0.0:340-0.300 270 90 Standard 6/Vinyl Frame/Operable/L 7 Wind Right,(W) 8A 0.340:0.300'270 90 Standard-7/Vinyl Frame/Operable/L 11 Wind Front (N) 16A 0.330 0.300 -0 90' Standard 1'1/,Vinyl Frame/Fixed/Low 2 - 4 Wind Back .(S)-52.0.0.340 0.300 180. 90. Standard 4/Vinyl Frame/Operable/L 8 Door Right (W) 40.0 0.270 0.21'0 270 90 Standard`8/French Door low-e 9 Wind Right (W)' 15.0'0.340-0.300'270.- 90 Standard'9/Vinyl Frame/Operable/L' 10 Wind Right-(W) 8..0 0.340.0'.300 270` 90 Standard 10/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ 12 Wind Front (N) 15.0 0.340 0:300 .0' '90 Standard 12/Vinyl-Frame/Operable/ 13 Wind Front (N) 25.0.0.340.0.300 ' 0' 90 Standard 13/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ 14 Wind Front (N) b 75 0.340 0:300 0 90'- Standard"14/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ 15 Wind Left. (E): 39•.0 0.340 0.300„ 90 +-90 Standard 15/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ 16 Wind Left' (E) 8.0 0.340 0.300 90« 90 Standard 16/vinyl Frame/Operable/ 17 Wind Left (E), 25.0.0.340 0*300 90 90 Standard-17/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ 18 Wind Left (E)• 25-.0 0.340 0:300 90 `.90` Standard 18/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ 19 Wind Left (E) 8:0.'0.340 0.300 90 90 Standard 19/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ Reg: 212-N0017631A-000000000-0000 Registration'Date/Time: 2012/04/10'12:30:19 ;HERS Provider: Ca10ERTS, Inc CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE: RESIDENTIAL -COMPUTER METHOD CF-lR Page.4 Project Title...' Plan 2 Date..04/10/12 09:23:58 ' OVERHANGS •Window Overhang _ Area Left Right `. ' Surface '(sf) Width, Height'Depth Height Extension Extension , 1 Window 52.0 `n/a -6.6 12" 1 n/a _ n/a 2 Window ' 52 .0 ;'n/a 6.6 1 _ 1 n/a- n/a 3 Door 48.0 n/a '8. 12' 1 n/a n/a ' 5 Window 26.0 n/a 6'.8 1 _' .1 s n'/a'• n/a 6 Window. ,30.0 n/a ' •5 1 L 1 - n/a n/a. '7 Window 8.0 n/a 4 1" '' 1 n/a n/a' 11 Window 16 : 0 n/a 7 , ' 8 • ' 1 . ' n/a n/a° 24 Window 52 0' n/a 6 1` .1 ,j n/a n/a 8 Door 40.0 , n/a `8 ` 12' , 1. 'n/a n/a 9 Window 15.0 n/a 5 6- 1• �'' n/a • n/a , 12 Window 15.0n/a` 5 1- 1 n/a, n/a 15 Window 39.0 n/a 6.6• 1 1 n/a n/a 16 Window 8.0 ' n/a ' • 4 1 1 , , n/a , n/a' 17 Window '25 .0 n/a 'S 1 - ' 1 r n/a n/a 18 Window 25.0 n/a -- 5. 1 1' ri/a ' n/a, 19 Window 18'.01 • n/a '4 1" `1 n/a n/a SLAB SURFACES - Area k Slabb TMpe-" ..:ToMnk t: � 4 I ,� LLY � • - Standard Slab 1176 •, _ - r ,2 �•-} Standard S 1 b 1{424 '�� '� "':t''' �•F .--y a •� tt- - �-c,b•• �.- - = e HVAC+ SYSTEMS Verified Verified' Verified' Verified Verified Maximum System Minimum Refri'g Charge•Adequate Fan Watt Cooling ' Type Efficiency 'EER •or.CID - Airflow Draw Capacity Furnace 0.800 AFUE n/a , n/a` n/a" n/a 'n/a'-. . ACSplit'• 13:OO.SEER. 11• Yes No No No 2 Furnace 0.806 AFUE "n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a ACSplit • 13.00 SEER li :-Yes No No' No ` Reg: 212-N0017631A-000000000-0000., Registration Date/Time:+2012/04/10 12:30:19 HERS Provider:-Ca10ERTS, Inc + CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE: RESIDENTIAL• COMPUTER METHOD r CF-1R°"- Page-5 Project Title. j,°Plan 2 Date..04/10/12 09:23:58 •:HVAC SIZING _ Verified Total, Sensible .Design' Maximum r Heating.' :'.Cooling Cooling 'Cooling System Load F Load Capacity„ Capacity- ; Type- .(Btu/hr) • (Btu/hr) (Btu/hr) (Btu/hr) . Furnace = ;19220 n/a :n/a „'n/a ACSplit n/a 14964 2 18570 n/a ; Furnace 23228 _ n/a n/a n/a ACSplit n/a, 19028 23614 n/a ' Total 42448 33992 42184 1 Orientation of Maximum...... Front Facing 180 deg (S) Sizing Location........ LAFQUINTA Winter -Outside Design. . 26 F •Winter'Inside.Design....... 70 ,F-,. Summer_Outside° Design. -111 F Summer Inside - Design:...... 75' F- Summer .Range:. ...... . 34' F_ . • '°� - - DUCT SYSTEMS Veri*f,ied Verified Verified System R Duct' V rDuct». Duct Su'r`face` Buried x ".Type' )71. Locat'ion': i' R-value + t °Leakage Ar . Ducts �1fi 1 �•-%fir`' ,~ ! -.p.�, .°� � r' ` F„uFrrnf a-ee •x } Attic } R" 6 "Yes No - Nod' ACSplit z -Attic �-R-6 ) 'Yes - LNo No, `' Furnace Attic R-6a Yes No No ACSplit Attic 'R-6'• Yes No No • "=INFILTRATION TESTING DETAILS- Blower Dobr ,Blower Door '. Leakage•Target Leakage Minimum (CFM50h/SLA); (CFM50h/SLA) 924 /r3.0 .462 / 1 2-5 v1119/ -3.0 559 / 1.5 Reg: 212-N0017631A-000000000-0000' Registration Date/Time: 2012/04/10 12:30:19 HERS Provider: Ca10ERTS,-Inc CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE:,RESIDENTIAL COMPUTER METHOD'.-. CF-1R Page 6, Project Title.. Plan 2-Date..04/10/112 09:23`:58 ' t'rFAN .SYSTEMS i. . Flow -'Power, 1 System ..Type (cfm) (W/cfm) Standard-. 28.64125 _' k ` 2Standard ' • 34.87. ; .25 WATER HEATING SYSTEMS _ -, Number Tank- External Heater in Energy Size Insulation . Tank Type Type ``Distribution Type System Factor (gal).- R-values. :1 Storage Gas Standard � 11 0.62 50 R-n/a SPECIAL`FEATURES AND MODELING ASSUMPTIONS *** Items in this section, should be documented on the plans,:*** *** installed. -to manufacturer and CEC specifications, and- *** *** verified1 during'plan'check and field inspection. *** ,,.This is a multiple orientation'building.,This printout.is for.'the front :facing -North. This build'iinn"g incorporates a RadiantBarrier :HERS REQU ;RED V ERhFICATION;,ti Items in{ this`; section require field'testing and/or. ***-werification�byfa-certifi`edhome%energy, rater -under ***` the ,supervision O;c -CEC-approved�HERS'provider-.using *** ** CEC approved testing and/or verification methods and *** ***must be[reported.'on the CF-4R.installation certificate. *** ,This 'building incorporatess HERS -verified High Quality Insulation Installation-. This building incorporates HERS verified Building Envelope,Sealing. Target and Minimum CFM values measured at 50,pa'scals are shown in INFILTRATION TESTING DETAILS'�above. If the measured'CFM50h is above the target,.then corrective'aciioik must be taken to,reduce'the infiltration and then retest. Alternatively, the'compliance,- calculations' -could be redone without infiltration testing , This•building incorporates a HERS'verified'Improved•Refrigerant.,Charge test or the installation of a HE verified Charge'.Indicator-Display (CID). If a cooling system is not installed,'then`HERS'verification is not necessary: - This -building incorporates HERS verified High Energy EfficiencyrRatio (EER).t. This building incorporates,'HERS--verified Duct::Leakage. Target leakage is calculated and documented on the•CF-4R. If the'measured CFM is•above the target, then corrective action must be,,taken to reduce'the duct leakage and then must be retested.,Alternatively,•the.compliance-calculations could be redone without duct testing::If ducts.are not •installed;, then HERS x t . Reg: 212-N0017631A=000000000-0000 Registration`Date%Time: 2012/04/10 12:30.19 HERS.Provider: Ca10ERTS, Inc" CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE:;RESIDENTIAL'COMPUTER'METHOD CF,-lR Page.7 Project Title ............ (,Plan 2 Date..04/10/12 09:23:58 ' HERS REQUIRED VERIFICATION verification* is'� not necessary. REMARKS' COMPLIANCE STATEMENT This certificate of compliance lists the building features and performance specifications needed to, comply with Title-24, Parts 1 and - 6 of the California Code of Regulations, and.the administrative regulations to implement'them. This certificate has been'signed by the ,individual ,with, overall design responsibility. DESIGNER or•OWNER %DOCUMENTATION AUTHOR', 1 Name.... r, T Name.". Rudy Sains , Company. Desert Cheyenne, Inc.• 'Company. Heritage Energy -Group, LLC -,,,,,Address. 78� 401 Hwy., 111, Suite .X Address. 470' Wald i Quints, CA 92.253 •Irvine,` CA ' 92618 - ��Phone... 760-777-9920• Phone..'.' (949) 789-7221 . Licens:e..�_ SignedI'Signed.1-77 �-!x ;:,i:- f ZT1,JYJ (da'te) �4�f r. ('date) - .:... Z`sr ENFORCEMENT AGENCY; : ' Name.-..: - Tit 1 e .. -.t f _.y. �" � � . " '� • Agency.. 3 Phone. Signed.. (date) Electronically Signed at Ca10ERTS.com•by Greg' Herington '(GJH DevelopmentInc) 4/10/2012, Electronically Filed by Rudy Sains and Authenticated at Ca10ERTS.com-.;4/10/2012 Reg: 212-N0017631A-000000000-0000 Registration_ Date/Time: 2012/04/10°12:30:19 HERS .Provider: Ca10ERTS, Inc CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE:'RESIDENTIAL COMPUTER METHODI- CF-lR Page 1 ` Project 'Title:' . • .'..'Plan 3,' •Date..03/29/12 10:34:29 , Proiect,Address........ Rancho Santana s .. . 'La Quinta s'.*v8.1* Documentation,Author. Rudy Sains' Heritage,Energy Group,:•.LLC t `' -470 -Wald ' Irvine,' CA 92618 ,.� •(949) 789-7221. Climate Zone 15 " r Compliance Method:'_.. MICROPAS8 V8.1w•.for 2008 CEC.Standards'(r03) MICROPAS8•v8.1 File=12027P3 Wth-CTZ15S08;_ User#-MP0940 _User -Heritage Energy Group,-LL Run- " ' MICROPAS8 ENERGY USE SUMMARY Energy -Use k� Standard Proposed Compliance,-, Percent (kTDV/sf-yr) h Design Design 'Margin Improvement Space Heating...:..'..:: 3:16 3.42 70.26 -8.2% Space Cooling.,:` :. 76.62 74.80 1.82 2.4% Ventilation Fans..' -0.70 r 0.70 "0.00 0.0% Water Heating..-. 12.74 Y L• 11 .78, 0.96 m 7.5% North Total : 93:22 . 90-.70'2.52 2.7 space �Heating `... .. Y ,L3_.16 4.*12' x -0 96- -30 .4 % 'Space Cool'ing.'.. r 76.770"�'---' � ?8 - r �: 1.84 2.4% Ventilation Fans !.� 0.70-0.00}0.0 Water Heati g �. �. '..: 12 : 1�78:) 0. 9.6 ` 7`5%East Total9338 1.84 Space Heating..: •�' *3 z16 "' 4''22 �� 1 06 . < -33.5% J Spaie-Coo.ling... r• 76:62., 73.70 I r�'2.92. 3.8% •-'Ventilation Fansl... _ 0:70, 0.70 -0.00 _ 0.0% Water'Heating. 12.74 - 11•.78, • 0.96 7.5% •`s; South Total, f' 93.22 90.40• 2,82 3.0% Space Heating .. 3.16 `' 3.42 -0.26 -8.2% Space Cooling... '76.62 v73.89 2.73 3.6% Ventilation Fans.'.. ..' 0 :7 00.'70 0.00 0.0% Water Heating.. .. :. 12.'74 r 11.78- 0.96, 7.5% • West. Total•. ' ' 93 22 89.79 �3:43. 3.7% *** Building,'complies with Computer Performance *** HERS'Verification Required for Compliance *** z ' � .••• -ram .. .', � Reg:.212-N0015521A-000000000-0000 Registration'Date/Time: 2012/03/29'14:21:06 HERS Provider: Ca10ERTS,.,Inc. ' ~CERTIFICATE:OF,COMPLIANCE:.RESIDENTIAL COMPUTER METHOD CF=1R Page;2'' Project Title.....` ..... .Plan 3 Date..03/29/12 1034 29 GENERAL INFORMATION t -_ y }HERS Verification. t Required ° ,Conditioned Floor Area. 2863 sf. - Building Type:.... ,,.Single Family Deta•c_hed +` ` 'Construction Type: New r-# Natural :Gas at Site ....... -Yes ' 'Building ',Front•Orientation. Cardinal ,.,- N,E,SW' •'Number•of Dwelling Units ;1 Number of Building"Stories. 1 Weather Data Type ... Ful`lYear Floor'•Construction Type. Slab On Grade Number .of Building.'Zones 2' Conditioned Volume 28630 cf Slab -On -Grade Area..: 2863 sf Glazing Percentage. .. 21.2 %•of, -floor -area + ' `Average Glazing-U-factor.. •0.33 Btu/hr-sf-F Average. Glazing• SHGC.: 0.29 -Average Ceiling Height.. . ,10 it, ` + BUILDING .ZONE INFORMATION ' Floor # of '#'of Cond- Thermo- Vent, Vent Verified Area Volume. Dwell.Peop- it-' stat Height Area Leakage or Zone Type (sf) (cf) Units 'le ioned,. Type." (ft) (sf) Housewrap Res fdre"no ce. 1360 1f3j6,0.0, 0'�48 2 4 Yes Setback 2: 7rS'tIn' d a r d 3 SLA Residence 1503 "15030i ; 0: 52 �." 2': 6 Yes , Setba•ck 2..0Standard"""3�SLA rr "� ATTIC ANDf ROOF •,DETAILS �r -,. _ „•.• Frame _rr=+R R Roof ' Roof , Re Emiss- Frame Spac--', Value Value Vent Mass Rise.flect-'.ivity Depth ing Above Below Area Vent Roof Type (lb/sqft) ance (in.)•'(in.)' Deck Deck Ratio High 2 Tile" Heavy ,4:12 �0.10 ;0.85 -3.5 24 oc 0.00 0.00 1/300 0.00 r Tile Heavy,,, <- 4:12 0.-10 0.,85 `3-.5 24 oc '•0.00' 0.00 1/300 0.00 ' _ � OPAQUE •SURFACES•" , � ° ,. U- Sheath- Solar Appendix •Frame Area'fact- Cavity ing Act Gains. JA4 - Location/ Surface Type (sf) .or R-val R-val Azm Tilt ` Reference Comments 1 Wall Wood ~226 0.102 13 0 180 90 Yes 4.3.1 A3 3 Wall Wood 'r 296 0: 102 ` 13 0 270 90-Yes 4,.3.1 A3 5 Wall Wood 56 0.102 ., 13 0 0 • _90-Yes 4 . 3. 1 A3 . 7 Wall Wood 66-,O'.102• 13 0 90 90 Yes 4.3-.1 A3 9 Wall Wood 310 0.102 13:< 0 0, 90 No 4.3.1 A3 10" AtticRad Wood 1360 ,0.025 '38 0 n/a 0.•,Yes,4.2.1. A21 , r ' t +r r Reg: 212-N0015521A-000000000-0000 Registration-Date/Time: 2012/03/29 14:21:06 _HERS Provider: Ca10ERTS, Inc CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE: RESIDENTIAL COMPUTER' -METHOD CF-1R • Page 3"•n" Project Title ........ ..'•Plan 3 Date..03/29/12,10:34*:29 ' OPAQUE SURFACES t U Sheath- Solar Appendix Frame Area fact- Cavity ing..Act Gains ,JA4 Location/, Surface Type -(sf) or R-val.R-vat Azm Tilt; Reference Comments 12 Door Wood 24 0.500 0'-, 0 0' 90 Yes 4 5.1• A4 13' Door Wood 20 0.50.0 0 . 0' 0 90 No 4.5.1 A4 2 2 Wall Wood•:,166 0.102. 13•. 0_ 180 90 Yes 4.3.1 A3 , 4 Wall. Wood 143 0.102 13 0 270 `90 Yes 4.3r1.A3 6 Wall Wood •237 0.102 13- 0 .0 •90•Yes-4.3.1 A3 8 Wall Wood 554 0.102 13 0 90 90 Yes 4A .1 A3 11 AtticRad Wood 11503'0.025. 38. 0 n'/a 0•Yes 4.2.1 A21 PERIMETER•LOSSES Appendix Length F2 Insul Solar JA4 Location/ Surface (ft) Factor :, R-val Gains Reference Comments 14 SlabEdge 127LO30 ''R-0/Oin No .-4.4.7;A1 ,Standard Slab Edge. 2 ; ..15.SlabEdge 13930'� R=O/.Oin No 4.4.7 Al Standard Slab Edge FENESTRATION SURFACES 4 >- Ex:t'eri'or s' t< a s [Aiea`,r Act Shade__ Orientation f) factor SHGCAzm Tilt. Typed Location/Comments11f Wi d ack ' '(S)8'0�"0 34010 . 300 '180 90S dar`d71/�in1'E``ra e%O erable/L 2 Door Back'."" (S)` '#� 48.0-0.330-O':300-180 90 �";Standard 2/Vinyl Frame/SpG.D./Low 3 Wind,Back (S) 58.5'0.340"0.300.180. 90, Standard 3/Vinyl Frame/Operable/L ,6'Wind Right (W) 39.0 0.340,0.300 270� 90 Standard 6/Vinyl Frame/Operable/L 7 Wind Right`1(W) 30.0.0.340 0'.300 270 90 Standard 7/Vinyl Frame/Operable/L 8 Wind Right (W) 25.0"0:340.0.300 270 90 .Standard 8/Vinyl•Frame/Operable/L 13 Wind Front (N) 14.0 0.330 0.330 0. 90 'Standard 13/Vinyl Frame/Fixed/Low 17 boor•Left (E) 24.0 0.270 0.210 90.. 90 Standard-17/French Door low-e 2 ; _ 4 Wind Back (S) 58.5 0.340 0:300 180 90 Standard 4/Vinyl Frame/Operable/L 5 Wind Back (S) 25.0 0.340 0.300 180 90 Standard 5/Vinyl Frame/Operable/L 9 Wind Right (W)• 48.0 0.340 0.300 270 90 Standard 9/Vinyl Frame/Operable/L 10 Wind Right (W) 15.0'0'.340 0.300 270. 90 Standard 10/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ 11 Wind Right (W), 10:0.'0.340 0.300 270 90 ,Standard ll/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ 12 Door Right (W) 24.0 0.270 0.210.270 90 Standard-12/French Door low-e 14 Wind Front (N) 15.0`0.340 0.300• '0 90 Standard'14/Vinyl Frame/Operable/' 15 Wind Front (N) 30.0 0.340 0.300 0 90 Standard 15/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ 16 Wind Front (N) 8.0�0.340 0.300 0 90 Standard 16%Vinyl Frame/Operable/ 18 Wind Left (E). 15.0 0'.340 0.300 90 •90 Standard 18/Vinyl Frame/Operable/' 19 Wind Left (E) 8.0.0.'340 0.300 90 90 Standard 19/Vinyl•Frame/Operable/ 20-Wind Left (E) 25.0.0.340 0.300 90 ,90 Standard 20/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ 21 Wind Left (E) n 8.0 0.340.0.300 .90. 90 Standard 21/Vinyl.Frame/Operable/, Reg: 212-N0015521A-000000000-0000 Registration`Date/Time: 2012/03/29 14.21:06 HERS Provider: Ca10ERTS, Inc CERTIFICATE OF 'COMPLIANCE: 'RESIDENTIAL CO_MPUTER',METHOD CF.-1R Page 4 Project Title....... Plan•3'' Date..03/29/12 10:34:29 _ + OVERHANGS - - - I.•, Window Overhang Area t Left Right Surface? Asf) Width Height'Depth;Height Extension Extension 1 • Window 78.0 n/a , `6. 6 10 0.5 n/a•' n/a'- 2 Door 48.0 n/a,, -6.6 10 -0.5 n/aa' n/a 3 Window 58.5 `n/a 6.6 1 •0.5 n/a ,"n/a 6 Window 39.0- n/a- '6.5 1 1 n/a n/a 7 Window 30.0 n/a,' 5 . 1 1° -n/a ., n/a 8 Window,'. 25.0 n/a • " '8t-1 •t1 n/a' n/a r 13 Window_ .14 .0 n/a-., 7 - 8 = 0.0 n/a n/a 17 Door . 24.0 • :n/a '8 rl ' 1 'n/a 1n/a 2 r• K' ' 4' Window' 58.5. •n'/a 6.5 1 0.5 n/a - n/a r - 5 Window- 25.0 n/a- 'S1' 0.5 n%a ,• n/a 9 Window 48;0 n/a >5.'• 12, 1.. -n/a n/a 10 Window 15.0• n/a" 5'- 12 1 n/a n/a w ' 11 Window - 10:0 • n/a. '5 1 1, ; n/a n/a' 12 Door '24 .0 ..'n/a 7 1 -1 n/a n/a 18 Window 15.0. n/a* - S 1 1 n/a n/a 19 Window/ 18.0 n/a; ' 4 ', 1 -1 ',n/a ° ' n/a '1� 201-Window 28.0" n/a 4 �• 1 l . n/a h n/a r SLAB SURFACES _ r ' �'� Sla' Standard -Slab, •1460 ` •f Y'P''+`. f.� ••;� _2N i.. �.. r- ...-. r s� A "-`-'c ' t f `'•f - ' Standard -Slab 1503 HVAC 'SYSTEMS Verified Verified",Verified'. Verified 'Verified Maximum System °~Minimum `' Refrig Charge Adequate Fan Watt Cooling Type Efficiency EER or .CID ' Airflow Draw,. Capacity' ' Furnace' .'0.800 AFUE .-n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a ACSplit 13.0.0 SEER 11.5 Yes- No No No 2 •r Furnace 0.800 AFUE n/a. n/a �. n/a n/a n/a x. ACSplit--` 13;00 SEER 11.5 Yes No:, No No Reg: 212-N0015521Ay000000000-0000 Registration'Date/Time: 2012/03/29 14:21:06 ' HERS Provider: C_a10ERTS, Inc CERTIFICATE OF'COMPLIANCE:' RESIDENTIAL•COMPUTER'METHOD >�'CF-1R 'Page 5., , Project Title...:...... Plan `3 - `; s Date..03/29/12 •10:34:29 * r .• HVAC SIZING - - t Verified , Total': Sensible Design Maximum -Heating Cooling Cooling. -Cooling :System - Load Load. Capacity _Capacity - , .Type (Btu/hr). (Btu/hr) (Btu/hr). (Btu/hr) ti Furnace '22908^ n/a n/a n/a" ACSplit,,_ n/a 18845'_ 23386 n/a 2 �. Furnace 23280 " n/a n/a n/a. -'ACSplit • n/a 18650, ;23144 t -n/a Total ", 46187 , 37494', 46530' Orientation of -Maximum ....... Front Facing 180 deg (S)' Sizing Location. ..'LA'QUINTA Winter~Outside-Design. 26 F Winter°Inside Design......... 70 F Summer.Outside Design...'... Summer Inside,Design. .. 75 F Summer. Range-....: .... _ .. 34 F. +. ' •DUCT SYSTEMS ` Vze�rified Verif�ied Verified C-S il stem Duct �DuctY.' Duet Sury face -Buriedype- Location��' R-value '�Leaka e 'Are .Ducteg - �-na•ce `` Attic: R'�" 6 "'Yes No AC Att?i- �Rr6- �' `Yes } {No ,4No_ Furnace Attic R-6r Yes, No� No /-^''�'' —ACSplit Attic 4 R-6. Yes No No '-INFILTRATION-TESTING DETAILS " Blower' Door Blower Door Leakage Target` Leakage Minimum (CFM50h/SLA)•-(CFM50h/SLA). . ' 1068 / 3.0 .'r 534 / 1:5 2 i181, / 3.0. 590 / 1.5, Reg: 212-N0015521A-000000000-0000 Registration Date/Time: 2012/03/29 14:21:06 'HERS Provider: Ca10ERTS,.Inc, CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE: RESIDENTIAL COMPUTER•METHOD �'R CF-lR. Page'.6 Project Title.-........... Plan'3 Date..03429/12 10:34:29 FAN -SYSTEMS Flow Power System Type (cfm) ' (W/cfm)`{, ; '► 4 3 %'Standard-,n• 31 6 .25 2 �:. Standard. 34.53 :25 WATER HEATING SYSTEMS - r, Number'Tank External Heater in Energy Size Insulation Tank Type. Type` Distribution Type r`System' Factor (gal) R-value 1 Storage Gas Standard 1 0.62 50, R-n/a SPECIAL•FEATURES AND MODELING•ASSUMPTIONS ' *** Items in'this section should be documented on the plans,•**.* *** installed',to''man_ufacturer--and CEC specifications,'and a ***;verified during plan check and field inspection. *** This..is a multiple orientation •building: This _printout is for the 'front 'faci`ng-North. - This buia_ding incorporates a Radiant Barrier. 1 A 1_7 7 "HERS' REQUIRED VERIFFICATION v # o . ,rt **r* Items,, int_ this section require, field—testing and/or -• ***verification by<a-certifiedhomeenergy rater -under ***-the`supervision;of a.CEC-approved':HERS-:provider.-u•s'ing *** *** CEC approved testing and/or -verification methods and *** must be� reported on 'the CF 4R installation certificate. This building incorporates HERS verified High Quality, Insulation. Installation. This building incorporates HERS''erified•Building Envelope. Sealing. Target and Minimum CFM values measured at 50..pascals are shown in INFILTRATION TESTING DETAILS above. If the measured•CFM50h is above ' the' target, then corrective action must -,be ,taken to reduce ,the infiltration and then retest. Alternatively, the compliance calculations-could'be redone without infiltration testing: This building incorporates•a�HERS•verified Improved Refrigerant Charge test or the•installation of.,a HERS verified Charge •Indicator Display (CID). If a cool'ing system is not installed,`,then HERS verification is 'not necessary. This building incorporates 'HERS 'verified High Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER). .This building incorporates HERS verified'Duct Leakage. -Target leakage is calculated and documented,.on the'CF-4R. If the measured CF_M-is above the target, then corrective action'must betaken to.reduce:the duct leakage and then must be retested. Alternatively, the -'compliance calculations could be s redone without duct testing. If'ducts:are not installed, -then HERS , Reg: 212-N0015521A-000000000-0000` Registration Date/Time: 2012/03/29 14:21:06 HERS Provider:-Ca10ERTS, inc CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE:' RESIDENTIAL COMPUTER METHOD- CF-lR Page 7' Project Title.. Plan,3 Date•. 03/29/12,10:34:29 ' HERS.REQUIRED XERIFICATION, ` verification is not necessary.'. _ t REMARKS F `' ? ' " COMPLIANCE STATEMENT ' This certificate'.of compliance lists the building features and performance °specifications needed -to-comply,with.Title-24, Parts 1 and 6 of the , California\ Code of Regulations` and the administrative regulations to implement them. This certificate has been signed by the individual with overal.l design —'responsibility.: .DESIGNER or.OWNER DOCUMENTATION AUTHOR Name.... Name.. Rudy.Sains- Company. Desert Cheyenne, Inc:. Company. Heritage Energy Group, LLC' A '—Address. 78-401 Hwy. 111, Suite`X Address. 476 Wald -'---= a Quinta, CA 92253 Irvine, CA 92618 \Phone... 760-777-9920 Phone... (949)` 789-7221 License-.T 4 7 ._ m / Signed.',. �. 44 f `I r (date):.j -,�ENEORCEMENT. AG} E�Ns� ' ZName :... �r. •; > � �,� - ... �� . - � . - - Title. Ag cy .. Phone .. Signed..! (date) , Electronically Signed at CalCERTS.com by Greg Herington (GJH Development Inc) 4/9/2012 Electronically Filed by Rudy Sains and Authenticated at CalCERTS.com 3/29/2012x `• Reg: 212-N0015521A-000000000-0000 Registration Date/Time:-2012/03/29 14:21:06 HERS Provider: Ca10ERTS, inc CERTIFICATE`OF COMPLIANCE::RESIDENTIAL COMPUTER METHOD �-CF71R` Page 1'` -Project Title...... ` Plan 4 Date..05/03/12 22:38 54 Project Address.... .. Rancho Santana: La Quinta .: *v8'.1* 'Documentation Author... Rudy,Sains r' ****** Building Permit•# •Heritage Energy 'Group, _ LLC = . %'470 Wald Plan Check Date ;"Irvine, CA, =.92618 (949) ,t789-7221' Field Check/, Date ' Climate Zone.. 15 <. Comnliance Method::`' .... 'MICROPAS8,v8.1.for 2008 CEC Standards',(r03) `. MICROPAS8-v8.1 .-File-12027P4. Wth=CTZ15S08 User#-MP0940 User=Heritage,Energy'Groilp,,LL' Run , MICROPAS8 ENERGY USE•SUMMARY Energy Use Standard'' Proposed Compliance Percent (kTDV/sf-yr)` Design Design, Margin ..,,.Improvement' Space Heating. _ . 3.21 3.03 :0'.18 5.6%- Space Cooling.,.!'..... ,75.60, 74.68- 0.92 1.29. Ventilation Fans..... 0.70 -0.70. 0.00 0.0% Water Heating... • . '_.... -,12 .52 11.58 ' 0.94 7.5% ` i North Total. 92:03 89.99• "' 2.04 2.2% Spa.cce_Hear iiig....k. 3 21 3. 80 _ - `_0 59 18'. 4% L 'Space Cooling...4 73 1*5 �- 2�45V 3.2% Ventilat'iori Fans.. . . r Y 0.70R '' 0'70"� {=0.'00 � 0.0 Water Heati: g ` :�f,�. :. 1�2 : 52+ ` Li?l58? ,` 0. 94 AiEastTot al �r 92 .03 89 °23 80 3 +, Space Heating. , =1:F26 -39.2% Space Cooling.. 75:60 73.16 ', 2.44 3.2% -'Ventilation Fans ...... -0.70 ` -0.70 0.00 0.0% Water Heat ... - 12<52 11.58 0.94 7.5% South Total 92<03 89.91 2.12 2.3% Space Heating.. ...- 3.21 3.43 -0.22 -6.8% Space,Cooling............. 75:60 71.35 4.25 5.6% Ventilation Fans......,I •0 70 0170 .0 00 0 0% Water Heating.:''...:.•f _12:52" 11:58 0.=94 7.5% West Total 92.03 87:06< 4.9715.4% *,** Building,complies with Computer, -Performance *** *** HERS Verification Required for'Compliance *** Reg: 212-N0015525B-000000000-0000 Registration Date/Time: 2012/03/29 14:26:30 HERS Provider: Ca10ERTS,.Inc CERTIFICATE OF'COMPLIANCE:_ RESIDENTIAL'COMPUTER,METHOD - 'CF-lR Page 2' Project Title....... ..Plan-.4. Date..05/03/12 22:38:54 M rA " GENERAL INFORMATION HERS Verification. ...:.... Require'd Conditioned Floor Area:.. -2913 sf Building Type .............. Single.Family'Detached, Construction Type.,......... New Natural Gas at Site`.......'" Yes - Building -Front, Orientation. •-Cardinal.,-_N,E,S,W a Number of - Dwelling Units.-. ..1 Number of Building Stories. 1 •Weather Data Type. ..- FullYear''yv `S Floor Construction -Type.,... " Slab'On Grader ` ` t Number, of Building Zones... 2 Conditioned'Volume: 29130 'cf Slab -On -Grade Area... .... 2913 sf . Glazing Percentage.. .`.?.: 19.3 0.o'f floor area Average Glazing U-factor. 0.33 Btu/hr.' sf-F' Average Glazing SHGC....... '0.3 Average Ceiling Height..... 10 ft BUILDING ZONE INFORMATION ; - - Floor i #••of # 'of Cond- Thermo-, Vent Vent Verified Area Volume Dwell Peop it- stat Height Area' Leakage or- .Z^one`Type' (sf) (cf) Units le ioned Type -(ft) (sf) Housewrap Residence 1398 1398.0 0 . 48 2. 4 '1,...Yesa. Setback 2 NeS"tandard 3 SLA �! ( s , Residence "" 151'S 15150' 0.5'2 2'. 6 Yes `Setbacks 2 ..0 Standard'3 -SLA... €' 3 ATTIC ANDfROOFDETAIL'S "" Roof Roof `Re- ;-`'Emiss- Frame Spac- Value Value' Vent Mass Rise flect- ivity -Depth -ing Above Below Area Vent Roof Type (lb/sgft) ance •(in.')'(in.), Deck Deck Ratio High Tile- Heavy : f 4 : 12 -0. 10 , 0.85 '�3. 5 k 24 oc 0.00 0.00 1/300 0.00 2 y w Tile- Heavy- 4:12 O:IO' 0.85 '3.5 24 oc• 0.00_ 0.00. 1/300. 0.00 OPAQUE SURFACES U :' Sheath- Solar Appendix Frame Area fact- Cavity.ing Act •Gains JA4--Location/ Surface Type (sf),= or•.-R-val?R-val Azm,Tilt- Reference Comments 1 Wall Wood 230 0.102 13.,," 0` 180 90 Yes 4.3.1 A3• 3 Wall Wood 49 0.102 13 . 0 270 '90.Yes'4.3.1•A3 5 Wall Wood, ' 107 0.102 - 13- '• 0 -, ^' 0-, 90 Yes 4.3.1- A3 7 Wall Wood '285 0.102 -13 '0 90` 90 Yes 4.3.1 A3 ' 9 Wall, Wood- 144 0.102 • 13 0 - ' 0 90 No 4 .3. 1 .A3 ` 11 AtticRad • Wood. 1398 0.025 . 38 _ 0 n/a 0 Yes- 4.2, 1 A21 t Y Reg:;212-N0015525B-000000000-0000 Registration'Date/Time:12012/03/29.14:26:30 HERS, Provider: Ca10ERTS, Inc CERTIFICATE ^OF'COMPLIANCE: RESIDENTIAL COMPUTER'•METHOD' CF-lR Page 3 Project Title.:.. Plan 4 Date.•.05/03/12 22:38:54 .,,'OPAQUE. SURFACES U Sheath Solar'Appendix Frame.,.Area fact- Cavity ing ., Act Gains JA4 ., -. Location/ Surface Type (sf) or R-val'R=vat Azm Tilt Reference Comments." 13 Door- .. Wood 24.�0.500 , 0 0 0 905 Yes. 4 .5.1 A4 14 Door Wood 20 0.500'0., 0 090 No 4.5.1 A4 - 2 2 Wall Wood{' - 108 0 :102 13 • 0 180 = 90' Yes' 4 .3. 1 A3 A Wall Wood • .562 0 :102 '13 0 270 90 Yes 4 .3. 1 A3 6 Wall Wood. 56 10. 102' "13. 13. '0 0 ,'90 Yes 4.3. 1� A3 8 Wall Wood 370. 0.102 , . 13 �_ .0 '.90 90 Yes 4 .3.1 A3 -10 Wall Wood 189 0:102 13 0 0 90 No 4.3.1 A3 12 AtticRad- Wood-: 1515 0.025 38 0 0 ` n/a 0 Yes ,4.2.'l A21,- - ,.PERIMETER LOSSES Appendix Length 'F2 '.Insul . '.Solar JA4 'Location/ ; Surface (ft) • Factor :.R-val•" Gains Reference Comments 15 S1abEdge. 97 0.730 R-0/Oin No 4.4.7 Al Standard Slab Edge U6 1abEdge 202 0:730. R-0/Oin No' 4.4:7 Al Standard. Slab Edge FENESTRAT-ION SURFACES IV V Exterior u g r` Area ,l U- ° Act Shade Orientation '' 'd'�� (sf)t,factor. SHGC. Azm Tilt „Type ,'Location/Comment 1 Wind Back ?' (S)° = )78.0'•0.340' 0:=300 180-ti 90 Standard'1/Vinyl Frame /Operable/L 2 Door Back (S) 112.0 '0:330 `0.'30b0 180 90 Standard 2/Vinyl Frame/S.G.D./Low -4-D r Right (W) 51A 0.330 0.300.270 90 Standard 4/Vinyl Frame/S.G.D./Low 11 Wind Front\(N) 14.0 0.340 0:300 '0. 90 Standard ll/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ '1'4 Wind Left' , (E) 30.0 0:340- 0.300.- , 90 90 Standard 14/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ 15 Wind,Left (E) 25'.0 0.340'0.-300 90' 90, Standard 15/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ 2 3 Wind Back (S) •52.0 0.340 0.300 180" 90 Standard 3/Vinyl Frame/Operable/L 5 Wind Right (W) 19.5 0.340.0.300,,270- 90 Standard.5/Vinyl Frame/Operable/L 6 Wind Right "(W)., 25.0 0.340 0:300 270.-,90 ,-Standard 6/Vinyl. Frame/Operable/L 7 Wind Right (W) 8'.0`0.340,0.300 270 90 Standard 7/Vinyl Frame/Operable/L' 8 Wind Right (W) '25,.0 0.340.•0.300 270 90 Standard 8/Vinyl Frame/Operable/L 9 Wind Right (W) .6:0 0.340-0-.300'270 90 'Standard 9/Vinyl Frame/Operable/L- 10 Wind Right (W)' 125.0'0.340i0.300.270 90 Standard 10/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ 12 Wind Front (N) 7.5 0.340 0%300 0 90 Standard 12/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ 13*Wind Front (N) �4.0 0*.340 0.300 0•'90.'Standard 13/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ 16 Door Left (E)' 24.0 0.270 0.210, 90 90 Standard 16/French Door low-e . 17 Wind Left '(E)•, 25.0 0•.340 0.300 90:, 90 Standard 17/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ 18 Wind Left (E) 6.0 0.340 0.300" 90 90 Standard•18/Vinyl'Frame/Operable/ 19 Wind Left (E) �25.0 0.340'0.300 '.90-'90 Standard 19/Vinyl,Frame/Operable/. Reg: 212-N0015525B-000000000-0000 Registration Date/Time: 2012/03/29 14:26:30 .'HERS Provider: Ca10ERTS, Inc 'CiR-TIFICATE.OFICOMPLIANCE:.RESIDENTIAL COMPUTER METHOD CF-lR Page'. 4o A, Plan 4 Project Title........ .. Date..05/03/12 22:38:54 OVERHANGS Window~Overhang 7'. Area Left Right; Surface _A'(sf) Width Heiight',Depth'Height Extension Extension 1 Window' 78.0,,. n/a' 6.5 1 1 n/a n/a` _2 Door 112A n/a V n/a n/a 4 Door *51.0 'n/a, 8 .'5', 12 1 n/a n/a 11 Window- _8 .1 .,n/a' n/a' 2 J 3 Window- '52A ri,/a 6.5 1 1 n/a, n/a 5 Window 19-5. n/a- 6, 1'. n/a' n/a, 6 Window.' .,25.0 ii/a 6 1 1 n/a -n/a 7 Window 8.0. '-n/a, 6 1 1 n/a �n/a'. 8 Wind -.,O,-n/a- 6 1 n/a /a Window n 9 Window. 6.0 n/a 6 1 1 n/a n/a,, 10'Window 25' O * n/a, 5 -l' 1 n/a n/a 0 n/a,' 8- 12 1 n/a 16 Door 24..n/a 17 Window • 25.0 n/a • 5 11 1. "ri / a n/a 18 Window ,6. 0 n/a 1. 5 1 1 n/a n/a 19Window 25.0 n/a, 5, 1 1 n/a n/a' SLAB SURFACES • Area Slab Type,. (sf)'� StQrd 1 a'15�' 13 981 Standard I'Standdrd Sli HVAC -,SYSTEMS Verif ied Verified Verified Verified Verified Maximum System minimum ..Refrig,Charg6 Adequate Fan Watt Cooling • Type Efficiency's .EER or CID -Airflow, Draw Capacit- y 1 Furnace AFUE n/a n/a n/a. n/a.. n/a ACSplit .0.800 13.00 SEER ll.. 5 ..,Yes No No' NO 2 Furnace r '0.800,AFUE n/an/a n/a n/a n/a ACSplit' .13'AO SEER lf. 5r,. -Yes No No No' 1.HVAC SIZING Verified, -Total -Sensible Design Maximum Heating Cooling. -Cooling Cooling System: Load Load, 'Capacity Capacity, Type (Btu/hr). (Btu/hr) (Btu/hr)' (Btu/hr). Furnace n/a.n/a .21136*,. Reg: 212;N0015525B-.000000000-0000 Registration'Date/Time: 2012/03/29 14:26:30,,-,,HERS Provider:',.Ca10ERTS,.,Inc CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE:,RESIDENTIAL'COMPUTER'METHOD CF-1R Page 5 Project Titl......... Plan 4 Date..05/03/12 22:38:54 e: HVAC SIZING ` Verified Total Sensible_ Design Maximum Heating Cooling'. Cooling', Cooling System, ` .Load Load Capacity 'Capacity Type (Btu/hr) (Btu/hr) -,(Btu%hr) (Btu/hr) 3 ` ' ACSplit n/a 17413 21610 n/a ' Furnace 26040 n/a 'n/a n/a ACSplit n/a 20331- 25230 n/a Total 47176 37744 r 46840 n/a s .0rientation-of Maximum..... Front Facing 0 deg (N) Sizing,Location. LA QUINTA Winter Outside -Design...... 26 F Winter Inside Design....... 70 F Summer Outside Design.' 111 F Summer Inside Design...-:... 75 F= Summer Range ........ ......... 34 F s DUCT SYSTEMS Verified Verified Verified - ' System Duct Duct Duct Surface Buried Type Locate -on R-value . I�a $10� - f Area Ducts 1 t - r �aa� 0 rt Fur.ce Attic.R-6 Yes :f _ No No.. �{ ACSrp1iiitj - Attic R-.6 r� ' t•Yes No Non . _ Furnace .• wAtt'' c ---R 6- � Yeses � No ' .. ACSplit _� Attic R-6 - : Yes �� No, _ No , c• INFILTRATION TESTING DETAILS 'Blower Door -Blower Door ` Leakage Target .Leakage Minimum (CFM50h/SLA)" (CFM50h/SLA). -1098 •/ '3.0 549 / 1:5 ? 1190 `, 3.01. 1'595 / 1.5 t ' FAN SYSTEMS. Flow' Power System Type (cfm) (W/cfm) -Standard 31.98 .25 • Standard 34.65 .25 Reg: 212-N0015525B-000000000-0000 Registration Date/Time:, 2012/03/29 14:26:30 HERS Provider:. Ca10ERTS„ Inc ' CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE:".RESIDENTIAL COMPUTER,METHOD CF-1R Page 6 Project Title........ Plan 4 , Dater ,05/03/12 '22.38.54 • WATER HEATING"SYSTEMS Number h Tank External Heater_ in. Energy, Size Insulation } Tank'TypeType Distribution Type System Factor .(gal) :R-value 1-Storage Gas Standard 1.. 0.62 50- R-n/a°, SPECIAL�FEATURES -AND MODELING ASSUMPTIONS ` *** Items in this."section should be documented on•the'Jplans, *** installed to manufacturer and CEC specifications, and *** *** verified during, plan check and 'field inspection. *** This is a multiple orientation building: This printout -is for the front facing -North. This building incorporates a,Radiaiit Barrier. '. HERS REQUIRED VERIFICATION- *** Items in this section require'field testing and/or *** ***'ver'ification by a certified home energy.rater under *** ***the supervision of,a"CEC-approved HERS provider,using ** .CEC approved testing and/or verification methods and *** ` *** must be {}reported on.the CF-4R installation certificate.' *** Thus building, incorporates, HERS• verified..High Qua'l•ity -Insulation- Installation'. This building, incorporates HERS verified Building Envelope_Sealing: Target' and Mi�nimurnYCFM values measured' at 50 `pascals' are_sh'own'I=dn 4 yr INFILTRAT L ALT-,tSTING`DETAILS above: Ixf,,tm he easured CFM50h is above _ the target, -then correctiveraction-must=bey taken+�to reducthe infiltration-:and4 then• retest Alternatively; -the',::complian`ce~.:'` calculations could 8e redone'without infiltration -testing.. This buildingNincorporates a HERS verified Improved. Refrigerant Charge 'test .or•the installation of a HERS verified Charge Indicator'Display (CID). If• -a . cooling system,i's not installed; then HERS verification is not necessary. This building incorporates HERS verified -High Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER). This building incorporates.HERS'verified-Duct Leakage. Target leakage is calculated and documented on the'CF-4R..If the measured CFM is above the target, then corrective action must be taken to reduce the duct leakage and' then must be retested. Alternatively,,.the compliance calculations could be redone without duct'testing:..If ducts are not installed, then HERS verification:is-not necessary. ' • ' }- ' , - • 'REMARKS • , ..' Reg: 212-N0015525B-000000000-0000 Registration`Date/Time: 2012/03/29'14:26:30' `HERS Provider: Ca10ERTS, Inc 'CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE:"RESIDENTIAL COMPUTER METHOD CF-lR Page 7 "Project Title.......... Plan`4 - :'` Date..05/03/12 22:38:54' `COMPLIANCE STATEMENT This-certificate,of compliance lists the building features and performance specifications needed'• to._comply.wth Title-24, Parts 1 and 6• of the California Code_, of Regulations,•and the administrative' regulations -to implement them. This certificate'has been••signed by .the 'individual; with - overall "design responsibility: _ -DESIGNER or -OWNER .f` DOCUMENTATION AUTHOR, Name.... .Name..:. Rudy Sains 'Company. -Desert Cheyenne, Inc. Company'.. Heritage Energy Group, LLC Address. 78-401 Hwy:_lll; Suite X. Address. 470 Wald La Quinta, CA',92253 Irvine, CA. 92618 Phone.... 760-777-9920 -Phone'...-(949j' 789-7221- License' + Signed.. _ Signed. -(date). (date) ENFORCEMENT AGENCY' Name.'. - j Title... �, t _-.Agency.. f . ft , Sig-ned :_s, •f r .fi `. �' 'I:.. �s f� (date) �.• +;' n k.� 5 i Electronically Signed at CalCERTS.com by, Greg Herington (GJH Development Inc) 5/4/2012 ; Electronically Filed by Rudy Sains and Authenticated'at CalCERTS.com-,5/4/2012 ° - Reg: 212-N0015525B-000000000-0000 Registration Date/Time: 2012/03/29.14:26:30 4,<HERS Provider: CalCERTS. Inc I CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE: RESIDENTIAL'COMPUTER'METHOD' CF-1R Page.J Project Title.. ..,Plan '4Y Date..06/27/,12'14:50:05 Protect Address......... Rancho Santana . La Quinta *v8.1* Documentation Author..: Rudy.Sains. Building.Permit.# •Heritage•Energy Group, LLC 470 Wald ,Plan Check Date Irvine,,CA -92618' ' r (949) 789-7221 `. - „ •;' Field Check/ Date Climate 'Zone........ .` 15 ". w Compliance Method...... MICROPAS8 v8.1 for'2008:CEC Standards (r03) 2 MICROPAS8 v8.1 .File-12027P4Y Wth7CTZ15S08 User#-MP0940 'User -Heritage Energy Group, LL Run- MICROPAS8 ENERGY USE SUMMARY Energy Use Standard ProposedCompliance ' -Percent (kTDV/sf-yr)' Design Design Margin Improvement Space Heating. .. 3.11 3.07 0.04• 1.3% Space Cooling ,,A',....:.. � r ' 75-. 60 74 , 37, 1 .23., 1 , 6% Ventilation Fans.. 0.66 `. 0.66 0.00 0.0% Water Heating.. .,i.... 11.47i 12,72 -1.25 -10.9% North Total `. �90. 84 90 ,•82 ' *, 0.02 - 0.0% V, Space �Heating .... `; 3_._1.1: 3�. 68 -0. 57 -18.3 �Space Cooling.. r 75 . 60 - ` ` 72 : 7.2 E - 2 : 88�'"' -,'. 3.8% Veritilatio'nFa�ns fe, .. <�:0. 66 f ti0� 66 j-0 00 0.0 1. Water Heating` -. �. , . 1�1 `4�� 1�2,'721 -1.25 , 10`9��-w -, `. 3 �East,"{Tonal �90 . 84 89 :'78 t 16 1 %As` ` Space .Heati`rig,'. `!� ..- 3:11 �4 :;,- �' =0" 89 , '�'` 28.6% Space_Cooling... ! . f' 75'.60 73.33 2,27 •"'Ventilation Fans! 0.66 0.66'; 0.00 0.0% Water Heating.,., '11.47' 12.72 -1.25 -10.9% ' '' 4 South Total- 90.84 90.71" 0.1-3 -0.1% Space Heating...,.-. _ 3.11 3.15' -0.04 -1.3% Space Cooling..:....... 75.60 71.90 3.70 4.9% Ventilation Fans.. -0.66 0.66 0.00 0.0% Water Heating......'' 11.47 12'.72 -1.25' -10.9% West Total-'90.84 88.43 2.41 2..7% . *** Building complies with Computer;'Performance *** ***,HERS Verification Required for Compliance *** • -''f� 1. ._ . Reg: 210-N0000634C7000000000-0000 Registration Date/Time: 2010/01/21 20:O9:44 HERS Provider: Ca10ERTS, inc 0 r CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE:�AESIDENTIAL'COMPUTER.METHOD 'CF-iR Page 21s Project Title: '.A..`... Plan 4Y,. , Date.'.06/27/12'.�14.50:05 GENERAL -INFORMATION• , -HERS'Verification...... Required Conditioned-Floor'Area. 3180 'sf. Building Type . ...... `.. Single Family Detached Construction •Type, • . New a _ +Natural Gas at Site',....'_. Yes , 1- Building Front Orientation Cardinal-'N,E,S,W Number of'-Dweiling Units... 1 r. r -Number •of Building Stories: •`-1 Weather Data. Type: ...-FullYear Flo or'Construction Type. "Slab On Grade ; -Number'of Building Zones -2 . Conditioned Volume. 31800♦cf Slab -On -Grade Area. 318.0 sf Glazing -Percentage... .. '. •20.2 % of floor ;area Average`'Glazing.U-factor: : `0 33 Btu/hr-sf-F Average Glazing SHGC...... .. •0':29 _Average Ceiling Height 10 ft; '. �• BUILDING.ZONE,INFORMATIO14 , Floor e J •#-;of' # of '•Cond- Thermo- Vent Vent Verified ' Area Volume Dwell••Peop- it=-. stet' • HeightArea Leakage or' ;_Zone Type" (sf)� •(cf) "Units .le,,~ Toned, Type-." (ft) (sf) Housewrap Re\sjidenceY `,; 1398 •139,8.0 0y -44, 2 Yes~ Setback -� 2 O ty,aridard 3 SLA ""` : . Residence 1782 1782 0 0.56 21 8 Yes etba•ck , _0 Stand'ar 3_SLA.» ATTIC ROOF --DETAILS rame R R- Roof Roof'.`Re-' �Emiss- Frame Spac- Value Value Vent ' Mass Rise flect- ivity Depth ing` -Above Below'Area.* Vent Roof Type (lb/sgft)'^ ance. (in.)'(in.)• Deck Deck Ratio High Tile � Heavy "4:12,_ .0.10 . °0.85 3.5 •24 oc 7 0:00 0.00 1/300 0.00 2, Tile Heavy 4:12 •0.10 0.H 3:5 24 oc 0.00 0.00 �1/300 0.00 ' OPAQUE -SURFACES . U- Sheath- Solar Appendix" , Frame Area fact- Cavity ing Act Gains_ JA4 Location/ Surface, Type (sf) br;. R=val R-val Azm Tilt- Reference`Comments 7-7 - 1• Wall Wood. '230 '0.102 13 ., '0 180 90 -Yes 4:3.1 A3 . 3 Wall '-Wood 49'.0.102'. 13 0 270 90 Yes 4.3.1 A3 5 Wall Wood 65 0.102 13 : " 0 0' 90 Yes, 4 .3. 1' A3 7 Wall Wood, 285-0.102'. 13 '., 0 .. 90 •'..90=Yes 4.3•.1'A3 Y 9.Wall Wood 234 0:102 13 0 . 0 90 No 4-.3.1•A3 11 Wall Wood. 47 0.102 13, 0 270 90 No' 4.3.1 A3. -', - Reg: 210-N0000634C-000000000-0000 Registration Date/Time: 2010/01/21 20:09:44 HERS Provider: C_a10ERTS,.Inc CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE: -RESIDENTIAL COMPUTER -METHOD ". CF-lR Page 3 Project Title.... Plan`4Y Date..06/27/12'14:50:05 T - OPAQUE SURFACES U- Sheath-' Sola'r_ Appendix r. Frame TArea-fact- Cavity ing Act Gains JA4 Location/ Surface Type (sf)' orb R-val-R-val Azm Tilt- Reference Comments 12 AtticRad Wood 1398,0.025' 38 0 n/a 0. Yes 4.2.1 A21 14 Door Wood 24 0.500 0 `O 0 90 Yes 4.5.1 A4 15 Door Wood 20 0.500,.0 '0 , 0 90 No 4.5.1 A4 2 .2 Wall Wood 108 0.102 '13 0. '180 90" Yes '4.3.1 'A3 4 Wall Wood 596 0.102' 13 0 270 90 Yes 4.3.1•A3 6 Wall Wood' 26' 0.102 13 0 0 90 'Yes 4:3.1 A3 8 Wall Wood 367.0.102 '13 0 90 90 Yes 4.3:1 A3 10 Wall Wood 189 0.102 .13` O� 0 90 Yes 4.3.1 A3 13 AtticRad ` Wood' 1782 0.025 38-' _•0n/a '0`Yes 4.2.1 A21 ,.•PERIMETER LOSSES Appendix . Length F2',�_ Insul Solar JA4 Location/ Surface (ft)li Factor R-val Gains Reference Comments,. . � _16�SlabEdge 97- 0:730.. - R-0/Oin No 4.4.7 Al Standard Slab Edge 2 1)7 S1abEdge 202 0.730 R-0/Oin No 4.4.7 Al- Standard -Slab Edge FENESTRATION SURFACES r' •T ' f .+ �.., -. w �'-ExteriorT , Area U Act ;`Shade : ,•, Orientation. (s.f)'.factor• SHGC�Azm Tilt `Type Location/Comment's., �. ti+ `fie,-.w• Jf ti`r ... •„�.� r,� Erg - _, ._ ' 1 Wind.Back (S) 2�178.0 0.340'.0.7300_-180 .90 Standard" 1/Vinyl Frame/Operable/L tD o Back\ (S) 112.0 0.330 0.300 180 90 Standard 2/Vinyl Frame/S.G.D./Low 4 Door Rightl(W) 51.0.0.330.0.300 270 -90 Standard 4/Vinyl,Frame/S.G.D./Low 8 Wind Right (W) 25.0 0.'340'0:300.270 90 Standard 8/Vinyl Frame/Operable/L 11 Wind Front (N) 14.0-.0.340 0.300 0% 90 `Standard ll/•Vinyl Frame/Operable/ 14 Wind Left (E) 30.0 O 340 0.300' 90. 90- Standard 14/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ 15 Wind Left (E) 25A 0:340 0.300 90 90' Standard 15/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ 2 3 Wind Back (S) 52.0 0.340'0.300'180 .90 '_Standard 3/Vinyl Frame/Operable/L 5 Wind Right (W) 19.5 0'.340 0.300 270 90 Standard 5/Vinyl Frame/Operable/L 6 Wind Right (W) 25.0` 0.340 •0.-300 270 90••. Standard 6/Vinyl Frame/Operable/L 7 Wind Right (W) -8.0 0.340 0.300 270, 90 Standard 7/Vinyl Frame/Operable/L 9 Wind Right (W) 6.0 0.340 0.300 270 90 Standard 9/Vinyl Frame/Operable/L 10 Wind Right (W) 25.'0 0.340.0.300w`270 90 Standard 10/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ 12 Wind Front (N) 7.5 0.340.0.300• 0, 90 Standard 12/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ 13 Wind Front (N) 4.0 0.340 0.300. 0 90' Standard 13/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ 16 Door Left (E)' 24.0 0.270 0•.210 '90 '90 -Standard 16/French Door low-e 17 Wind Left (E) 25.0 0.340 0.300 90 90 Standard•17/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ 18 Wind Left (E) 6.0 0.340 0.300 90 90' Standard 18/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ 19 Wind Left (E) 25.0 0.340 0.300. 90 -90 Standard 19/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ 20 Door Right (W) -48.0-0.270 0.210 270,--90 Standard 20/French Door low-e 21 Wind Front ,(N) 30."0 0.340 0.300 '0--90 Standard 21/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ 22 Wind Left (E) 3."0 0.340'0:300 '90••90 Standard 22/Vinyl Frame/Operable/ Reg: 210-N0000634C-000000000-0000 Registration Date/Time: 2010/01/21 20:09:44 HERS Provider: Ca10ERTS, Inc CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE:, RESIDENTIAL' COMPUTER•METHOD` CF-lR. Page4 .Project Title... .. Plan 4Y Date:°06/27/12 14:50:05 T r OVERHANGS , Window .--Overhang - 'Area - Left Right Surface (sf) Width Height,`Depth Height'.Extension Extension, 11 Window 78.0 .°jn/a f. 6 ' `-1 , 1.. - n/a ;n/a '. 2 Door 112.0 14 . - 8 ' '' 9 rl n/a n/a ' 4 Door 51.0 n/a 8.5 -.. 12 1 -_n/a n/a '. 8 Window 25'.0 n/a 6 1' 1 n/a `n/a' 11 Window- ' 14'. 0 n/a- 7 8 1°'. n/a n/a 2 3 Window.- 52.0 .,n/a. 6.5• 1 1 n/a - n/a'• '5 Window 19.5 n/a'. 6 - ' .1 1 n/a i n/a 6 Window 25.0 n/a 6 1- �- 1' n/a n/a 7 Window _ 8.0 n/a 6 1 - 1 n1a n/a 9 Window 6.0 n/a 6 1 1 n/a. n/a 10 Window' 25.0.'n/a 5 1 1 n/a n/a 16 Door 24:0 n/a '8 •12 1 n/a n/a- , 'l7 Window 25.0. n/a." ' 5 1 --1• n/a n/a 18 Window �f';,6.0 n/a' 1.5 1' 1. n/a' _ °•'n/a' .19 Window 25.0 n/a 5 .1 1 -n/a •n/a SLAB'SURFACES ' '.�. Area -Slab -Type �e'lcv�*r�°°�►�.Sf�� -'r. ' s; Stan�drard Slab' 1'398 {y4�„ 2 t ' iMC r Standard Slab 1782 HVAC,SYSTEMS�,, Verified - Verified Verified' --Verified`Verified Maximum System `� Minimum` Refrig'Charge•Adequate Fan Watt Cooling Type Efficiency -,EER or - CID -Airflow, Draw Capacity Furnace 0.800, AFUE n/a' n/a `'. n/a n/a n/a ACSplit 13.00, SEER 11.5, Yes`` No No No ' 2 , Furnace 0:800 AFUE "n/a - n/a � n/a ' n/a n/a' 'ACSplit 13.00 SEER', 11•.5 Yes No No No 4^ ...HVAC' SIZING Verified. Total.." Sensible ,-4., Design Maximum . Heating Cooling'- Cooling., Cooling System Load Load' :'Capacity Capacity Type (Btu/hr) (Btu/hr)' (Btu/hr) .(Btu/hr) < 1Furnace- _ _ ° s 22089 i n/a*, n/a- n/a Reg: 210-N0000634C-000000000-0000 Registration Date/Time: 201'0/01/21 20:09:44 HERS"Provider: Ca10ERTS, Inc CERTIFICATE OF'COMPLIANCE: RESIDENTIAL COMPUTER METHOD., 'CF-lR Page 5 Project Title.....:.... Plan 4Y Date.:06/27/12'14:50:05 HVAC.SIZING' a. Verified.' y Total- -Sensible Design Maximum _ Heating Cooling, '.Cooling Cooling ` System Load ;Load Capacity •:Capacity �• Type (Btu/hr) (Btu/hr) `(Btu/hr), (Btu/hr) ACSplit; n/a' '18547 _ 23017- n/a . •2 f Furnace28122-! n/a n/a,, n/a ' ACSplit. ,- n/a 22614 28063 n/a Total ;" 50211 41161- ' 51080 n/a r , Orientation of Maximum...... Front Facing •180 deg (S)- Sizing Location.. :.: LA•,QUINTA Winter Outside Design .. 26 F_ Winter•Inside,Design....' 70 F Summer Outside Design:..... 111 F. Summer Inside Design.. ....75 -F Summer, Range .. ...:...... 34 F t DUCT•SYSTEMS Verified Verified Verified v System Duct 2 Duct' Duct Surface Buried ' -Type Location R-value Leakage.- Ailkrea' Ducts ell Furna.ee AttiJv_ R,-,6 $ Yes No :* No j i ACSplitl AttiR-'6 -Yes' f No !` N6oN - f FurnaceZ AttiTcy•—R-Y6- `Pest No ACSplit Attic R-6 _ °"Yes No -INFILTRATION TESTING DETAILS ~� Blower Door Blower Door eLeakige Target Leakage Minimum (CFM50h/SLA) (CFM50h/SLA) _ 1098 / 3:0 -549 / 1.5. _. ,2 V '1400` % 3.0.,700 / 1.5 • _ FAN -SYSTEMS. Flow Power. System Type (cfm) (W/cfm) 1Stanaard 30.48:c 25 2 Standard 38.82,• :25 Reg: 210-N0000634C-000000000-0000"'Registration-Date/Time: 2010/01/21,20:09:44 'HERS Provider: Ca10ERTS, Inc CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCEt',RESIDENTIAL'COMPUTER METHOD CF-1R Page 6'.- Project Title.. ....... .'Plan'4Y Date.:06/27/12.14:50:05 WATERS HEATING .SYSTEMS 'r E Number. .= Tank. External ' Heater in Energy' Size Insulation Tank Type Type Distribution Type ,System Factor (gal) R-value 1 Storage Gas Standard • 2,;, 0.62• 50 R-n/a 'SPECIAL FEATURES -AND MODELING ASSUMPTIONS *** Items in this section should be documented on the plans,.*** *** instal'led'`to'manufacture'r and CEC specifications, and *** *** verified during plan check and field inspection. *** This is a•multiple�,orientation building. This printout`is `for'the front facing N'rth Z 'This building incorporates a Radiant Barrier. ' This building incorporates a non-standard}Water.'Heating System. HERS REQUIRED VERIFICATION *** Items in this section require field testing and/or ***' verification by a certified home energy rater under *** *** the supervision'of a CEC-approved HERS provider using *** CEC appr`ovedt.es.t.ing and/or ver.i.f.icat on .methods and a*** must be repo ted-_"on t e-CF��£4R instalhatiori4certi ate. *** _ - "'^:i+;J � a"-+L.,�...�:.,,, • °s' . } This building %c'orp�o/rate"st° HERS ver`ifAied High^'rQual1,ty Insulat ofi Tnstallatioon..: This buil.di1ng�iincorpoiates HERS verified Building,Envelope,Sealing ' _. pascals are .shown in ; Targef'and tiMinimum-CFM values measured -at {,50� INFILTRATION ',.TESTING DETAILS. "above: T-If the` measured'"CFM50h,is',-above the target-' then cor`rective'`action- must. be taken,,to reduce the ?infil'tration�and then retest. Alternatively,, the compliance calculations could be redone without infiltration testing. This building incorporates a,HERSYverified,Improved:Refrigerant Charge test or the installation of .a HERS verified Charge Indicator:_Display (CID). If a cooling system is not installed, then'HERS verification is not necessary. This building incorporates HERS'verified High:Energy-Efficiency Ratio (EER)..'- 'This building incorporates,HERS verified Duct Leakage. Target leakage -is calculated and documented on'the CF-4R. If the'measured'CFM,is above the target, then corrective action must be taken, -to -reduce the duct leakage and then must be retested. Alternatively, the compliance calculations could be redone without duct testing: If ducts are not_ installed, then_ HERS verification is not necessary:. ` { Reg: 210'N0000634C-000000000-0000 Registration Date/Time:'2010/01/21 20:09:44 ..HERS Provider: Ca10ERTS, Inc t CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE: RESIDENTIAL COMPUTER'METHOD • CF-lR' Page-7 Project Title..'... SPlan 4Y Date..06/27/12 14:50':05 REMARKS r 4. COMPLIANCE -,STATEMENT - This certificate',of.compliance•'li'sts the,building features and performance specifications needed to _ `comply, with Title-24,., Parts-1 and 6' of' the California Code'. of -'Regulations, and the administrative -regulations to, implement them. This certificate hasbeen signed by the individual with overall. design:, responsibility: k DESIGNER or OWNER '' DOCUMENTATION'AUTHOR Al Name.... Name.... Rudy Sains Company.: Desert Cheyenne, Inc. Company. Heritage -Energy Group, LLC,, Address-.`-78-401 Hwy.11l, Suite X Address. 470.Wald , La Quinta, CA;92253. -Irvine, CA, 92618 Phone... 760-77,,7-tt9920 Phone: (949).'•789-7221 = License. __Signed.. 1 Signed. (date) f (date) ENFORCEMENT„ AGENCY•-;' 77 41 Title'. . . Agency. ,mil' Phone.. .�....• �.,. •,;,..�.-'^ -�- ;—.° s '�, k .� �Signed..._%, (date) Electronically Signed at Ca10ERTS.com by Greg Herington (GJH.Development Inc)"6/27/2012'• Electronically Filed by Rudy Sains'and`Authenticated at CalCERTS.com 6/27/2012 - a Reg: 210-N0000634C-000000000-0000 Registration Date/Time: 2010/01/21 20:09:44 HERS'Provider: CalCERTS, Inc Mandatory Measures Summary MF-1R Residential (Pagel of 3 Site Address: Enforcement Agency: Date: NOTE: Low-rise residential buildings subject to the Standards must comply with all applicable mandatory measures listed, regardless of the compliance approach used. More stringent energy measures listed on the Certificate of Compliance (CF-1 R, CF-1R ADD, or CF-IR-ALT Form) shall supersede the items marked with an asterisk(*) below. This Mandatory Measures Summary shall be incorporated into the permit documents and the applicable features shall be considered by all parties as minimum component performance specifications whether they are shown elsewhere in the documents or in this summary. Submit all applicable sections o the MF-1 R Form with plans. DESCRIPTION Building Envelope Measures: §116(a)l: Doors and windows between conditioned and unconditioned spaces are manufactured to limit air leakage. § 116(a)4: Fenestration products (except field -fabricated windows) have a label listing the certified U-Factor, certified Solar Heat Gain Coefficient SHGC , and infiltration that meets the requirements of § 10-111 (a). §117: Exterior doors and windows are weather-stripped; all joints and penetrations are caulked and sealed. § 118(a): Insulation specified or installed meets Standards for Insulating Material. Indicate type and include on CF-6R Form. § 118(i): The thermal emittance and solar reflectance values of the cool roofing material meets the requirements of §118(i) when the installation of a Cool Roof is specified on the CF-lR Form. *§150(a): Minimum R-19 insulation in wood -frame ceiling or equivalent U-factor. § 150(b): Loose fill insulation shall conform with manufacturer's installed design labeled R-Value. *§ 150(c): Minimum R-13 insulation in wood -frame wall or equivalent U-factor. *§150(d): Minimum R-13 insulation in raised wood -frame floor or equivalent U-factor. § 150(f): Air retarding wrap is tested, labeled, and installed according to ASTM E1677-95(2000) when specified on the CF-lR Form. §150(g): Mandatory Vapor barrier installed in Climate Zones 14 or 16. § 150(l): Water absorption rate for slab edge insulation material alone without facings is no greater than 0.3%; water vapor permeance rate is no eater than 2.0 erm/inch and shall be protected from physical damage and UV light deterioration. Fireplaces, Decorative Gas Appliances and Gas Log Measures: §150(e)lA: Masonry or factory -built fireplaces have a closable metal or glass door covering the entire opening of the firebox. §150(e)1B: Masonry or factory -built fireplaces have a combustion outside air intake, which is at least six square inches in area and is equipped with a with a readily accessible, operable, and tight -fitting damper and or a combustion -air control device. § 150(e)2: Continuous burning pilot lights and the use of indoor air for cooling a firebox jacket, when that indoor air is vented to the outside of the building, are prohibited. Space Conditioning, Water Heating and Plumbing System Measures: § 110-§ 113: HVAC equipment, water heaters, showerheads, faucets and all other regulated appliances are certified by the Energy Commission. §113(c)5: Water heating recirculation loops serving multiple dwelling units and High -Rise residential occupancies meet the air release valve, backflow prevention, pump isolation valve, and recirculation loop connection requirements of § 113 c 5. §115: Continuously burning pilot lights are prohibited for natural gas: fan -type central furnaces, household cooking appliances (appliances with an electrical supply voltage connection with pilot lights that consume less than 150 Btu/hr are exempt), and pool ands a heaters. § 150(h): Heating and/or cooling loads are calculated in accordance with ASHRAE, SMACNA or ACCA. § 150(i): Heating systems are equipped with thermostats that meet the setback requirements of Section 112(c). § 1500)lA: Storage gas water heaters rated with an Energy Factor no greater than the federal minimal standard are externally wrapped with insulation having an installed thermal resistance of R-12 or greater. §1500)1B: Unfired storage tanks, such as storage tanks or backup tanks for solar water -heating system, or other indirect hot water tanks have R-12 external insulation or R-16 internal insulation where the internal insulation R-value is indicated on the exterior of the tank. § 1500)2: First 5 feet of hot and cold water pipes closest to water heater tank, non -recirculating systems, and entire length of recirculating sections of hot water pipes are insulated per Standards Table 150-B. § 1500)2: Cooling system piping (suction, chilled water, or brine lines),and piping insulated between heating source and indirect hot water tank shall be insulated to Table 150-B and Equation 150-A. § 1500)2: Pipe insulation for steam hydronic heating systems or hot water systems >15 psi, meets the requirements of Standards Table 123-A. §1500)3A: Insulation is protected from damage, including that due to sunlight, moisture, equipment maintenance, and wind. § 1500)3A: Insulation for chilled water piping and refrigerant suction lines includes a vapor retardant or is enclosed entirely in conditioned space. 2008 Residential Compliance Forms August 2009 Mandatory Measures Summary MF-1R Residential (Page 2 of 3 Site Address: Enforcement Agency: Date: §1500)4: Solar water -heating systems and/or collectors are certified by the Solar Rating and Certification Corporation. Ducts and Fans Measures: §150(m)l: All air -distribution system ducts and plenums installed, are sealed and insulated to meet the requirements of CMC Sections 601, 602, 603, 604, 605 and Standard 6-5; supply -air and return -air ducts and plenums are insulated to a minimum installed level of R-4.2 or enclosed entirely in conditioned space. Openings shall be sealed with mastic, tape or other duct -closure system that meets the applicable requirements of UL 181, UL 181A, or UL 181B or aerosol sealant that meets the requirements of UL 723. If mastic or tape is used to seal openings eater than 1/4 inch, the combination of mastic and either mesh or toe shall be used §150(m)l: Building cavities, support platforms for air handlers, and plenums defined or constructed with materials other than sealed sheet metal, duct board or flexible duct shall not be used for conveying conditioned air. Building cavities and support platforms may contain ducts. Ducts installed in cavities and support platforms shall not be compressed to cause reductions in the cross -sectional area of the ducts. § 150(m)2D: Joints and seams of duct systems and their components shall not be sealed with cloth back rubber adhesive duct tapes unless such tape is used in combination with mastic and draw bands. §150(m)7: Exhaust fan systems have back draft or automatic dampers. § 150(m)8: Gravity ventilating systems serving conditioned space have either automatic or readily accessible, manually operated dampers. § I50(m)9: Insulation shall be protected from damage, including that due to sunlight, moisture, equipment maintenance, and wind. Cellular foam insulation shall be protected as above or painted with a coating that is water retardant and provides shielding from solar radiation that can cause degradation of the material. §I50(m)10: Flexible ducts cannot have porous inner cores. § 150(o): All dwelling units shall meet the requirements of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 62.2-2007 Ventilation and Acceptable Indoor Air Quality in Low -Rise Residential Buildings. Window operation is not a permissible method of providing the Whole Building Ventilation required in Section 4 of that Standard. Pool and Spa Heating Systems and Equipment Measures: § 114(a): Any pool or spa heating system shall be certified to have: a thermal efficiency that complies with the Appliance Efficiency Regulations; an on -off switch mounted outside of the heater; a permanent weatherproof plate or card with operating instructions; and shall not use electric resistance heating or a pilot light. §I14(b)1: Any pool or spa heating equipment shall be installed with at least 36" of pipe between filter and heater, or dedicated suction and return lines, or built-up connections for future solar heating § 114(b)2: Outdoor pools or spas that have a heat pump or gas heater shall have a cover. § 114(b)3: Pools shall have directional inlets that adequately mix the pool water, and a time switch that will allow all pumps to be set or programmed to run only during off-peak electric demand periods. § 150(p): Residential pool systems or equipment meet the pump sizing, flow rate, piping, filters, and valve requirements of § 150(p). Residential Lighting Measures: §150(k)l: High efficacy luminaires or LED Light Engine with Integral Heat Sink has an efficacy that is no lower than the efficacies contained in Table 150-C and is not a low efficacy luminaire asspecified by § 150 2. § 150(k)3: The wattage of permanently installed luminaires shall be determined as specified by § 130(d). § 150(k)4: Ballasts for fluorescent lamps rated 13 Watts or greater shall be electronic and shall have an output frequency no less than 20 kHz. § 150(k)5: Permanently installed night lights and night lights integral to a permanently installed luminaire or exhaust fan shall contain only high efficacy lamps meeting the minimum efficacies contained in Table 150-C and shall not contain a line -voltage socket or line -voltage lamp holder; OR shall be rated to consume no more than five watts of power as determined by § 130(d), and shall not contain a medium screw -base socket. §150(k)6: Lighting integral to exhaust fans, in rooms other than kitchens, shall meet the applicable requirements of §150(k). §150(k)7: All switching devices and controls shall meet the requirements of §150(k)7. §150(k)8: A minimum of 50 percent of the total rated wattage of permanently installed lighting in kitchens shall be high efficacy. EXCEPTION: Up to 50 watts for dwelling units less than or equal to 2,500 for 100 watts for dwelling units larger than 2,500 fe may be exempt from the 50% high efficacy requirement when: all low efficacy luminaires in the kitchen are controlled by a manual on occupant sensor, dimmer, energy management system (FMCS), or a multi -scene programmable control system; and all permanently installed luminaries in garages, laundry rooms, closets greater than 70 square feet, and utility rooms are high efficacy and controlled by a manual -on occupant sensor. § 150(k)9: Permanently installed lighting that is internal to cabinets shall use no more than 20 watts of power per linear foot of illuminated cabinet. §150(k)10: Permanently installed luminaires in bathrooms, attached and detached garages, laundry rooms, closets and utility rooms shall be high efficacy. 2008 Residential Compliance Forms August 2009 Mandatory Measures Summary MF-1R Residential (Page 3 of 3 Site Address: Enforcement Agency: Date: EXCEPTION 1: Permanently installed low efficacy luminaires shall be allowed provided that they are controlled by a manual -on occupant sensor certified to comply with the applicable requirements of § 119. EXCEPTION 2: Permanently installed low efficacy luminaires in closets less than 70 square feet are not required to be controlled by a manual -on occupant sensor. §150(k)l l: Permanently installed luminaires located in rooms or areas other than in kitchens,bathrooms, garages, laundry rooms, closets, and utility rooms shall be high efficacy luimnaires. EXCEPTION 1: Permanently installed low efficacy luminaires shall be allowed provided they are controlled by either a dimmer switch that complies with the applicable requirements of § 119, or by a manual -on occupant sensor that complies with the applicable requirements of § 119. EXCEPTION 2: Lighting in detached storage building less than 1000 square feet located on a residential site is not required to comply with 150 lL §150(k)12: Luminaires recessed into insulated ceilings shall be listed for zero clearance insulation contact (IC) by Underwriters Laboratories or other nationally recognized testing/rating laboratory; and have a label that certifies the lumiunaire is airtight with air leakage less then 2.0 CFM at 75 Pascals when tested in accordance with ASTM E283; and be sealed with a gasket or caulk between the luminaire housing and ceiling. §150(k)13: Luminaires providing outdoor lighting, including lighting for private patios in low-rise residential buildings with four or more dwelling units, entrances, balconies, and porches, which are permanently mounted to a residential building or to other buildings on the same lot shall be high efficacy. EXCEPTION 1: Permanently installed outdoor low efficacy luminaires shall be allowed provided that they are controlled by a manual on/off switch, a motion sensor not having an override or bypass switch that disables the motion sensor, and one of the following controls: a photocontrol not having an override or bypass switch that disables the photocontrol; OR an astronomical time clock not having an override or bypass switch that disables the astronomical time clock; OR an energy management control system (FMCS) not having an override or bypass switch that allows the luminaire to be always on EXCEPTION 2: Outdoor luminaires used to comply with Exception) to §150(k)13 may be controlled by a temporary override switch which bypasses the motion sensing function provided that the motion sensor is automatically reactivated within six hours. EXCEPTION 3: Permanently installed luminaires in or around swimming pool, water features, or other location subject to Article 680 of the California Electric Code need not be high efficacy luminaires. §I50(k)14: Internally illuminated address signs shall comply with Section 148; OR not contain a screw -base socket, and consume no more than five watts of power as determined according to § 130(d). §150(k)15: Lighting for parking lots and carports with a total of for 8 or more vehicles per site shall comply with the applicable requirements in Sections 130, 132, 134, and 147. Lighting for parking garages for 8 or more vehicles shall comply with the applicable requirements of Sections 130, 131, 134, and 146 §150(k)16: Permanently installed lighting in the enclosed, non -dwelling spaces of low-rise residential buildings with four or more dwelling units shall be high efficacy luminaires. EXCEPTION: Permanently installed low efficacy luminaires shall be allowed provided that they are controlled by an occupant sensor(s) certified to comply with the applicable requirements of § 119. 2008 Residential Compliance Forms August 2009 .t ? .jt $j y ,� - i; ey6• ' i. ` i,yy s,.: R �:2.m�i'i i'tf � ' �'� � �.r � �.- � ,;� ✓' z. ter, F � � �� Y! 4..r}, �t • ht� p s: �«. A.i7l �� I` t-� aZ :c It 2.. .� '� � � f - � - �lr� � � � C ' r� �K14�: •" � ..i:. - + � art �.'� - �- �-f�'i F u re . O '. * 1, 6 ♦ • f'4i t r $. -.��L i y," �i4.. y r S� a _ Y, �. rr 4cs er S .. �.�.�F l�.i�•.. Hi,�,. »,$�:`'�a._ [ t=�-, ;Y�.' � t .h +t35J."4-�.'�., �1.r ,;i�, _�f'. .. b. �.t:.. Installation Manual PQ . ' CITY OF � �IoEPA - BUILDING APPROVEID FOR CO ON oA l BY JUL 11 2012 By 0 wwvolffpmi"-� May 2011 3 5 ' { PureFlow is a registered trademark of Vega LLC MANABLCC is a registered trademark of Mega LLC 3' Megs EX is a trademark of Mega LLC i FostaPDC is a registered trademark -of Mega GmbH & Co. KG " Copyright April 2009 Mega LLC, All rights reserved. y; Vwe a I PF 0411 Working with Viega is the perfect solution. Viega researches, develops and produces complete system solutions for contractors. The components are produced at our plants or are supplied exclusively by the finest quality manufacturers. Each of our systems is developed in-house and tested under stringent quality control conditions to guarantee safety and efficient operation. An international company with a national commitment. Viega PureFlow plumbing combines technology from both sides of the Atlantic into the very best PEX plumbing systems for our customers. Viega's reach extends throughout North America with distribution across the U.S., Canada and Mexico. Our network of sales experts and wholesale distributors can meet your needs whether you are in Boston or Berkeley. The products we deliver are the finest quality offered at a highly competitive price. Our goal is to remain on the forefront of the plumbing industry well into the new century, and with our advanced products and a determination to remain the quality leader, we are convinced this accomplishment is well within our reach. Call 800-976-9819 for your local representative and wholesale location. This installation guide is intended for traditional (branch and main) plumbing systems and hybrid plumbing systems using termination manifolds, MANABLOC® and MINIBLOC parallel / manifold plumbing system. NOTE: References to ViegaPD(TM tubing made throughout this publication include the entire line of Viega cross - linked polyethylene products. NOTE: References to ZERO LEAD throughout this publication identifies meeting the lead free requirements of California and Vermont law effective January 1, 2010, as tested and listed against NSF-61, Annex G. 2. Why you can depend on Mega PureFlow. • A safe system • Competitively priced ' • Leakproof fitting connection • Highly flexible and kink resistant • Lightweight and easy to handle • Fast and solder -free installation • No open flame during installation • Reduced number of fittings used in wall • Long life expectancy • Non -corroding • Reduced flow noises • In coils or straight lengths • FostaPEX form stable tubing ideal for exposed runs • Listed by NSF to meet the requirements of ANSI 14 and 61 and PEX5006 (CL5). • Listed to ASTM F876 and.F877 IN THE EVENT OF CONFLICT OR INCONSISTENCY BETWEEN THESE INSTALLATION GUIDELINES AND LOCAL BUILDING OR PLUMBING CODES, LOCAL CODES SHOULD TAKE PRECEDENCE. NOTE: Failure to follow the installation instructions will void the Viega Plumbing Warranty. Nothing in this publication is intended to create any warranty beyond Viega's applicable warranty. For additional information, contact Viega at 800-976-9819. � l '• 'ky� ,4 F"' �' o i � v • A� ,�,�; �,+. �a �. L �� .. t S � �` � � � < �r L � � r r+ . 4*' 4ro y ��di ii�.: hy, 4��F�. i1 .i i t � ., a� A�a+n.,� •iC ik�� f i +R� � i`LyS �S"- r✓F 1 e #; o -I � 11 • _ s f c � S '` ti r r7 '� {.,. � ,L. ��:yiF Y 7[r �... 3 •4 1 Introduction 1.1 Vega .................................................. 5 1.2 PureFlow System Concepts ................................ 6 2 Green Building 2.1 General ............ .... ......................... 7 2.2 Structured Plumbing .................................... 7 2.2.1 Parallel Systems ................................... 7. 2.2.2 Branch and Main Systems ........................... 8 2.2.3 Combination Systems .............................. 9 2.2.4 Domestic Hot Water Circulating Systems ............... 9 3 ViegaPEX Tubing 3.1 General ................... .......................10 3.2 PEX - the superior tubing ............................... 10 3.3 Colors ............................................ .10 3.4 ViegaPEX Properties and Performance ..................... 10 3.5 Tubing Markings........................................10 3.6 ViegaPEX Tubing Dimensions ............................ 10 3.7 ViegaPEX Sizes.......................................10 4 ViegaPEX Ultra Tubing 4.1 General..............................................11 4.2 PEX - the superior tubing .............................. 11 4.3 Colors ................................... ...........11 4.4 ViegaPEX Ultra Properties and Performance ................ 11 4.5 Tubing Markings .................................. . 11 4.6 ViegaPEX Ultra Tubing Dimensions ....................... 11 4.7 ViegaPEX Ultra Sizes ................................... 11 5 FostaPEX Tubing 8 The MANABLOC 8.1 The MANABLOC.... ; ............... : ................ 21 8.1.1 MANABLOC PEX Connections ...................... 21 8.1.2 MANABLOC Markings ............................. 21 9 System Sizing and Calculations , 9.1 System Sizing and Calculations ........................... 22 10 Installing the PureFlow PEX Tubing System 10.1 Handling PureFlow Tubing .............................. 24 10.2 Uncoiling PureFlow Tubing ............................... 24 10.3 Bending PureFlow Tubing .............................. 24 10.4 Installation Temperature Range ......................... 25 10.5 Removing PureFlow PEX Connections .................... 25 10.6 Repairs.............................................25 10.7 Tubing Expansion ..............:...................... 26 10.8 Freezing..........................................26 10.9 Water Heaters ........................................ 27 10.10 Heaters, Flues, Vents and Recessed Lights ............... 27 10.11 Continuously Recirculating Hot Water Plumbing Loops ..... 27 10.12 Noise and Water Hammer in PEX Systems ............... 28 10.13 Shower Valves ....................................... 28 10.14 Electrical Grounding .................................. _ 28 10.15 Pressure Testing ..................................... 28 5.1 General ............................... ............12 5.2 Advantages of FostaPEX................................ 12 5.3 Colors ..................................... ......12 5.4 FostaPEX Properties and Performance ............:........ 12 5.5 Tubing Markings ....................................... 12 12 5.6 FostaPEX Tubing Dimensions ............................ 12 5.7 FostaPEX Sizes........................................12 6 PureFlow PEX Press Fittings 6.1 Bronze PEX Press with Attached Sleeve ................... 13 6.1.1 Bronze PEX Press Fittings, Manifolds and Sleeves ...... 13 6.1.2 Bronze PEX Press Fitting Markings ................... 13 6.2 PEX Press Connection with Attached Sleeve ................ 14 6.2.1 The PureFlow PEX Press Hand Tool .................. 14 6.2.2 The PureFlow PEX Press Power Tool ................. 14 6.2.3 The PureFlow PEX Press Fitting ...................... 14 6.2.4 Making a PureFlow PEX Press Hand Tool Connection (Attached Sleeves)................................15 6.2.5 Making a PureFlow PEX Press Power Tool Connection (Attached Sleeves)................................16 7 PureFlow PEX Crimp Fittings 7.1 Brass PEX Crimp ...................................... 17 7.1.1 Brass PEX Crimp Fittings, Manifolds and Crimp Rings ... 17 7.1.2 Brass PEX Crimp Fitting Markings .................... 17 7.2 Po"loyTM PE)( Crimp .................................. 18 7.2.1 PolyAlloy PEX Crimp Fittings and Crimp Rings ......... 18 7.2.2 PolyAlloy PEX Crimp Fitting Markings................. 18 7.3 PEX Crimp Connections ................................. 19 7.3.1 The PureFlow PIX Crimp Hand Tool ................. 19 7.3.2 The PureFlow PEX Crimp Fitting ................ :.... 19 7.3.3 Making a PureFlow PEX Crimp Connection ............ 20 Fastening the PureFlow System 11.1 Wood Frame Construction ...........................:.. 29 11.2 Supporting PureFlow Tubing ............................ 29 11.3 Steel Construction ..... ............ ............ 30 11.4 Concrete .............................. ...........30 11.5 Installing Under the Slab ............................... 30 11.6 Below Grade and Service Line .......................... 31 11.7 Foundation Penetration ................................ 31 11.8 Direct Burial of PureFlow Fittings ......................... 31 11.9 Protecting PEX Tubing ..................:.............. 32 Installing Manifolds and Fittings 12.1 General.............................................33 12.2 PureFlow PEX Press Brazed Copper Manifolds ............. 33 12.3 PEX Press ProPress Manifolds .......................... 33 12.4 PureFlow PEX Crimp Brazed Copper Manifolds ............ 33 12.5 PureFlow MANABLOC Homerun Manifold Plumbing System.. 33 12.6 Stub Out Options ..................................... 34 12.7 Copper Connections ............................ 34 12.8 Threaded Connections.................................35 12.9 Valves..............................................35 13 PureFlow MANABLOC System Design and Sizing 13.1 General..........................................37 13.2 Supply and Distribution Line Sizing.......................37 13.3 Plumbing Code Compliance (Parallel Systems) ............. 37 13.4 Valve Requirements for Parallel Systems .................. 37 14 Installing the MANABLOC 14.1 General ................................... .......38 14.2 Overview and Carton Contents .......................... 38 14.3 Location ........................... 38 14.4 Valve Operation... 40 14.5 Domestic Hot Water Circulation Systems .................. 40 14.6 Multiple MANABLOC Installations ........................ 40 14.7 ViegaPEX General Design/Installation Practices ............. 40 3 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 ,iy, t ! f F'.i 9 { } y _ i�-i . 7,,•i } .I '♦ M. ! n ' fY. �. YI �•('PC - F �r-y�r 4;„ft�ii�•:.ts ti+�., `r' 1,,34 s+ ,4 f-.-r t yc.�.� ,• t y y,t .i a I .xr. }" +.: .��R'++`a . r n - ''i {tT"-F= s }v.t `' y.:�. ✓ .f� '� .,•;'' h:,�t !-;t+rr i HfA 1 ram, 1,. ,r, d"t:'�. „"t�,, .`lr ,t - + {'• !f' 7 t Y5 mu �� +- t a .. S `7f `N9 , px. i l l }• x. �+ is Y;.,. y ,��,�� } s 'L_ vc- •. d ��, M j ; .^,�, �• K� ,."t = +�. �� ' i - u• axi' x'. •� }4 yet - i pye.: - =+ s.� +k tl 5 . Z Al ,c_r e.' I _ Ni , 4. .�{,i� �:• j<� •.��i , E it l 15 Mounting the MANABLOC 15.1 Mounting the MANABLOC Between Studs ................ 42 15.2 Mounting the MANABLOC Between Studs Without Use of + 45716 Straps ................. :....................... 43 15.3 Mounting the MANABLOC Without Studs, Surface Mount.; .. 44 16 Installing MANABLOC Distribution Lines 16.1 Installing MANABLOC Distribution Lines .................. 46 16.2 Connecting Distribution Lines to the MANABLOC........... 46 - 16.2.1 Compression Connections (3/8" & 1/2" ports).....:'... 47 16.2.2 PD( Press Connections (1/2" ports) ................. 47 16.2.3 PD( Crimp Connection (1/2" ports) ................. 48 16.3 Connecting Distribution Lines to Fixtures .................. 49 16.4 Water Supply Connections .......... ............ . 49 16.5 Filling and Testing the MANABLOC..... :........ ..:...... 50 16.6 Draining the MANABLOC System ......................... 50 .16.7 To Completely Drain the System ..... :.. 50. 17 Pressure Testing PureFlow Systems r ' 17.1 General ........................... ..............51 - 17.2 Leak Detection ........................... 52 . 18 System Disinfection 18.1 General .......................... ........53 - 19 Codes, Standards and Approvals i 19.1 Codes...........................................54 ' 19.2 Standards ............................. ...........54 19.3 Listings and Certifications ................................ 54 PureRow Warranty ...................................... 55 Terms Used In This Guide: PFX............................................. :.............. ViegaPEX cross -linked polyethylene tubing, AHJ......................................................... Authority Having Jurisdiction PPM............................ ..........................Parts Per Million NSF .......................................................... NSF International, Inc. (formerly National Sanitation Foundation) CAWCSA.................................................. Canadian Standards Association ' "shall" ........... , .......................................... Required;a mandatory procedure "may" or "should" ................ ' " ......... A suggested optional procedure Viega IM-PF 0511 4 520709 t. ,F E� T 4i� �i, L'}•a- 42.4 i y f 3'�.`• .��Y... �'-t. V ! • i } •.F � Alf" � � � ,•� y. L ] J Y j�_ y Y ayL y .W T". '?"!.i:;Y. ,•• I � f" t+t'i r �: Y r�' '}' ` �,t p seal ,. 1.1 Mega For over 100 years, Viega has been a trusted name in the plumbing . business globally. Through innovative techniques, sophisticated technologies and acquisition of the top PEX plumbing products in the U.S. Viega has become the industry leader for PEX plumbing. Viega produces a comprehensive range of plumbing and heating equipment. Anywhere that water flows in a building Viega manufactures a system to fit. The company's experience with press fitting technology in bronze, stainless steel and copper led to the development of the PureFlow water distribution system. Viega is positioned as the number -one supplier of PEX plumbing systems in North America. Today Viega engineers and manufactures more than 12,000 system components at six state-of- the-art factories including our PEX tubing facility located in the heart of the U.S. Viega quality has proven itself in millions of systems installed each year around the world. Viega has a history in North America of technological innovation and customer service that is second to none. The Viega product line now is composed of multiple brands including ProPress® flameless copper and ProPress® stainless steel joining technology, PureFlow® flexible PEX tubing plumbing technology, ProRadian? comfortable efficient heating technology and S-no- Ice® snow and ice melting technology, to name a few. Each line is selected so that components work together to create a complete system concept. PureFlow plumbing provides complete PEX systems for potable water distribution, including manifolds, PEX and multilayer tubing, fittings and valves. PureFlow fire sprinkler provides a PEX system for multipurpose one and two family residential fire sprinkler viega systems, per NFPA 13D, including fittings and ViegaPEX Ultra Black PEX tubing in sizes 3/4" to 2". The ProRadiant program includes a wide range of hydronic radiant systems and controls as well as thermostats and setpoint controls. In addition, the Viega S-no-Ice line includes snow and ice detection controls, heat exchangers and snow melting systems. As the pioneer in combining technology and engineering expertise from both sides of the Atlantic into the very best systems for our customers in North America, we are proud to present you the world's finest potable water distribution systems: PureFlow. The name says it all. We look forward to sharing our history in the making with you. • 5 Mega IM-PF 0511 520709 ��' r �;,. � . , is 7r .•,,Y � ,, � ., � � � ,� � . �� - 1.2 PureFlow System Concepts ViegaPE PureFlow is a high -quality flexible PEX system for hot and cold potable water distribution. The PureFlow plumbing system offers maximum security thanks to cold press and full circle crimp fitting techniques. These fittings guarantee the plumber quick installation, suitability for use in all types of applications at the construction site and vast reductions in the required number of fittings and necessary installation time. Top quality materials such as brass, bronze, stainless steel and durable, environmentally compatible plastics provide the basis for the very highest standards of quality at Viega. Viega offers a full line of Zero Lead products that meet the requirements of California AB 1953, Vermont ACT 193, and NSF 61 Annex G, which require less than 0.25% lead in all plumbing fittings used in cooking and drinking water systems. All Viega plastic and copper articles are naturally lead free and comply with the new legislation. ZERO LEAD identifies Viega products meeting the lead free requirements of California and Vermont law, effective January , 2010, as tested and listed against NSF-61, Annex G. PEX tubing offers outstanding versatility. More than 930 million feet of Viega PEX Tubing has been manufactured since 2006. This is conclusive evidence of this product's considerable importance in plumbing installation, in both quality and quantity. This is clearly the result of excellent workmanship, fast and simple installation and the reliability and safety which are characteristic of the Viega system concept. The efficiency of the integrated system concept for Viega branded products is confirmed by: • Perfectly coordinated components • Quick delivery at short notice • Time -saving installation • Complete installation of an entire system from one supplier Viega's comprehensive services include technical support and warranty coverage, subject to the exclusive use of PureFlow system components. PureFlow is a high -quality plumbing system. It is able to withstand high levels of thermal and mechanical stress (180°F at 100 psi, 73.4°F at 160 psi). 9 T.. The systems incorporate: • ViegaPIX tubing: red, white and blue cross -linked polyethylene tubing designed with superior chlorine resistance • ViegaPE Ultra tubing: red, white, blue, and black cross -linked polyethylene tubing with added resistance to UV • ViegaPE Ultra black tubing: UL 1821 listed for use in multipurpose one and two family fire sprinkler systems per NFPA 13D. • Viega FostaPEX tubing: cross -linked polyethylene with additional aluminum and polyethylene layers to provide rigidity and form stability, available in red or silver to differentiate hot water lines • A range of standard and zero lead bronze, brass or plastic fittings for PBX Press and PBX Crimp fitting systems • PureFlow MANABLOC distribution system for use with Viega PEX tubing • A range of inline, manifold and stop valves for ViegaPIX fitting systems • Viega PureFlow press tools and jaws for the PEX Press fitting systems • Viega PureFlow crimp tools for the PEX Crimp fitting systems IF, Viega IM-PF 0511 6 520709 .Y � ,�, �_, . f � r u fga {' . ti F t •t� 2.1 General ' Green Building incorporates environmental considerations into every phase of the home building process. Multiple factors are considered during construction as well as its operation and its impact on the environment. LEEDO (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design) was established by the U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC) as a system.to define and measure "green building." This voluntary market - driven rating system is based on existing, proven technology, and awards credits for different aspects of environmental design. There are four levels of performance that can be achieved per these resource categories: Certified, Silver, Gold and Platinum. Viega's PureFlow plumbing systems can be incorporated to improve both water and energy efficiency, earning your home credits toward a LEED certification level (when following LEED installation criteria). To obtain more information concerning LEED certification for your. home, contact the USGBC. 2.2 Structured Plumbing Structured plumbing is the practice of installing and/or designing a plumbing system in a manner that enhances the system's performance by reducing water waste and hot water delivery times. This plumbing strategy is becoming important for home builders in markets where water conservation is prevalent. Viega, being the leader in innovation and technology for the plumbing and heating systems, has embraced this philosophy with its plumbing products. 2.2.1 Parallel Systems Using home run manifolds (see illustration below), the installer can potentially plumb a house without fittings hidden inside walls. By installing a manifold system near the hot water source, tubing can be run directly to each fixture without using additional fittings. This system provides the lowest pressure losses, as well as eliminates interference between fixtures. Often each fixture can be fed with smaller diameter tubing such as 3/8" diameter, which is easier and faster to install. The MANABLOC Manifold is a Unique plumbing system that not only provides a superior plumbing system for homeowners but can also be incorporated to provide water and energy savings. It's a simple concept that provides extraordinary performance. Each fixture is fed by its own flexible water distribution line, which runs from a central manifold. By providing each fixture with its own distribution line, the line can be sized appropriately so hot water can be delivered rapidly. Since the line is dedicated to a single hot or cold fixture, less water is required to purge the line. This saves time, energy and can reduce water waste by up to 40%. Clean System and Clean Installation The MANABLOC is preferred by many installers thanks to its fast and safe installation. There are no fumes from solvents to contend with and no torches required on site for installation. Installation time is significantly less than that of a rigid plumbing system due to the flexibility of ViegaPEX tubing and the simplicity of the PureFlow fitting systems. Viega tubing is color coded to make installation easier and the connection of fixtures to the proper distribution line faster and more foolproof. Homeowners can be assured of the purity of the system due to the third party NSF 61 certification carried by both the MANABLOC and ViegaPEX tubing. Homeowners also benefit from the corrosion resistance of ViegaPEX, which helps prevent contamination of drinking water. Fewer Fittings Behind the Wall The MANABLOC requires fewer fittings than branch and main plumbing systems. This means very few are needed behind the wall. The MANABLOC is installed using flexible ViegaPEX tubing that can be bent around obstacles without the need for fittings. In most cases, each dedicated line has a fitting at the MANABLOC and one at the fixture connection with no fittings located behind the walls. Rich in Homeowner Benefits Home builders enjoy the many features the MANABLOC system offers their customers over branch and main plumbing systems including: • Faster Hot Water Delivery — properiy sized lines deliver hot water up to four times faster • Better Control of the Plumbing System — individual shutoff valves provide a simple way of servicing a fixture or adding on to the system 7 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 L<S Sd !'.r ti..•'�.�r �y� +'s,Ct.r3 'va. y'� r ;. ti...'E l�;jY" rr+rti_. �'ir ":e#:, "e",� j *'3is 'S' [•4r ;'�u^S: yMSS- %s`J J S # • Quiet Operation — Flexible ViegaPID( tubing reduces water hammer noise and provides quiet operation • Balanced Water Delivery — multiple fixtures can be used simultaneously without noticeable pressure or temperature changes. Design Factors for Installing a Parallel System Water Heater Placement The'MANABLOC should be as close as possible to the water heater to minimize extra water from being stored in the larger hot water supply lines between the MANABLOC and water heater. The longer the hot water supply line is, the greater the volume of water requiring purging through the faucet before hot water is available. This creates water waste and longer hot water delivery times. Proper Water Distribution Line Sizing to Each Fixture. This is crucial for overall system performance. If you oversize a distribution line to a fixture (1/2" PD( line supplying a sink instead of a 3/8" PEX line) you are essentially doubling the volume of water being stored in that line. It can take roughly twice as long to purge an oversized line compared to a properly sized line. The fixture is what dictates water flow (federally mandated, governed by code). The tubing applies a friction loss dictated by its size and length. Therefore, as long as you do not undersize a distribution line or run it excessive distances (60 feet or greater), the system will perform properly, maintaining sufficient pressure and flow. The Length of a Distribution Line Run to Each Fixture This is just as important as properly sizing each distribution line. Length of a distribution line run can. drastically affect the performance of a MANABLOC system. The longer the line is, the more water being stored within it. Therefore, it will take longer to purge it out before hot water can reach the fixture. The MANABLOC should be located somewhat central to your fixture groups, keeping within 60 feet or less of each fixture for maximum performance. If this cannot be accomplished with one MANABLOC, multiple MANABLOCs may be required. Place one at each end of the home to split the distribution line distance between them (see section 14.6 for use of multiple MANABLOCs). ' 2.2.2 Branch and Main . Systems ` , . This method of plumbing is commonly referred to as a conventional plumbing system or branch and tee systems. This system uses a large diameter "main" supply line (minimum 3/4") for both hot and cold water supplies that runs throughout a structure to or near each fixture group with smaller "branch" lines teeing off the main to supply each fixture. • While this system can reduce the amount of tubing used, it requires more fittings, whichcan increase installation time and cost. Design Factors for Installing Branch and Main Systems. Design the layout as condensed as possible Keep the main hot supply line close to the fixture groups with the branch lines shorter than 6 feet. This will help provide hot water in a reasonable amount of time with less wasted water. The limiting factor for installers to accomplish an optimal design is how spread out the fixture groups are within the structure. If the fixture groups are not condensed, a branch and main system will have slow hot water delivery times and substantial water waste. If there is a floor plan that incorporates stacked or back-to- back fixture groups, then a branch and main system can be an effective alternative to a parallel system. One disadvantage to these systems is they store excess amounts of water in the large main lines. Therefore the farther away the fixture is, the longer the main supply line must be to reach it, and the longer it takes to purge all stored water out before hot water reaches the fixture. Another problem these systems suffer from is noticeable pressure drop during multiple fixture use. When multiple fixtures are used it increases the water flow (load) within the main line, causing higher friction loss equal to pressure loss at the point of use. This causes a drop in pressure (and potentially a temperature change) in your shower when a toilet is flushed. Mega IM-PF 0511 8 520709 2.2.3 Combination Systems A combination system uses multiple manifolds combined with a branch and main type supply system. These systems use small manifolds located throughout a structure placed near each main fixture group and are supplied by the main hot and cold supply lines similar to the branch and main system. The manifolds branch multiple lines from a common location in lieu of multiple tee fittings spread throughout. This takes advantage of benefits from both types of systems and helps keep hidden fittings to a minimum. This is done by using a return line at the end of the main hot supply line,. and a low -flow pump (usually near the hot water tank). The circulating system keeps hot water readily available throughout the entire main hot water supply line, eliminating the need to purge the entire line before hot water is present at the fixture. There are a number of hot water circulation systems available in the marketplace that offer a variety of options. These systems are ideal for branch and main, or combination systems with ' spread -out fixture groups/floor plans; as well as for larger homes using multiple MANABLOCs in a parallel type system. Design Factors for Hot Water Circulation Systems Installing a hot water circulation system A tanked water'heater shall be used for this type of system. A tankless or instantaneous type water heater will drastically increase the operating cost of the system. Design Factors for Installing There are many types of these systems available on the market Combination Systems today. Research which type is Just like the branch and main best for the particular application. Ensure all the components being system, condensed floor plan layouts used within the circulation system are preferable to minimize the length *'are rated and/or approved for a hot a and the amount of water stored in water circulation system. The chosen the main supply line, minimizing system may require maintenance the amount of water purged before and/or repairs over time, which could hot water reaches the fixtures. include complete pump replacement. These systems can also suffer from fluctuating pressure during multiple Note: Utility costs are associated fixture use. with running these systems due to 2.2.4 Domestic Hot Water the electricity required to operate the pump. Costs will vary Circulating Systems depending on the frequency of A hot water circulation system can operation and size of the pump. e incorporated into most plumbing systems and works by constantly (or periodically throughout the day ' on a timer) circulating hot water through the main hot supply line of your plumbing system. t Mega IM-PF 0511 520709 a a � y cr1 �..,^ f i'k "'3 A f✓ y'O s- �.Fi' tiG r7..}'` '. % .� " ,VC n, �� k . r.1` d c T i+. .., . � •.: �� .,t �'.Q� i - Y � fa- it"�., tl a � 3 ., + �.. yal �,ty �, � �� +f,� .T rrt .. M _•..,�'�„�,,, rti �+ SA.�� j", l� °.4 u. �{a#"a;+i•,� .- . E '-, t� �� :, _,.,.v 6 •y 1 -�k ., � ;� G.*�. "�7'7 �s�'r`i-'!�rf f d , -'� � ,. �� ! � , �. � .0 � f"%..�. .x ''� �.� ,X •,fit' i �w �'� 97<.: a�.� 3 , lk r �i: r�e.+n � 1' � +,. . yr F aru -..,`+ } p ;� . t se `.itE r: ~ k a- ♦• �.:3 g�,.y T 4 ` i 3.1 General ViegaPEX PureFlow'tubing is a high - density cross -linked polyethylene tubing (PEX). Cross -linking produces a strong, durable tubing ideal for both hot and cold potable water systems. 3.2 PEX - the superior tubing Cross -linked polyethylene is the ideal tubing choice for potable water systems. Compared to ordinary polyethylene tubing (PE), cross - linked tubing has higher temperature resistance and higher burst pressure. ViegaPEX tubing is manufactured to ASTM F876/F877 standards and listed to ANSI/NSF Standards 14 and 61. It is chlorine resistance rated for both traditional and continuous recirculation PEX 5006 (CL5) applications. ViegaPEX tubing is rated at 100 psi at 180°F and 160 psi at 73°F. In addition, the smooth walls of ViegaPEX tubing are resistant to corrosion and scaling. 3.3 Colors ViegaPEX is available in red, white and blue for easy identification of hot and cold lines. 3.4 ViegaPEX Properties and Performance Linear Expansion Coefficient: • 1.1 inch per 100 feet per 10OF Temperature and Pressure Ratings: • 200OF at 80 psi • 180OF at 100 psi •:73.4°F at 160 psi UV Resistance: • maximum exposure 60 days Flexibility: • ViegaPEX can be easily bent by hand, or with the use of Viega approved bend supports to a radius as small as 5 times tubing outer diameter. 3.5 Tubing Markings ViegaPEX tubing is marked every 5 feet with the following .representative information: Length Marker 000 Feet Company Viega Product Name ViegaPEXTM Nominal Tubing Size 1/2" Standard Dimension Ratio Tube Size SDR 9 CTS (copper tube size) Material Designation Code PD(5006 Temperature & Pressure Rating 100 PSI @ 180F/ 160 PSI @ 73F NSF Listing (Potable) cNSFOus-pw NSF Chlorine Listing CL5 ASTM Tubing Standards Certificaition F876/F877 Candian Standard Assoc CSA B137.5 Fittings System Compatibility PureFlow - ASTM F877/F1807/F2159 IAPMO Listing UPC@ Plenum Rating* FS/SD 25/50 ASTM E84 ICC Listing ES-PMGTM - 1038 HUD Listing MR 1276 Manufacturer's Date Code 1/1/2010 Material Code B2X14.2 Country of Manufacture Made in the USA 3/4" and smaller tube sizes only 3.6 ViegaPEX Tubing Dimensions Nominal Size Inner Diameter Outer Diameter Wall Thickness 3/8" .350 .500 .075 1/2" .475 .625 .075 3/4" .671 .875 .102 1" 863V 1.125 .131 3.7 ViegaPEX Sizes Nominal Size Available Coil Lengths Available Straight Lengths 3/8" 100, 500, 1000 feet 1/2" 100, 300, 500, 1000 feet 20-foot lengths in bundles of 50 3/4" 100, 300, 500, 1000 feet 20-foot lengths in bundles of 25 V 100, 500 feet 20-foot lengths in bundles of 5 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 10 J Y { V .Y �..,� "� � s t •`a,j -:2 s: ..,. * � � T s i .''�C i. i ?`,. '1 r•-r �asr , r�� ¢• i , -ry a: Sid_ �'. '� y+ yr 1 C Y .: s� i u : �, rq , '• ' 4F +ti r ..� %� {i,�.. v i e g a � � ,, ` r i� � .^xYS �a -• ; J� .`� c+ `�G �� M. •..r S+ r� '� .s", � 4. s. .� .r _ �: d � j. 1 i.�t � ;t'�,"w. » 1 .a- . 4.1 General ViegaPEX Ultra tubing is a high - density cross -linked polyethylene tubing (PEX). Cross -linking produces a strong, durable tubing ideal for both hot and cold potable water systems. 4.2 PEX .'the superior tubing ' Cross -linked polyethylene is the ideal tubing choice for potable water systems. Compared to ordinary polyethylene tubing (PE), cross linked tubing has higher temperature resistance and higher burst pressure. ViegaPEX Ultra tubing is manufactured to ASTM F876/F877 standards and listed to ANSI/NSF Standards 14 and 61. It is chlorine resistance rated for both traditional and continuous recirculation PEX 5006-(CL5) applications. ViegaPEX Ultra tubing is rated at 100 psi at 180OF and 160 psi at 73°F. In addition, the smooth walls of ViegaPB( LUltra tubing are resistant to corrosion and scaling. 4.3 Colors ViegaPEX Ultra, available in red, white, blue and black, is multilayered (2 layers) with a black core that increases the UV resistance of the tubing, enabling exposure of up to 6 months. It also blocks transmissionof visible light, preventing most types of algae growth from occurring. 4.4 ViegaPEX Ultra Properties and Performance . Linear Expansion Coefficient: • 1.1 inch per 100 feet per 10OF Temperature and Pressure Ratings: • 200*F at 80 psi • 180*F at 100 psi • 73.4°F at 160 psi UV Resistance: • maximum exposure 6 months Flexibility: • ViegaPEX Ultra can be easily bent by hand, or with use of Viega approved :bend supports to a radius as small as 5 times tubing outer diameter. 4.5 Tubing Markings ViegaPD( Ultra tubing is marked every 5 feet with the following representative information: - Length Marker 000 Feet Company Viega Product Name ViegaPD(TM Ultra Nominal Tubing Size 1/2" Standard Dimension Ratio Tube Size SDR 9 CTS (copper tube size) Material Designation Code PEX5006 Temperature & Pressure Rating 100 PSI @ 180F/ 160 PSI @ 73F NSF Listing (Potable) cNSFOus-pw NSF Chlorine Listing CL5 NSF Uniform. Plumbing Code Listing NSF U.P. Code ASTM Tubing Standards Certificaition F876/F877 Candian Standard Assoc CSA B137.5 Fittings System Compatibility PureFlow - ASTM F877/F1807/F2159 UL Listing Rating* cULus 3SAV UL1821 130 PSI @ 120 F Plenum Rating** FS/SD 25/50 ASTM E84 ICC Listing ES-PMGTM - 1038 AWWA Listing C904 HUD Listing MR 1276 Manufacturer's Date Code 1/1/2010 Material Code B2X14.2 Country of Manufacture MADE IN THE USA 3/4" through 2" ViegaPEX Ultra only 3/4" and smaller tube sizes only 4.6 ViegaPEX Ultra Tubing Dimensions Nominal Size Inner Diameter Outer Diameter Wall Thickness 3/8" .350 .500 .075 1/2" .475 .625 .075 3/4" .671 .875 .102 1" .862 1.125 .131 1-1 /4" 1.054 1.375 .160 1-1/2" 1.244 1.625 .190 2" 1.629 1 2.125 .248 4.7 ViegaPEX Ultra Sizes Nominal Size Available Coil Lengths Available Straight Lengths 3/8" 100, 500, 1000 feet 1/2" 100, 300, 500, 1000 feet 20-foot lengths in bundles of 50 3/4" 100, 500 feet 20-foot lengths in bundles of 25 1" 100, 500 feet 20-foot lengths in bundles of 5 1-1/4" 100, 300 feet 20-foot lengths in bundles of 5 1-1/2" 100 feet 20-foot lengths in bundles of 5 __4 2" 100 feet 20-foot lengths in bundles of 5 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 k 5.1 General FostaPEX tubing is the perfect companion for the PureFlow plumbing system. This tubing can be easily bent by hand like the ViegaPEX tubing, but holds its shape after bending (combining the benefits of both rigid and flexible tubing). The result is fewer fittings and bend supports, and less labor. FostaPEX can be purchased in straight lengths or coils. A unique feature of FostaPBX is that the inner layer is fully dimensioned ViegaPEX tubing. The aluminum and outer PE layers surround the inner PEX tubing. This construction allows the inner layer alone to meet all temperature and pressure requirements of the system. Using the prep tool to remove the outer layers allows the use of the standard PureFlow PEX Press fitting system, which reduces tooling costs for the contractor and simplifies connections. 5.2 Advantages of FostaPEX FostaPEX retains many of the features of ViegaPEX tubing while increasing strength and ease of installation. FostaPIX shares the same PEX Press fitting system as the ViegaPEX tubing, reducing inventory and tooling costs. In addition, the aluminum layer within FostaPEX tubing minimizes expansion during temperature changes. The expansion rate of FostaPEX is similar to that of copper tubing, reducing the necessity for expansion loops and offsets. FostaPEX is ideal for exposed tubing runs, where lt can be straightened to present a clean and traditional appearance. A bending tool is also available to assist in making smooth, tight bends in FostaPEX. FostaPEX tubing is manufactured to ASTM F876/F877 standards and listed to ANSVNSF Standards 14 and 61. It . is chlorine resistance rated for both traditional and continuous recirculation PBX 5006 (CI-5) applications. FostaPEX tubing is rated at 100 psi at 180OF and 160 psi at 730F. 5.3 Colors FostaPBX, available in red and silver, is constructed of a black PEX core, with aluminum and PE outer layers. It also blocks transmission of visible light, preventing most types of algae growth from occurring. In addition, the smooth walls of FostaPBX tubing are resistant to corrosion and scaling. 5.4 FostaPEX Properties and Performance Linear Expansion Coefficient: • 0.16 inch per 100 feet per 10*F Temperature and Pressure Ratings: • 200OF at 80 psi • 180*F'at 100 psi • 73.4°F at 160 psi UV Resistance: • Extended (fully dimensioned PEX core is protected by outer AUPE layers) A.Notfor use with PEX Crimp fittings. Flexibility: • FostaPEX tubing can be bent to a radius of 3.5 x tubing O.D. with the use of a Viega tubing bender. 5.5 Tubing Markings FostaPEX tubing is marked every 5 feet with the following representative information: Length Marker 000 Feet Company Viega Product Name FostaPEX@ Nominal Tubing Size 1/2" Standard Dimension Ratio Tube Size SDR 9 CTS (copper tube size Material Designation Code PEX5006 Temperature & Pressure Rating 100 PSI @ 180F/ 160 PSI @ 73F NSF Listing (Potable / Heating) cNSF@us- w-rfh NSF Chlorine Listing CL5 ASTM Tubing Standards Certificaition F876/F877 Candian Standard Assoc CSA B137.5 Fittings System Compatibility PureFlow - ASTM F877 IAPMO Listing UPC@ ICC Listing ES-PMGT-1015,1038 AWWA Usting C904 HUD Listing MR 1276 Manufacturer's Date Code 1/1/2010 Material Code B2X18.1 Country of Manufacture Made in the USA 5.6 FostaPEX Tubing Dimensions Nominal Size Inner Diameter Outer Diameter* Wall Thickness* 1/2" .475 .625 .075 3/4" .671 .875 d-. 102 - T. .863 1.125 .103 - 'Dimensions do not reflect outer aluminum and PE layers 5.7 FostaPEX Sizes Nominal Size Available Coil Lengths Available Straight Lengths 1/2" 150, 400 feet 20-foot lengths in bundles of 25 3/4" 150 feet 20-foot lengths in bundles of 25 T. 150 feet _ 20-foot lengths in bundles of 10 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 12 t r•h'�a iC ,.,. a z r .� rY �E s +� r -kz `� Ar to • k s c A ys a , rs4 f� _� rs ..4 .. "�'. .� �F:.�xT �i�� ,�� 4•Lu �-r afj 1�,1`{' �a*$i +�� .� 9 � ��7� 4s � �__s�'. �,_.—ri'•'�• - (•.�'`� 'r L .tX Tr..0 M � 4,: 7-a cy .�4fY�..r4r_ � tU,•�. � •'�nT-.!!-ire..F{h` ` +. o r• Y4 Y � ar I!M 6.1 Bronze PEX Press with Attached Sleeve PureFlow Bronze PEX Press fittings are cast and machined from a solid bronze alloy available in both zero lead and Viega's standard bronze material that incorporates an attached stainless steel press sleeve with three view holes and a tool locator ring. This gives the fittings high corrosion and stress cracking resistance while simplifying the connection for installation. These bronze alloys have been specially developed to resist dezincification, a process that can weaken ordinary brass fittings over time. The following design criteria make PureFlow PEX Press fittings perfect for use in potable water applications. • attached sleeve • high corrosion resistance • excellent strength properties • resistant to stress corrosion • superior wear properties • compatible with all materials • color coded tool locator ring matches PEX Press hand tool color All PureFlow tubing, fittings and manifolds are NSF certified for use in potable water systems. NOTE: Some fittings/adaptors are still sold requiring a separate press sleeve. 6.1.1 Bronze PEX Press Fittings, Manifolds and Sleeves PureFlow Bronze PEX Press fittings are produced for all connections necessary in a potable water system. PEX to PD( fittings are available as straight couplings, elbows and tees (both single size and reducing). Adapters mate PureFlow tubing to NPT threads, copper tubing and copper fittings. A full manifold offering is available. PEX Press copper manifolds are available from 2 to 12 outlets and may be installed in concealed locations. The MANABLOC and Minibloc manifold systems are also available with zero lead bronze PEX Press connections. The stainless steel press sleeves used in the PureFlow PEX Press system ensure the integrity of each connection. The strength of this material guarantees a leak -free connection every time, while the view holes allow both the installer and inspector to easily verify full insertion of the tubing. The tool locator ring ensures a consistent press every time. The stainless steel will not corrode, maintaining a clean appearance for the lifetime of the.system: l�lewl�'L' Y viega 6.1.2 Bronze Press Fitting Markings Each PureFlow Bronze PEX Press fitting is marked where space permits with the following information: Manufacturer VIEGA ASTM standard ASTM F877 Temperature 180,F Rating cNSF@us pw-G, Certifications UPC@ cULus@ CSA 131137.5 Note: All fittings may not be listed with each organization shown. Q1 Use only Viega Stainless Steel Press Sleeves and Press tools with PureFlow, PEX Press fittings 13 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 4- �- r{ ra a - [ _.r ♦, .n... ' r o �'K ] qt rr �,. %r a ,v -4' 4 t3, t ! �` n s .`c' 2 i.. a,:. .t' � .a,r � 4t,��sy�- +' s rub„ �� •' g r-� i GIs • '�' �a � f ',;�,,. ' fY �' M c-. } v sY t Y - i'= Yy r T • rx aQti Ct' e r 'i �•� . S n„ a �. ` �� t "t'° g ,, � '� i,r` � ,�� r 3, 3` r .� '�+ 3�! y, >"�� t y. r��*'F:�• n r s .. i � c r yr �. e• r ,Ya- d k- ri r' , a + r. • ( na a�� y C s� �_a A •. � '' ' !: ,b n. ;�� '� t}'n', i e � .z... 1i�,-"" yeti, S ,�. e'1 ,t .r.. t•r`.-iA 4�. dsf�ttt: F;•' �' a �' yS t, '' w'i t 3uV'•.. a1..y} t.' i',� s' ,Say , :. -. ��,•'r ..k r. ,�.,. :t �.F. d, .1 i•', , µ:' . . •s. �. � — Sidi- ' ,,� 1 6.2 PEX Press Connection with Attached Sleeve The PureFlow PEX Press connection with attached sleeve provides a simple and safe connection between the ViegaPEX or FostaPEX tubing and PureFlow system components. The ratchet system in the press tool, simple connection process, three view holes in the press sleeve and color -coded locator rings all ensure a consistent, wont' -free press connection. The difference between a finished and unfinished press fitting is also easily visible, making inspection simple. The high mechanical advantage provided by the PureFlow PEX Press tool permits one -handed operation, making the PureFlow PEX Press system perfect for tight spaces and awkward locations. The PureFlow PEX Press hand tool, is available for 3/8", 1/2", 3/4" and 1" PureFlow PEX Press connections. Each tool has a color -coded handle that matches the PEX Press fitting locator ring for easy identification on the job site and they are available individually or in convenient sets. See the Viega product catalog for details. 6.2.2 The PureFlow PEX 6.2.1 The PureFlow PEX Press Power Tool Press Hand Tool The PureFlow PEX Press connection must always be carried out with the aid of a PureFlow PEX Press tool. The hand tool incorporates a forced compression mechanism to ensure a complete and secure connection each time. A ratchet inside the tool prevents the tool from being opened until the proper force has been applied to the press sleeve. (A safety release screw allows the tool to be opened at any time, but any connection made without full tool compression must be redone.) - The PureFlow PEX Press connection may also be carried out with one of the PureFlow power tools. These tools are designed to make the same consistent press as the PureFlow PEX Press hand tools. In addition, these tools have an integrated diagnostic system that monitors tool performance and battery life. The tools have interchangeable jaw sets for 3/8", 1 /2", 3/4", 1 ", 1-1 /4", 1-1/2" and 2".'PureFlow PEX Press connections and are also compatible with the ProPress copper press system jaw sets. See the Viega product catalog for details. 6.2.3 The PureFlow PEX Press Fitting The PureFlow PEX Press tool compresses the stainless steel sleeve around the tubing and fitting in two places, permanently securing them together — no 0-rings. This connection exceeds the requirements of the ASTM F877 standard. The compression of the tool also allows press connections to be made in temperatures as low as =4°F (23°F for power tools). 1 MEE 17, M__ � Cross-section of a completed PureFlow PO(Press fitting Three view holes in the sleeve allow installers to check for proper tubing insertion. Mega IM-PF 0511 520709 3 14 . it n. F2 �S1a4r y" � V. p xxi';—.cr a�..a+a { :•n.� r0.� T �y: ,° y ��-+r _ t.��4 ,r _- iJlk, J r�a " �6 t i'�. ,�' t�- . "},"}'� . v• ega a r "'liF;:'`9 '?, 4`+,..4�. rt r". �j.1.*•s'�.�''. is v `yts ,+� k fy� r u ��....�: %�. aa.Sa°.r t,. 1f, ri�..Fr. sa .r 3 � S;*s ,ar,�'; �' .,, [. r:� S,j' t� u � �1!' xxrt. �� y.•."k.? � �. t.".' a'�i•., 3i..�ir; 6.2.4 Making a PureFlow PEX Press Hand Tool Connection (Attached Sleeves) a 1. Square off tubing to proper length. 2. If using FostaPEX tubing, insert into 3. Insert PEX Press fitting with attached Uneven, jagged or irregular cuts will prep tool, push and turn until no sleeve into tubing and engage fully. produce unsatisfactory connections. resistance is felt. If using ViegaPEX, continue to step 3. ;III: :.1;— CIIII� f 4. Ensure full tubing insertion at view 5. Position press tool perpendicular over 6. Close handles, using trigger to reduce holes in attached press sleeve. Full Press Sleeve resting it against the tool grip span if desired. insertion means tubing must be locator ring. I - completely visible in at least two view Note: The tool locator ring must be holes and partially visible in the one.. in the factory installed position while making a press to ensure a consistent leakproof connection. It may be necessary to rotate the tool locator ring to avoid interference between the' ring and tool 7. Extend handle and continue 8. Warning: The connection is not ratcheting until automatic tool release leakproof when the tool has been occurs at proper compression force. opened by emergency release.' The tool locator ring must be present to ensure a proper PEX Press connection. 15 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 6.2.5 Making a PureFlow PEX Press Power Tool Connection (Attached Sleeves) 1. Square off tubing to proper length. 2. If using FostaPEX tubing, insert into 3. Insert PEX Press fitting with attached Uneven, jagged or irregular cuts will prep tool, push and turn until no sleeve into.tubing and engage fully. produce unsatisfactory connections. resistance is felt. If using ViegaPEX, continue to step 3. 4. Ensure full tubing insertion at view 5. Insert the appropriate PureFlow .. ..6. Open jaw and position perpendicular holes in attached press sleeve. Full Press Jaw into the press tool and over press sleeve resting it against insertion means tubing must be push in the holding pin until it locks. the tool locator ring. completely visible in at least two view Note: The tool locator ring must be holes and partially visible in the one. in the factory installed position while making a press to ensure a consistent leakproof connection. It may be necessary to rotate the tool locator ring to avoid interference between the ring and tool. J 7. Start pressing process; hold the 8. When press connection is complete, trigger until the jaw has automatically open and remove jaw. released. Warning: The tool locator ring must be present to ensure a proper PEX Press connection. Viega IM-PF 0511 16 520709 A l d*a i i �+t�'�:� a>•t�y' �-rh i � ��,�.Y � r '� .:y �`r�� ''�� A a ?.� .� .�r� . � }4 } Y. � ' � ., c> �" �'� f fak. _x Y " w F' 7 ,' •' �, '� � xr � _ y. �.yE^., y,S „�, '"` E, a `- � 4 �-'.�'�} ,+F r r' � z zt hi r + �?� � 'x �j r .ja�•"s. !F' 'i� s sa-` � ' � � }.w� `�,.,,��nr s �aa w r' t .y _ '�--! S a r1 . F. F `ia 7 _ •.'`. ,. `y L y s fr ry tl V _ ;)Are C R'i',V � *, � •' $ E i e `� - < .a. 7.1 Brass PEX Crimp PureFlow Brass PEX Crimp fittings are machined from a zero lead ECO Brass®. The following design criteria'r make PureFlow PEX Crimp fittings perfect for use in potable water applications. • Cost Effective • Excellent Strength Properties • Excellent corrosion resistance • Fast Installation All PureFlow tubing, fittings and manifolds are NSF certified for use in potable water systems. 7.1.1 Brass PEX Crimp Fittings, Manifolds and Crimp Rings PureFlow Brass PEX Crimp fittings are produced for all connections necessary in a potable water system. PEX to PEX fittings are available as straight couplings, elbows and tees (both single size and reducing). Adapters mate PureFlow tubing to NPT threads, copper tubing and copper fittings. PEX Crimp copper manifolds are available from 4 to 10 outlets and may be installed in concealed locations. The MANABLOC and Minibloc manifold systems are also available with zero lead brass PEX Crimp connections. PEX Crimp Fittings are widely accepted with over 50% of the industry offering this system. 47 F t Ira I �J 17 7.1.2 Brass PEX Crimp Fitting Markings Each PureFlow Brass PEX Crimp fitting is marked where space permits with the following information: Manufacturer VIEGA ASTM standard ASTM, F1807 UPC®, or U.P. Code, Certifications NSF-pw, CSA 13137.5, cNSFOuspw-G Note: All fittings may not be listed with every organization shown. Use only F1807 copper crimp rings and full circle crimp • tools with PureFlow PEX Crimp fittings. QNOT for use with • FostaPEX tubing Vega IM-PF 0511 520709 r! v} Vl� nt'�T ✓W '* I? � �� ZK� 4Yr' ,µ T } 3 ti L.R G'is i. 5 } r., •.� r_ f `1W i 3 aE&f � J .. � t l Y , r .nti rk y ', 1 e � _ S , }:�• `'.` y t •'R,. .. •r' "b'ii 4 7.2 PolyAlloyrM PEX Crimp PureFlow PolyAlloy PEX Crimp fittings are molded from Acudel®. The following design criteria make PureFlow PolyAlloy PEX Crimp fittings perfect for use in potable water applications. • Cost Effective • Superior Wear Properties • Fast Installation • High Corrosion Resistance All PureFlow tubing, fittings and manifolds are NSF certified for use in potable water systems. ®PureFlow PolyAlloy PEX Crimp fittings must be protected from UV exposure and petroleum products, which can damage them. In the event of incidental UV exposure during storage, installation and handling, combined exposure of PolyAlloy PEX fittings shall not exceed 15 days. 7.2.1 PolyAlloy PEX Crimp Fittings and Crimp Rings PureFlow PolyAlloy PEX Crimp fittings are produced for many connections necessary in a potable water system. PEX to PEX fittings are available as straight couplings, elbows and tees (both single size and reducing). Adapters mate PureFlow tubing to fixture connections. The MANABLOC homerun manifold system is available with PolyAlloy PEX Crimp connections. PolyAlloy PEX Crimp manifolds'are available from 2 to 8 outlets and may be installed in concealed locations. The MANABLOC and Minibloc manifold systems are also available with PolyAlloy PEX Crimp connections. The material choice and fitting design used in the PureFlow PolyAlloy PEX Crimp system ensure the integrity of each connection. "'. 7.2.2 PolyAlloy PEX Crimp Fitting Markings Each PureFlow PolyAlloy PEX Crimp fitting is marked where space permits with the following information: Manufacturer VIEGA ASTM standard ASTM, F2159 NSF U.P. Code, Certifications' cNSFOus-pw, CSA B137.5 QUse only F1807 copper • crimp rings and full circle crimp tools with PureFlow PEX Crimp fittings. NOT for use with • FostaPEX tubing Vega IM-PF 0511 520709 18 :. a� f ,+.: 4 ' ✓ h 1i' y ; M p '� t{�' + r ' U� tan4", t. a }. I.�ro .�2. . i , '� �A '7 � u u �, ' � �, v kk 4 � Y �t� � `°�' �7•. 03 �} � � � �3 °�r- .k l ,� �� ti�R� .G rui �,yptro r �. fi" �PLD. wY. s�, s ri - cm sty r ri t A� tLM Sp r ii ".r4x K #1dsri3'.��.� ,�.t. 5l,}F 7.3 PEX Crimp Connections The PureFlow PEX Crimp connection provides a simple and safe connection between ViegaPEX and PureFlow PEX Crimp system components. The full circle crimp tool and simple connection process ensure a consistent, worry -free crimp connection every time. 7.3.1 The PureFlow PEX Crimp Hand Tool 7.3.2 The PureFlow PEX Crimp fitting The PureFlow PEX Crimp connection must always be carried out with the aid of a PureFlow PEX Crimp tool. There are multiple configurations of PureFlow PEX Crimp tools perfect for tight spaces and awkward locations. The PureFlow PEX Crimp hand tool is available for 3/8", 1/2", 3/4" and 1" PureFlow PEX Crimp connections. Some tools are available with color -coded handles for easy identification on the job site. See the Viega product catalog for details. F. . Cross-section of a completed PureFlow PEX Crimp fitting Crimp tools A GO/NO GO gauge is provided to check the calibration of the crimp tool. A crimp is good if the GO gauge fits over the ring, and the NO GO gauge does not. At least one connection should be checked at the beginning and end of each day to ensure proper crimps have been made. Most crimp tools . can be recalibrated. Please refer to tool instructions. The PureFlow PEX Crimp tool compresses the crimp ring around the tubing and fitting in a full - circle, permanently securing them together — no O-rings required. This connection meets the requirements of the ASTM F1807 or F2159 standard. The compression of the tool also allows crimp connections to be made in temperatures as low as —30°F. viega 19 Mega IM-PF 0511 520709 7.3.3 Making a PureFlow PEX Crimp Connection I 1. Square off tubing to proper length. Uneven, jagged or irregular cuts will produce unsatisfactory connections. 1/8" to 114' 2. Slide the correct size crimp ring .3. Insert the fitting into the pipe over end of the tubing. to the shoulder or tube stop. Position the ring 1/8" to 1/4" frnm fhc onH of fhc fi ihinn 7� 4. Center the crimping tool jaws exactly over the ring. Keep 5. When checking crimps with 6. A crimp connection is considered the tool at and close the a GO/NO GO gauge, push good if the GO gauge fits the ring handles commpp letely. the gauge STRAIGHT DOWN and the NO GO does not. A crimp DO NOT CRIMP TWICE. over the crimped ring. NEVER connection is considered bad if slide the gauge in from the side. the GO gauge does not fit the Do not attempt to gauge the ring or the NO GO gauge does fit. crimp at the jaw overlap area. Bad crimps must be cut out of the The overlap area is indicated tubing and replaced. by a slight removal of the . blackening treatment. Mega IM-PF 0511 520709 '..�sif?y r, 'A.c G r� f��!•t.. t a 7j i'� rt�� - Vr r h F �.,'t'. Si}-• +1,•,� `1 • VWf � r . ' ,YO 'Y <F J i.� I. 'T�}1 {� � i y '{ � ~E iVYA,Y'{ .1 MA �'a Ct ;, �y 4� 3 li �' '. f[ �� +! ']t _ :. -. �;,• r. ti J� f- . - � Gt. �{ gay. t� 8.1 The MANABLOC The MANABLOC control unit is molded from PLS (Polysulfone) plastic and tested to the requirements of ASTM F877 and certified by NSF International. The following design criteria make the MANABLOC distribution system perfect for potable water applications: • Fast Installation • Fewer Fittings • Excellent Resistance to Chlorine • Fast Hot Water Delivery The MANABLOC supply inlet connections use a special 1 " MANABLOC swivel adapter that is not included in the MANABLOC package and must be purchased separately. Transition fittings also available in zero lead materials and include bronze insert (PEX Press), brass insert (PEX Crimp), PolyAlloy insert (PEX Crimp), Male NPT male thread and compression. These transition adapters are available in sizes ranging from 3/4" to 1-1/4" depending on the connection type (see product catalog for a list of sizes). The MANABLOC incorporates color -coded valves for hot and cold water supplies. 8.1.1 MANABLOC PEX Connections Connections for the individual PEX distribution lines are a mechanical - type fitting and will not work with standard pipe fittings. Use only fittings supplied with the MANABLOC or other fittings designed for special port transitions available from Viega, listed in the Product catalog. Refer to Section 16, Installing MANABLOC Distribution Lines, for detailed information. Warranty coverage applies ONLY when the MANABLOC is installed with ViegaPEX tubing and in accordance with the Installation Instructions, local code and good plumbing practices. MANABLOC port connections are available in zero lead Bronze Press, zero lead Brass Crimp, Poly Crimp and Compression available in all 3/8", 1/2" or a combination of both for all connection types. viega 8.1.2 MANABLOC Markings Each PureFlow MANABLOC is marked where space permits with the following information: Manufacturer VIEGA ASTM standard ASTM, F877 UPC® Certifications cNSFOus-pw, CSA 6137.5 QUse only Viega approved • fittings to connect ViegaPEX tubing to the MANABLOC 21 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 9.1 System Sizing and Calculations PureFlow systems should be designed following standard plumbing engineering practice. Follow local codes to determine minimum tubing size and required fixture pressures. Pressure drop through fittings can be estimated from the charts at right. Values are expressed in equivalent length of PEX, so add the values for the relevant fittings to the length of tubing in the run, and then determine the total pressure drop from the charts on the following page. To determine the pressure drop through runs of ViegaPEX and FostaPID( tubing, refer to the pressure drop chart on the following page. For a known flow rate, tubing size and tubing length, the pressure drop through the run can be easily determined. PureFlow PEX Press Fittings Friction Loss - Equivalent Feet of SDR9 PEX Tubing Size Coupling Elbow Tee Run Tee Branch 3/8" 2.9 9.2 2.9 9.4 1/2" 2 9.4 2.2 10.4 3/4" 1 8 1 9 1" 1 10 2 10 1-1/4" 2 11 2 11 1-1/2" 2 13 2 12 2" 1 19 2 18 PureFlow PEX Crimp Fttings Friction Loss - Equivalent Feet of SDR9 PEX Tubing Size Coupling Elbow Tee Run Tee Branch 3/8" 2.9 9.2 2.9 9.4 1/2" . 2.0 9.4 2.2 10.4 3/4" 0.6 9.4 1.9 8.9 in 1.3 10.0 2.3 11.0 PureFlow PolyAlloy PEX Crimp Fittings Friction Loss - Equivalent Feet of SDR9 PEX Tubing Size Coupling Elbow Tee Run Tee Branch 1 /2" 7.1 16.5 7.2 17.9 3/4" 4.8 17.4 6.6 17.7 1 " 4.5 18.0 6.0 17.0 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 22 (•�If `'f' M ... i s Yf} "44( it � S* at .'k�'I T'• {•� f 4 � �Y f:,�1 +�yf, Y ?\� � wx� i Y 1 ak ?'T.; L _.� � �;. i i + � ; Y`vF� ` t .tu i, _ i1 'w x�j`s* tir ^. #fa ri n:�El ':-.'.✓ $ �'i e ,} 'R # �X ,t s s " " .�� •ry �; r ,r,�tk '7'. '� F` '. a t "` � R.,� i x 'i * •` fr i N' y cS* t 'c Lr r.: :� � sF { - d 7 M rJ`,y;° , t ,e, x., ��,� , � ,p t; . � . C � 2' �. pr xn >a r.. >• r . t� f viega .Pressure Drop (psi per foot of PEX tubing) gpm 3/811 1/211 . 3/4"- 1" 1-1/4" 171/2" 2" 1 0.070 0.016 1.5 0.149 .0.034 . 2.2 0.303 0.069 2.5 0 385 0.087 3 0.539 0.122 0.023 3.5 0.717 0.162. . 0.030 4 0208 0.039 5 0.314 0.059 6 _ 0.440 0.082 0.024 7 0.586 0.109 0.032 8 0.140 0.041 9 0.174 x : 0.051 10 0.211 ` 0.062 0.024 11 .0.252. 0.074 0.028. 12 0.296 0.087 0.033 13 0.343 0.101 0.038 14 0.116 0.044 16,�r0;148 0.056 0.025 18 0.184 0.070 0.031 20 0.224 0.085 0.038 22 , . ' 0.267 0.102 0.045 24 r 011.9i _'?; 0.053 26 0.138 _ 0.062 28 0.159 0.071 30 0.180 0080° 'f 32 0.203 0.091 .024 34 0.101 .027 36 , 0.113 .030 38 0.125 .033 40 0.137 .037 45 .046 50 55 .066 60 .078 65 .090 70 .104 75 - 118 = 8 fps per size tubing NOTE: Maximum flow for each size based on 12 FPS velocity. PSI x 2.307 = head loss. 23 _. Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 .y4 ��sf + a ♦ '� �' .s , _, r F .fit F �i�, f�Y , 4 1 '"l. f N a � ♦ +r � .} r '. yR�1k `:- *' ''" ,.,.s L ti SK.'. •m a ..r. .+, ° . o - d { i f - -+' r- .ate ty Y" 4 F 0, , 1•t`+ - .i. V . 9 .t i✓ C uY•�.' 10.1 Handling PureFlow Tubing The properties of PureFlow tubing make it very easy to work with and install in most types of construction. Some care must be taken to prevent damage to the tubing before and during installation: • Use care to protect both ViegaPD( and FostaPEX tubing from physical damage during storage and installation. Keep the tubing away from sharp objects, open flames, etc., and do not place heavy objects on the tubing. • Damaged sections of tubing should be cut out and discarded. • Do not expose ViegaPEX tubing to sunlight or any UV source for extended periods of time (less than 60 days for standard ViegaPEX or less than 6 months for ViegaPEX Ultra). • FostaPEX, with its aluminum layer, is resistant to UV light, but long-term exposure should still be avoided. • Do not store ViegaPEX or FostaPEX tubing outdoors where it may be exposed to UV light. 10.2 Uncoiling PureFlow Tubing An uncoiler should be used to prevent twisting when removing tubing from 3/8" to 1" coils. Roll coils out and use care to avoid twisting 1-1/4", 1-1/2" and 2" coils or when a uncoiler is unavailable. 10.3 Bending PureFlow Tubing ViegaPEX tubing can be free bent (unsupported bend) to a minimum radius of 8 times the tubing O.D. and 5 times the tubing O.D. with the use of a Viega approved bend support. FostaPEX tubing can be free bent to a minimum radius of 8 times the tubing O.D. and 3.5 times the tubing O.D. with the use of a Viega tubing bender. For situations requiring tighter bends, use elbow fittings. If bending against a PEX coil bend direction, the bending radius is 24 times the tubing O.D. To reduce damaging stress' on PureFlow fittings, bend supports or tubing fasteners must be used to anchor all bends made close to fittings. Support must be provided for tubing bends located closer to fittings than distance "L" in table below See the diagrams to the right for typical installation examples. Since FostaPEX will maintain its shape once bent, these requirements do not apply. Tubing size Distance from fitting to bend 3/8" PDC L = 6 inches 1/2" PIX L = 8 inches 3/4" PIX L = 10 inches 1 " PIX L = 12 inches 1-1/4" PIX L = 14 inches 1-1/2" PIX L = 16 inches 2" PIX L =18 inches Minimum bending radius for PureFlow tubing Using a bend support near a PureFlow connection to reduce stress on fitting L Using a tubing fastener near a connection to support bend and reduce stress on fitting A FostaPEX Tubing bender is available to assist with making accurate, tight bends in all sizes of FostaPEX tubing. 0 Tubing Bender, stock code 56015 Vega IM-PF 0511 520709 24 iF 4yy� t� ,� a �s� s° „ � � .: " 3'�, i � �• C. N �i' �-�'f?�„ 5.1:* c '1.,a, s--: '{ 3 ! T r j," ` '+" i 3 y% 1, 1 m • 1 f�•.. : 3•.. �' 1 S jF }T t �' t',Ff ;• .�, � d. F %i; ,..Lr*..; s t �� ' "�. �F i".� � y� 2 ,� �t !' � � s �.� tr '�L Y` All , �� +�'. "� 9 x:i"�t � Ey F i 't � h � L, it "h '� '�` >y S .,.•. ! � - tt�r�:;.ri.' .� � a. ;3, }4f4 Y '^ iur; r 4'x.: S•T ° � �A .� . f p -�.- ♦ '� .. � fir. �� "�•�A ea ^� ,, c;f � '4 «Y :t ~ � �s; 10.4 Installation Temperature i Range The flexibility of PureFlow tubing and the strength of the PureFlow PEX connections combine to provide a system that can be installed during any weather. The positive compression provided by the PureFlow PEX Press hand tools allow installation in temperatures down to -4°F (23°F for power tools), and -30°F for PEX Crimp hand tools. 10.5 Removing PureFlow PEX Connections Should a mistake be made, simply cut out the PBX fitting and replace with a new one. Do not reuse PureFlow PD( fittings. A. Do not reuse PureFlow PEX ` fittings that incorporate an attached press sleeve or - copper crimp rings. 10.6 Repairs Sections of kinked tubing should be t repaired by cutting out the damaged section and installing a repair coupling. J 25 viega Mega IM-PF 0511 520709 ilkiJ 4L % k fix' n 'r,4 v'F 1`e� i 10.7 Tubing Expansion When installing PureFlow tubing, expansion and contraction of the material must be considered ViegaPEX tubing should not be pulled tight when installed, as cold water will cause tubing to shrink slightly as the system is filled. A slight amount of slack should be left in each run to allow for this contraction without stressing the fittings. Expansion of the tubing in hot water lines should be accommodated by using expansion loops or offsets. Fasteners should not grip tubing tightly so that it can move slightly as expansion takes place. Expansion loops or offsets will give tubing a place to grow without stressing fittings. Using suspension clip fasteners at all penetrations will allow tubing to move without creating noise. ViegaPEX expands or contracts 1.1 inches in length per 100 feet of tubing for every 10OF change in temperature. Tubing expansion is less critical with FostaPEX, though still present. The aluminum layer in this tubing limits expansion to 0.16 inches per 100 feet of tubing for every 10°F rise in temperature, similar to copper. This makes FostaPEX ideal for use where expansion is a concern. ' 10.8 Freezing The flexibility of PureFlow tubing makes it resistant to damage from freezing, but precautions to prevent freezing should be taken when low temperatures might be encountered. Insulating each PEX tube individually or as a group is not generally necessary if the PEX tubing is installed within the insulation envelope of the structure, i.e. the heated area. For example, the tubing may be installed under the insulation in the attic or within an interior wall of a heated space. - Using a /oop'to accommodate Offsets also provide room• for �� r=* tubing expansion tubing expansion r •y.` M 1/8 to 3/16 } { , slack per foot f �, o - • v ' .Y.., -Allow some slack in & runs- prevent ,. ..{, f •� damage from tubing contraction -,r , +<,� PEX tubing systems should not be intentionally subjected to freezing. Do not use open torch or excessive heat to thaw PEX tubing. Tubing failure or damage can result. Heat (DO NOT USE A TORCH) must be applied directly to the frozen tubing section. Temperature on tubing shall not exceed 180°F. - Several suitable methods exist to thaw PEX tubing. They include: • Hot water " • Wet hot towels • Handheld hair dryer • Low wattage electrical heating tape (self limiting) • A commercial system that pumps heated water through a tube to the ice blockage, and returns the cooled water for reheating. a Mega IM-PF 0511 520709 26 . ,r �� ' �k r 'T�"` ".�fil c1... �J,,� �!•f,,, lY'' - ;� . . s� i... � t 7..'•_ Y� � v f.. � .w } +`t �yfr'-i, ._G 'S ij4- rTi� �• .�� ' •. L } ,ii ,4 2..''.Y •: .Y'n .aj f �t n.,,, ih. 4+.`� p ... �.. ell r.s r +`. �a h 4, ff ''t yam'"+ r r .r ; i , ! 10.9 Water Heaters PureFlow tubing should not be connected directly to gas -fired water heaters. The high temperatures of these appliances can damage the tubing. When connecting a PureFlow system to a gas -fired water heater, install a minimum of 18" of metallic piping beween the water heater and tubing, keeping tubing more than 6" away from the vent pipe. Where local code allows, PureFlow tubing may be connected directly to electric water heaters and used for hot water recirculation lines which do not come within 6" of the gas heater vent. ViegaPEX may be used to connect to instantaneous / tankless water heaters or other hot water producing devices. However, consult manufacturer's recommendations for use with plastic tubing and ensure temperature and pressure do not exceed the maximum ratings of the tubing. A minimum of.18" of metallic piping is required between a gas fired water `Beater and PDC tubing. - • 10.10 Heaters, Flues, Vents and Recessed Lights Keep PureFlow PEX tubing a MINIMUM of 12" vertically and 6" horizontally from sources of high heat such as gas flue vents, heating appliances or electric motors. Concerning recessed lighting (including low voltage types) and proper installation clearance, Viega recognizes the following types of lighting fixtures: "Type IC" or 12" minimum 6" minimum Ma ntain a minimum:12" of vertical and 6" of horizontal clearance from recessed lights and appliance or ' heater vents:' "Inherently Protected," which allow direct contact with thermal insulation and other combustible materials, and "Type Non -IC," which require a minimum clearance of 3" to thermal insulation. If room does not allow for the minimum clearance spacing specified by Viega, then the PEX tubing must be insulated with a suitable pipe insulation capable of withstanding the specific maximum temperatures generated by the fixture. Minimum clearance between any pipe insulation and fixture shall be per the requirements of the fixture type and local building codes. Forced air heating ducts and PVC power vent flues are not generally considered sources of high heat. These areas of installation should be rechecked after further construction and other mechanical systems have been installed. In cases where light leakage (direct beam) from a UV generating light source (special lighting or heating type lamps) is possible, tubing must be adequately protected with light blocking insulation. viega 10.11 Continuously Recirculating Hot Water Plumbing Loops ViegaPEX can be used in continuously recirculating domestic hot water plumbing loops, provided: 1. The plumbing loops shall operate with water temperatures of 140OF or lower, as required by most model plumbing codes. 2. The recirculating loop is for supplying hot water more quickly to the fixture. 3. The tubing is marked as rated for "continuous recirculation" as evidenced by the ASTM F876 certification marking PEX5006 (CL5) Q a) � 5 LL � 1K O W W O ~ a a. ~ PEX W a. a c Hot Cold c 0 W � � U L U aD Check Valve Pump v � Typical domestic'hoi water circulation piping +: 27 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 10.12 Noise and Water 10.13 Shower Valves Hammer in PEX Systems PEX lines should only be run to the inlet connections of tub As with all plumbing materials under. shower valves unless specifically some operating conditions, water approved by the valve manufacturer hammer can occur in PEX plumbing for other connections. - systems. The inherent flexibility 10.14 Electrical Grounding of ViegaPEX drastically reduces the magnitude of pressure surges compared with metallic plumbing Neither ViegaPEX nor FostaPEX materials. Damage to plumbing tubing may be used as an electrical components in a PEX system ground. Consult the NEC for due to these pressure surges is recommended grounding method highly unlikely, although noise can when plastic pipe is used. sometimes result. Fortunately, there 10.15 Pressure Testing are solutions to minimize or eliminate water hammer noise. All PureFlow systems must be *'Install fixtures that are not water pressure tested in accordance hammer prone. As a general rule, with local code after installation, two -handle fixtures are less likely to or to at least the system working pressure. Connections may be cause hammer than single -handle fixtures. Single -handle shower pressure tested immediately after valves, which rotate to close and completion. Refer to section 17.1: therefore are difficult to close Pressure Testing PureFlow Systems quickly, might be good choices. for specific testing requirements. ' • Clamping or strapping more frequently may help prevent tubing noise. It is very important that the tubing not be in contact with wallboard, forced air ducts or other high resonance articles. Insufficiently or improperly clamped ' or strapped tubing may move during fixture operation and hit against these surfaces. . • Install a water hammer arrester, at fixtures where noise is a problem. A water hammer arrester (AA sized) installed as close as possible to the fixture on the cold water side only will eliminate the source of the noise (the pressure wave). It should be noted that even with an arrester, tubing that is clamped or strapped insufficiently may still hit against something as it moves slightly when the water flow is stopped. • Avoid operating fixtures in such a way that causes near instantaneous shutoff. Simply closing fixtures in a less abrupt manner can eliminate hammer noise. , Viega IM-PF 0511 28 520709 it r' '�.a �'" Y h •' `i �, • r`•i' 'cl h 'L. „ _`� �.� � ,'� � ..,fi.~,t.. ' ° .r rn`F �;, .�'�:. "�.-�t'C a c. ,�,�'" 11.1 Wood Frame Construction ViegaPEX and FostaPEX tubing are ideal for use in wood frame construction. The ability to bend the tubing around corners and obstacles greatly simplifies installation. This system eliminates the expensive and time-consuming use of fittings where tubing turns within a wall, and eliminates the potential fire hazard of soldering close to exposed framing members. A few rules should be followed when running PureFlow tubing in wood frame construction: • Use nailing plates to protect the . tubing from nails and screws where it passes through studs • Suspension clips are optional but can reduce the potential for noise • When turning tubing sharply to exit from a wall, a bend support must be provided. Either use a drop ear bend support, drop ear elbow or a stub out. Neglecting to use a support will place excessive stress on the fitting, and the tubing will not exit perpendicular to the wall (except FostaPEX). +- Nalllrig plates protect tubing passing through-studs'and joists k °"from nails 11.2 Supporting PureFlow Tubing Use only plastic tubing supports. Metal supports may damage tubing. When running tubing, leave a small amount of slack between fasteners to account for tubing contraction. Note that ViegaPEX tubing will expand or contract 1.1 inches per 100 feet for every 10OF of temperature change. In long straight runs allow adequate clearance for this (see section 10.7). The aluminum layer in FostaPEX reduces expansion and contraction, so that it expands only 0.16 inches per 100 feet for every 10°F of temperature change. This makes it ideal for locations where expansion must be minimized. Tubing should be allowed freedom to move slightly as it expands. Do not clip it tightly into place or locate it where it will be tightly constrained. Use suspension clips or an approved plastic insulator where tubing passes through studs or joists where abrasion and noise is a concern (see below). Suspension clips support tubng �1 in joi§t penetrations or anywhere z.T Sy abrasion is a concern ViegaPEX tubing must be fastened at 32" intervals in horizontal runs (see below), and 32-48" for FostaPEX. In risers or vertical runs, ViegaPEX and FostaPEX tubing should be attached with suspension clips or an approved plastic insulator at each floor or ceiling penetration, and every 4 feet in between (see below). .I maximum 32" '' �i Tubing supported with U-clip k' r or lock clip fasteners on " honzontaf inns a `l�lll IIA�G��ull�l . �tV �. 'Suspension clip fasteners used , at floorp/ate Flf a HI maximFm481` 11 =,J J-clamp or lock clip'fasteners used to supporttubing in 661 i runs between floors 5 29 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 n ��''i �. .t"- }..�' ,� - 1:'� t. { x �. w. ,i� r ..+ r•a. Ji �L�il . K 'r"- Sh .•.'Yf i , 't C ~ _; c f V is r< .r Ye,, °f f d,=.. '.a-. .: +:_! b. �• �f �ri��z i. " r v --� �. k,i 11.3 Steel Construction The PureFlow system works as well in steel frame construction as it does in wood. Where tubing runs through metal studs, suspension clip fasteners must be used to protect tubing from sharp stud edges (see illustration to the right). Follow the same guidelines for fastening and supporting the tubing as for wood frame construction. 11.4 Concrete ViegaPEX and FostaPEX tubing may be run within concrete slabs. All penetration points must be sleeved to prevent tubing damage (entry/ exit points, expansion joints, etc.). Penetrations in walls, etc. may be sealed with silicone caulk. Do not use oil -based caulk. Every effort should be made to use only continuous lengths of tubing within a slab. If the use of fittings buried in concrete is necessary for repairs, all such fittings must be wrapped with insulation, noncorrosive tape. (no adhesives) or sleeved to prevent corrosion. When running tubing within a concrete slab, the tubing must be fastened to the reinforcing mesh or rebar every 2 to 3 feet to prevent it from floating up while concrete is curing. See section 11.8 for additional information regarding use of PEX tubing in direct burial applications. 11.5 Installing Under the Slab When installing ViegaPEX or FostaPEX tubing in the ground under the slab, the tubing should be snaked from side to side in the prepared trench. The trench bottom should be smooth and free of rocks and debris. Lay the tubing directly on the trench bottom. Tubing must be continuously supported by the trench bottom. Use only continuous lengths of tubing in or under -slab. Any connections shall be outside the slab or in an access box. w Suspension clip fasteners used, to r protect tubing from z ~ 'tatirasion wiieri .7 . passing through _ steel studs d.'a �� tw ' `Elbow sleeves protect tutting ' at concrete slab penetrations L Tubing must b' fastened to, the reinforcing mesh on rebar ,1 AA fk J I � er Allow sufficient slack. when tubing is laid in trench' i P8X tubing must:be sleeved at all expansion joints`and every point where it enters, - exits or penetrates the slab:° For expansion joints that are to be cut, the tubing must be dipped below the slab to'.preVent damage x r SLEEVE PEX TUBING AT ALL EXPANSION JOINTS FOR CUT EXPANSION JOINTS, DIP THE TUBING BELOW k THE SLAB TO A SAFE DISTANCE AT THE CUT LINE Mega IM-PF 0511 30 520709 _ '- fir. §. - �iA • �= " r "y r �'i°rtb�- . . q 1 . 41 � � �; 't4 �� .., ,t; �,: •�' �� i n i � •' � ..°7 } ;I {II h .... .. ♦- r ~ a y N A' t J `, ' y ii - A .1 4, P ' t+ L •'�u � ,�t,.�:t•6rC r�• ' '� A � t - to +y+S�. Y'� s 11.6 Below Grade and Service Lines ViegaPEX and FostaPEX tubing may both be used underground and for water service piping. When running lines underground, it is important to provide a stable, continuous trench base to support the tubing. Do not use blocking to support tubing. PEX tubing can be damaged by contact with sharp objects. Ensure that trench bottom and fill do not contain sharp rocks or other items. In good soil conditions tubing may be placed directly on trench bottom. In poor soil conditions (rocky, loose, etc.) the trench should be excavated at least 6 inches below the tubing level and backfilled with appropriate material to provide a stable base (coarse sand, pea gravel or similar). Always allow sufficient slack when tubing is laid in trenches. Snake the tubing slightly side -to -side to provide for contraction due to temperature change. ViegaPEX tubing changes length by 1.1 inches per 100 feet for every 10OF temperature change. FostaPEX tubing changes length by 0.16 inches per 100 feet for every 10°F temperature change. Concrete 3" min. compa Initial launching Backill B ding Backfill material must be free of large rocks, glass or other sharp objects. Provide sufficient coverage over tubing so that expected traffic loads will not deform tubing (consult local codes). Compact this material to at least 6" above the tube. Do not install PureFlow tubing where soil is or may become contaminated with solvents, fuels or similar chemicals. Also do not install tubing above or below septic tanks, leach fields, pits or cesspools. Always follow local codes when installing PureFlow tubing. Consult standards such as ASTM D2774: Standard Recommended Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pressure Piping for further information. 11.7 Foundation Penetration Where service lines penetrate foundation or basement walls, to prevent shearing or pinching off of the tube when backfill below the tubing settles, plastic tubing must be properly sleeved. If there is an area of over -excavation through which the tubing must pass, it shall be sleeved with a larger rigid o f � t l+ J � t •aY i.5 Sleeve 4o undisturbed - earth with rrigid pipe. viega pipe (Schedule 40 PVC or equivalent) to undisturbed earth. The foundation end of the rigid pipe must also be supported by the foundation wall. Slight over -excavations (12" or less) do not require rigid sleeving when the area below the tubing is back - filled and well compacted to the level of penetration. Always sleeve plastic tubing where it passes through concrete. Do not use oil -based caulks or sealants in contact with PureFlow tubing. 11.8 Direct Burial of PureFlow Fittings When direct burying PureFlow fittings, PEX Press fittings do not need to be wrapped; however, Brass PEX Crimp fittings do. When Brass PEX Crimp fittings are put in contact with ground soil by direct burial, it is the position of Viega, that these brass fittings and copper crimp rings be securely wrapped using self -fusing, fully cured silicone rubberlike tape with a minimum 0.020" thickness. Contact a Viega representative for additional information on approved wrapping materials. 31 Mega IM-PF 0511 520709 41 Ts A F•��...JFF 4 S &•' .` w, - r.• 's y '.\ F. ~ �' s;� �1<r ♦+I �. YU r. }t � F,, •.a 1 , �fF -y 'Y."ir y}1 , w� ' .` i' _ T r _ t; .r!v.. �� tip, ry .:r { •JF "•�♦. rFFr 4 1 - i ti. •' T 4 .i! { ,':T Y«�: .• 14 11.9 Protecting PEX Tubing Protect tubing and fittings from UV exposure. Due to the nature of slab -on -grade installation, tubing and fittings may be exposed to UV light for unspecified periods of time. To prevent damage from UV exposure, all tubing and PolyAlloy fittings shall be protected with an opaque covering (black plastic polyethylene bag or sheeting) immediately after they have been installed. PEX tubing shall be stored under cover, shielded from direct and indirect sunlight when the material is stored for any length of time. Short exposure times of ViegaPEX, FostaPEX and PolyAlloy fittings not exceeding the total accumulated recommended exposure time are permissible. •r. -t tiMA PLX tubing should always be "shielded fron`direct and indirect ' .. `-'sunlight, } -s Protect all exposed tutting with an opaque covering ` QInform the other trades working on the same structure of the plumbing lines. Common damage to PEX during construction is from staples, nails, screws or other sharp fasteners. Informing the other trades of the presence of the lines may help prevent damage. When the tubing penetrates at an angle in relation to the hole, it may be subject to a sharp edge that can damage the pipe. Acceptable sleeving materials include flexible plastic tubing, foam pipe insulation or an approved plastic insulator. It is not necessary to sleeve PEX When penetrating wooden framing members or non-metallic finished or unfinished walls. However, if there is a doubt, sleeve the pipe or install an insulator. Sleeve all penetrations of 1 metal, metal studs and masonry or concrete. When penetrations must be sealed for air infiltration purposes, there are several options available. Use a good grade of silicone, acrylic or siliconized acrylic caulking. DO NOT use oil -based caulks. Most canned expanding foams and open- or closed -cell pipe insulation are good sealing materials and may be used in direct contact with PEX tubing. Other materials may be used provided they do not cause short- or long-term damage to the PEX tubing. AWhen using expanding spray foam to insulate walls in a structure, there are several options available. Viega suggest using water based or urethane based open -cell insulation only. DO NOT use closed -cell type spray foams. Closed -cell spray foams have the potential to generate high temperatures during their expansion process, especially when not applied properly, which can damage PEX tubing. Always follow the spray foam manufacturer's installation instructions and warnings. If there is no information available on the compatibility of the proposed sealing material, wrap the tubing with several layers of aluminum foil in the area of contact and extending a few inches on both sides before applying the sealing material. Most building codes require the use of a fire -stopping compound when tubing penetrates a fire -rated wall. There are a number of fire -stopping compounds available that have been listed for use with PEX tubing. These compounds come in standard caulking tubes and are identified as water based, acrylic or latex. Consult the compound manufacturers' instructions for proper application. ®DO NOT APPLY CHEMICALS TO VIEGAPEX TUBING! Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 32 �axyu, rs�C<r-a�'q- i� Y�_. � C,ti. z - r ♦ 'fit r +'a � �2 t. •�X �' TIN �. ,1pwZ.rr Y`.i�.-1' ,� .✓ n�. yi r' r,i+y r �..r7? "�r" 3' t,1 �.''k �`��.+�(��y ''hy •Yf n*y.•i ( k r r�a i i �Y ?t y14� "� ail � ` 'iy � � �' d , t, a c r t � _ { � F •"" y ") � ? 4 � e � J r .: '1Y ,� ,. v t Srl+i 'S :_ i r .. ,.:• b kT,,S : v i eg a e. yi, a'Sa. ; i 1 �[ -• i n r i r F� %'+xrr rx �-,x' ca r:. {:' t ',�!' ; A ;..t''a.i.fi>i,. �,� ,. ��c ; .t,_' j J'•. L. 12.1 General The use of manifolds can simplify installation of the plumbing system, as well as eliminate hidden fittings in walls and ceilings. Viega offers several different manifolds to meet a variety of applications, whether it is a homerun or a combination installation. 12.2 PureFlow PEX Press Brazed Copper Manifolds PureFlow PEX Press Brazed Copper Manifolds are available for use where permanent connections must be used (concealed locations). These are offered in 3, 4, 5, 6, 8,10 or 12 outlets. Manifolds are 1" copper with male or female solder inlets and 1/2" PEX Press outlets. The end of each manifold is closed, but can be cut off for through runs or joining to make larger manifolds. The manifolds can be fastened using any standard fasteners for 1" tubing such as Viega Lock Clips. Copper Manifold Dimensions Number of Outlets Manifold Length W 3 8" 4 10" 5 12" 6 14" 8 18" 10 22" 12 26" 12.3 PEX Press ProPress Manifolds PEX Press ProPress manifolds , are modular in design to allow for easy assembly and flexibility on the job site. They may be used where permanent connections are necessary (concealed locations). These manifolds have a 3/4" or 1" ProPress inlet with 1/2" or 3/4" PEX outlets. The open ends, one straight and one with a ProPress connection, enable the manifolds to be connected together on the job site to create as many outlets as needed. In addition, these manifolds are available with 1" ProPress inlet and 1/2" ProPress outlets that may be assembled with 1/2" ProPress Manifold Valves or the Press Copper Fitting Adapter, to create as many valved outlets as needed. The ProPress Tool is required for connections. PEX Press ProPress Manifold Dimensions Number of Manifold Length Outlets W 1 3-3/8" 3 7-5/16" ProPress Manifold Dimensions Number of Manifold Length Outlets W 1 3-11/16" 3 7-5/16" 12.4 PureFlow PEX Crimp Brazed Copper Manifolds PureFlow PEX Crimp Brazed Copper Manifolds are available for use where permanent connections must be used (concealed locations.) These are offered in 4, 6, 8 or 10 outlets. Manifolds are 1" copper with 1" or 3/4" crimp inlets and 1/2" PEX crimp outlets PEX Crimp Manifold Dimensions Number of Outlets Manifold Length L 4 10-11/16" 6 14-11/16" 8 18-11/16" 10 20-11/16" 12.5 PureFlow MANABLOCO Homerun Manifold Plumbing System Viega offers the industry's leading homerun manifold solution: MANABLOC. MANABLOC has been in use for more than 20 years with exceptional performance and added value to end users. It provides faster hot water delivery times, balanced water delivery and less pressure drop during multiple fixture use. MANABLOC is compatible with all PureFlow fitting systems. Please refer to section 14. MANABLOC Homerun Manifold Plumbing System 33 r Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 �Y' t% '� h`^ 1�' q ,a � fe �� f �. �. - 'Y i � � S .� Y. +.• J?'- 1 4 � •Y' tP � ` �v:: �S M� 1 ' � ^` i� !. .H r - { t , ,` -�" .. � � � � � � g`xi i ;"` a.fJ X� }f 'ii ,i .r ,at> li � �. '.�.ra !, . xA' • fi �. � .: • f f t{ 4 Cal � i' `: * l �. i +{tftl - � :' _ � - �r j� s.1_` Rt tt ,r . t,y ,.•. Y y... �� - Ci ' o. 'e�� r „ ,�. �. a .. ,y rh .. ��! 12.6 Stub Out Options The PureFlow system includes fittings to accommodate most plumbing needs. Stub outs are available for a variety of fixture situations, as well as fittings and valves to connect to other plumbing materials and fixtures. Copper Stub Out Copper Straight Stub Out Standard stub outs with 90-degree bends and a closed end to facilitate pressure testing are available in either 3/8" or 1/2" PEX x 1/2" Copper. Also, PEX Press Copper tub els and PEX Crimp shower valve adapters are available for easy connections to tub and shower valves. Copper Tub El Shower Valve Adapter Drop ear elbows provide a 1/2" or 3/4" F NPT threaded connection at a wall or floor penetration, as well as a flange for securing the fitting. Drop ear bend supports allow ViegaPBX tubing to be directly stubbed out of a wall. These supports allow the tubing to make the tight bend necessary to exit the wall at a 90-degree angle, as well as providing a flange for securing the support. The exposed tubing can then be connected to a valve, using an optional chrome sleeve to cover the tubing if desired. Drop Ear Elbow Drop Ear Bend Support 1/2" snap -in bend supports are also available with a metal mounting bracket (sold separately) for quick and easy stub outs with 1/2" ViegaPEX tubing. Seven stub out locations and numerous nail holes make this a versatile option for stubbing out any number of lines, or supporting tubing near manifolds. 12.7 Copper Connections Fittings are available to adapt PureFlow tubing to both copper tubing and copper fittings. Copper tubing adapters slip over copper tubing to provide a sweat or ProPress connection. Always make the sweat connection to the fitting before connecting PEX to avoid heat damage to the tubing. Copper fitting adapters fit into copper fittings to mate PEX to standard sweat or ProPress fittings. As with copper tubing adapters, always make sweat connections prior to PBX connection to avoid tubing damage. Copper Tubing Adapters Press ProPress Adapter Copper Fitting Adapters 00,0 Snap -in Bend Supports with Bracket �'rY i 3H Mega IM-PF 0511 520709 34 i 1 }• 'fit;. r, cifFTI 1 r ^ �2N Ai ram, .n r t. y _'4- 4s , ♦ 4 S �r r 'i '� �r+, c' Ian y I ;. �� y;f aM` js,, Yit�i y`aF r 4+'•� {T n:`� �, ~� �. {-a+YA4Y .?S+"ri� vl y �� L yA':�`I' �� i Yb.a r 4• :T,x tl i''.: �'�. �ry _} ,Slew �. x+l.. 12.8 Threaded Connections The PureFlow system also provides a number of fittings to adapt ViegaPD( and FostaPD( tubing to NPT threads. In addition to the NPT drop ear elbows already mentioned, male and female adapters and male NPT elbows provide threaded connections. The threaded connection should always be made before the PD( connection to avoid twisting the PD( connection. Male Adapters Li11 rull Female Adapters r y� PureFlow NPT Elbows 12.9 Valves In -line ball valves are -available for use with PureFlow tubing. These brass finish valves may be used anywhere an in -line valve is needed. Stop valves have 3/8" or 1/2" PD( inlets and 1/4" CTS (3/8" O.D.) riser outlets. Both straight and angled versions are available depending on installation requirements. 1/4 Turn Straight Stop Valve PD( Press to 318" O.D. Riser 1/4 Turn Angle Stop Valve PO( Press to 318" O.D. Riser In -line Ball Valve (Press) viega Compression stop valves provide a compression fit over ViegaPD( . tubing and a connection to a 3/8" O.D. riser. Use of included insert stiffener and plastic ferrule are required when connecting ViegaPD( tubing to the supply side of a compression stop valve. After installation, retighten all compression fittings after 30 minutes to ensure a watertight seal. (Compression valves are not designed to work with FostaPD(.) 1/4 Turn Straight Stop Valve PO(Crimp to 3/8" O.D. Riser 1/4 Turn Angle Stop Valve PO( Crimp to 3/8" O.D. Riser In -line Ball Valve (Crimp) 35 Mega IM-PF 0511 520709 Vega IM-PF 0511 520709 36 .s�i;:-:� ..'y �r �`�YS .e _ ".rid.a �..L �. ! � ,a�.. .:.-4. a .L.. �,Jx T Siz i ;�• 13.1 General The general sizing information shown may be appropriate for many MANABLOC installations. These recommendations are based on flow rates of typical fixtures that require 8 psi residual pressure._ The length of distribution tubing run between the MANABLOC and each fixture shall be 60 feet or less to ensure optimal performance of the MANABLOC system. Exceeding this recommended distance affects the system's ability to efficiently deliver hot water, lengthening the time it takes for hot water to reach the fixture as well as increasing water waste. 13.2 Supply and Distribution Line Sizing The service line needs to be sized appropriately for the additional water demand. A typical residential plumbing system cannot be plumbed with all 3/8" distribution lines. It is the decision of the user to choose a combination of both 3/8" and 1/2" lines or to upsize the entire system to 1/2". However, supplying fixtures with 1/2" lines when it is unnecessary for the fixture demand, will increase the wait time for hot water delivery to those fixtures. The best water and energy savings of a MANABLOC system are realized when distribution lines are sized according to the fixture demand and the length of the individual line. Typical supply line size: 3/4" up to 2-1/2 baths 1" up to 4-1/2 baths Typical distribution line size: 3/8" up to 2-1/2 GPM ixture flow requirement pays, toilets, bidets, bar sinks, kitchen sinks, dishwashers, some showers (no tub fill)' and some washing machines)" 1/211 up to 4 GPM fixture flow requirement (hose bibbs, tubs, showers, washing machines, whirlpool baths, soaking tubs, etc.) " Due to the many types of shower valves, it is recommended that you consult the valve manufacturer's literature to determine the actual flow rate and required residual pressure demands of the fixture. Use the " MANABLOC Tube Size Guide to determine distribution line size and length limitations. *"Some washing machines use a timer instead of a water -level sensor to determine when the machine has been filled with the proper amount of water. There are cases in which low supply pressure or excessive distribution line length may cause some machines to fill to a level less than designed. Consult the washing machine manufacturer's literature to determine the actual fill rate and residual pressure requirements for distribution line size. Hose Bibb Note: If a hose bibb is primarily for irrigation purposes, it should be supplied from the main service line prior to the MANABLOC. A PEX Press and PEX Crimp MANABLOC comes with 1/2" ports that are designed to fit both 3/8" and 1/2" PEX port adapters. The adapters are available to purchase separately (bags of 6) and adapt to these different PEX tube sizes. Note: Each port converted to a larger or smaller size requires one adapter and one PEX Crimp ring or PEX Press sleeve (sold separately). 13.3 Plumbing Code Compliance (Parallel Systems) The MANABLOC parallel water distribution system meets the ASTM F877, standard specification for cross - linked polyethylene (PE)) plastic hot and cold water distribution system utilizing ViegaPEX tubing meeting the requirements of the ASTM F876, standard specification for cross -linked polyethylene tubing. 37 The International Plumbing Code@ (IPC) and the Uniform Plumbing CodeTM (UPC) recognize and list these ASTM standards within their respective mandatory standards and/or approved material sections. The MANABLOC is IAPMO listed to the UPC utilizing both 3/8" and 1/2" PEX tubing sizes for distribution. Sizing of Parallel Water Distribution Systems (MANABLOC) are addressed in both the IPC and UPC plumbing codes. In the IPC, section 604.5 Size of fixture supply states, "The minimum size of individual distribution line utilized in gridded or parallel water distribution systems shall be as shown in Table 604.5." This table includes 3/8", 1/2" and 3/4" size tubing. In the UPC, section 610.4 it states, "Listed parallel water distribution systems shall be installed in accordance with their listing, but at no time shall any portion of the system exceed the maximum velocities allowed by the code." The MANABLOC's IAPMO UPC listing says to install per the manufacturer's current installation instructions. Therefore, these instructions shall be used to size and install these types of systems. 13.4 Valve Requirements for Parallel Systems The IPC and UPC codes address valves in sections 604.10.3 Valves, and 605.5 respectively, which allow the use of manifold valves in parallel systems in lieu of valves at the fixture, as long as they are installed at the manifold and are identified with the fixture being supplied. Mega IM-PF 0511 520709 Block Cold Port(s) t, Hot Port(s) Plastic Mounting , Bracket 14.1 General Use the same precautions outlined in section 10 of this guide for proper handling of the PureFlow tubing when installing the MANABLOC. Components utilized in the MANABLOC plumbing system consist of ViegaPD(, ViegaPD( Ultra, and FostaPD(cross-linked polyethylene tubing, fixture transition . fittings, water service swivel connections, compression port connections and the MANABLOC control unit. The MANABLOC and ViegaPD( tubing are manufactured to national and international standards and are listed by recognized third - party agencies. 14.2 Overview and Carton Contents Additional package contents include: • Valve T-Handle • Instruction Packet — to be left at installation site • Port Labels 14.3 Location Before installing the MANABLOC, review the following instructions. NOTE: The MANABLOC is much like an electrical breaker box. When a fixture needs repair, the line to that fixture may be shut off at the MANABLOC, eliminating the need to shut down the water supply for the entire house. Hot Water Supply Inlet Valve Key ' This feature requires that the MANABLOC be accessible after installation. 1. Under no circumstances shall the MANABLOC be located in a permanently covered area (behind sheetrock, plywood, paneling), or where freezing temperatures may occur. Do not install in direct sunlight. THE MANABLOC MUST BE ACCESSIBLE and there shall be sufficient clear area in front of the MANABLOC to provide access. 2. When local code allows, mount the MANABLOC unit in a fire rated wall, provided an access door meeting the same rating requirements as the wall is installed over the access opening. Viega IM-PF 0511 38 520709 � ��-{ f'� q��. xr�-•av .f �Y"-..:' Sk3•r fi� M''. 5�, ��q 'i. 'Ji taYn �.. -.>-- �fi. ; � :j�� .i ff n �,,,, 'r ,t • W jS r fz . y - 4�,, {.a +,,, t f f; r r - �,�•+,� c";. ,tk 5� � i ti - .. sn is • afy � � 'fit`-'Tn '�r'r" tS �- ._ Ar a tt t + "i. .rt � - v S' �: #c" 4+- ,i 'a, "=. y I� +r •i s` r '.r: ' �'� ,` (/may •` �i_ as• R i�., � �+� sl � t � ��✓'t r�r�a � ��' l.l.r i3✓ i' y'y� ri t 2t_ � ; rx � t 4:; ,�- • six+ , 4xfj b yk it ti v� r r1 �f tc1 Y ,.s n • fr fn PAL n N n.: viega ..�� +' t S ,�y � * ,$ � .t�. v R+ � �. �,. r'�- .r.. �� : q R .-k A i �y� �', 1 M4 7`:l { i � .'!� � �; .,,r,`! � ' i-. } .p, •..�c a kM� rra X q C ; Iwr .7 _: n < .. w ' . Sf .'r• �. < J,t r � a . - r• _. � �'+.. .. r�� .. „. � !, .. �� ..� ., 3. When installing the MANABLOC in a location other than between studs, provisions must be made to support the tubing runs as they exit the MANABLOC. (See section 15.3). 4. Any installed cover panel shall allow access to the MANABLOC and its mounting screws, the port valves, distribution line connections and supply line connections. 5. To maximize potential water and energy savings, the - MANABLOC should be mounted as close as is practical to the hot water source, taking the following into consideration: • - a. When the MANABLOC is mounted above the water heater, there shall be a minimum of 36" of connecting tubing between the water heater and the MANABLOC to reduce the chance of heat stacking. b. When the MANABLOC is mounted beside the water heater and is connected with tubing incorporating a horizontal flow, - there shall be at least 18" of developed tube length. Mounting MANABLOC Location 18" to 8' developed _ tube length 36" minimum connecting tube vertically to water the MANABLOC within 8 feet of brackets. The mounting surface developed tube length of the water should be as flat as possible so heater,will minimize delivery time as not to induce any twisting or of hot water to individual fixtures. bending forces on the unit. The The MANABLOC may be mounted 45716 Mounting Straps simplify closer than 12" to the hot water mounting between studs on . source (tank) if it does not exceed- 16" centers. the minimum allowable vertical and horizontal spacing outlined in this section. c. Install the unit in an area that is . centrally located to the most dense concentration of served fixtures. Some applications will require that the MANABLOC be mounted farther than eight (8) feet from the hot water source. See design factors for installing a parallel system on page 8 for suggestions on reducing hot water delivery times in these instances. 6. DO NOT install the MANABLOC within a continuously recirculating hot water plumbing loop. The MANABLOC, however, may be supplied from a recirculating hot water loop. (See figure below.) 7. Position the MANABLOC so that it can be securely fastened through the holes provided in the mounting Continuously Recirculating Hot Water Plumbing Loops PEX Hot Supply PEX ` PEX Cold Supply If the MANABLOC must be mounted Hot old farther than 8' from the hot water source, the MANABLOC may be supplied from a recirculating hot water loop with ViegaPEX PEX5006 (CL5) listed PEX tubing: Cold Supply •Circ Pump Check Water Heater Valve Hot Return CM Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 14.4 Valve Operation A MANABLOC system, which has valves on all of the outlet ports, does not require stop valves at the fixtures. However, the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) may require stop valves at some fixtures. Use the included red key handle to turn each port ON or OFF. Valves are marked with arrows indicating their ON/OFF positions: Left Port -- Arrow Up for OFF Arrow Left for ON Right Port -- Arrow Down for OFF Arrow Right for ON Valve i OFF Valve ON -► (1/4Turn) Note: these valves are field -repairable. Contact Viega Customer Service for more information on this procedure. If a main inlet/outlet will not be used, it must be capped (use Stock Code 53601). The main service line to the MANABLOC may include a main shutoff valve, as required by local code. Although a shutoff valve for the main service line at the MANABLOC itself is not required, it can be a beneficial option for a homeowner and is recommended. Optional MANABLOC SHUTOFF Local code may also require the installation of a check valve, PRV (pressure reducing valve), back flow preventer, etc. To prevent debris and other particles from entering the system, a strainer may be installed in the service line. 14.5 Domestic Hot Water Circulation Systems ViegaPEX and the MANABLOC can be used in continuously recirculating domestic hot water plumbing loops, provided: The plumbing loops operate with water temperatures of 140OF or lower, as required by most model plumbing codes The recirculating loop is for supplying hot water more quickly to the MANABLOC, not to circulate through the MANABLOC or the distribution lines DO NOT include the MANABLOC within a continuously recirculating loop. 14.6 Multiple MANABLOC Installations If a home requires multiple MANABLOCs to service the number of fixtures in the home, these guidelines should be followed if the MANABLOCs are closely located to each other. • Consider dividing high demand fixtures between the units • Consider a reasonable division, i.e. upstairs/downstairs, east/west or front/back Locating a Remote MANABLOC A remote MANABLOC is sometimes recommended to achieve maximum efficiency from your MANABLOC system. Advantageous when the line lengths are excessive from one centralized MANABLOC unit. When the home requires more than one unit due to the number of fixtures or size of the home, consider locating a remote unit near an outlying group of fixtures. 14.7 ViegaPEX General Design/installation Practices The following are general guidelines to consider when installing ViegaPEX tubing with a MANABLOC system. Please refer to section 10 of this installation guide for more detail on PD< tubing installations: 1. Insulating each PD( tube individually or as a group is not necessary if the PD< tubing is installed within the insulation envelope of the structure, i.e. the heated area. For example, the tubing may be installed under the insulation in the attic or within an interior wall of a heated space. Install a minimum 18" of metallic or other piping between the water heater and PEX For electric water heaters, it is permissible to connect directly to the inlets and outlets with a brass swivel elbow or straight brass swivel fitting. Protect the PDC tubing with non-metallic sleeving material where it enters and/or exits a slab or at mass penetrations. PD< need not be sleeved its entire length within the slab. However, full-length sleeving is allowed. Mega IM-PF 0511 40 520709 'Fr e t .:-r �tr .,i". -.� a a � %Jf .r " •;.:.� rc. � ¢},e +t !" J '! r' 1" t rw. . C.` � ��: 1' l'; �+ �'L�, j a `k C.. t ,at ;.'F ; e.• xr >1 ; r . S+ r c +F t e . i", Le 4rl c..,x)2�; • V I e g a �� ' S .A.$ . r ,.� : s S .` ..ems.• ;.A r F 1r. .* ti e �. yW i,t ^3>' ``!t. e > s'..'rs •. �,r" .t .a s ""' ,'a. � r f' � sue; s �1't �° � � �. [ � ' -:4 'i Y• [te+ �"`' s as '�sd Penetrations through concrete walls may be sleeved with a larger size metal or plastic tube. Protect the tubing from any sharp edges where it enters and exits larger sleeving material. QCOLD WEATHER CAUTION! • The thermoplastic components of the MANABLOC, like all thermoplastics, have decreased resistance to impact under freezing conditions and can be damaged. Care must be exercised when installation occurs in freezing conditions. BEFORE INSTALLING THE MANABLOC, MAKE SURE THE LOCATION REQUIREMENTS HAVE BEEN MET. Take extra caution when handling the MANABLOC in temperatures that are below freezing. Tubing penetrations may require sleeving or the installation of an insulator. When the tubing penetrates at an angle in relation to the hole, it may be subject to a sharp edge that can damage the pipe. Acceptable sleeving materials include flexible plastic tubing, foam pipe insulation or an approved plastic insulator. It is not necessary to sleeve PEX when penetrating wooden framing members or non-metallic finished or unfinished walls. However, if there is a doubt, sleeve the pipe or install an insulator. . ASleeve all penetrations of metal, metal studs and masonry or concrete. When penetrations must be sealed for air infiltration purposes, there are several options available. Use a good grade of silicone, acrylic or siliconized acrylic caulking. DO NOT use oil -based caulks. Most canned expanding foams and open- or closed -cell pipe insulation are good sealing materials and may be used in direct contact with PEX tubing. Other materials may be used provided they do not cause short- or long-term damage to the PEX tubing. When using expanding spray 1 foam to insulate walls in a structure, there are several options available. Viega suggest using water based or urethane based open - cell insulation only. DO NOT use closed -cell type spray foams. Closed - cell spray foams have the potential to generate high temperatures during their expansion process, especially when not applied properly, which can damage PEX tubing. Always follow the spray foam manufacturer's installation instructions and warnings. If there is no information available on the compatibility of the proposed sealing material, wrap the tubing with several layers of aluminum foil in the area of contact and extending a few inches on both sides before applying ; the sealing material. Most building codes require the use of a fire -stopping compound when tubing penetrates a fire -rated wall. There are a number of fire -stopping compounds available that have been listed for use with PEX tubing. These compounds come in standard caulking tubes and are identified as water based, acrylic or latex. Consult the compound manufacturers' instructions for proper application. DO NOT APPLY CHEMICALS TO THE MANABLOC PureFlow MANABLOC must be protected from UV exposure and petroleum producIs which can damage them. In the event of incidental UV exposure during storage, installation and handling, combined exposure shall not exceed 15 days. PEX tubing should always be shielded from direct or indirect sunlight. PEX tubing shall be stored under cover, shielded from direct and indirect sunlight when the material is stored for any length of time. Short exposure times, of ViegaPEX, FostaPEX and PolyAlloy fittings, not exceeding. the total accumulated recommended exposure time are permissible. 41 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 15.1 Mounting the MANABLOC Between Studs NOTICE! Please leave this installation guide for the homeowner's reference. Local code may also require additional labeling directly adjacent to the MANABLOC or on the inside of any cover panel. Dimensions in these instructions are for 16" stud centers, and must be adjusted for other stud spacing. Once the general location of the MANABLOC has been determined (see section 14.3 for guidelines), the MANABLOC may be mounted to a suitable surface between a pair of adjacent studs. For 16" stud spacing, the 45716 Mounting Straps can simplify installation. Tools Required • Electric Drill • Pencil or Pen • Framing Square • Tape Measure • 3/4" and 1-1/4" Wood Drill Bits • #2 Phillips Head Screwdriver • Permanent Marking Pen* • Tubing Cutter - Stock Code 21304 or21307 • PEX Press/Crimp Tool(s)* • MANABLOC Wrench* - Stock Code 50631(Compression Blocs only) Additional Materials • Wood or Drywall Screws -1/2" or longer • 1/2" or 3/4" Plywood - only required when not mounting between studs • Nylon Ties - Stock Code 43714 • PEX Distribution Line Tubing • Supply Line Tubing • MANABLOC 1 " Swivel Supply Fittings • Fixture Transition Fittings • Tubing Clamps and Hangers • MANAPANEL Access Panel* • Tubing Uncoiler* . • Tube Turnouts (recommended) * Optional or may not be required for some installations Lay the MANABLOC, plastic brackets down, on a suitable flat surface that is large enough to accommodate the full length of the MANABLOC. Place a 45716 Mounting Strap under each plastic mounting bracket (located at the top and bottom ends of the MANABLOC). Attach the plastic mounting bracket at one end of the MANABLOC to the two outer center holes of a Mounting Strap using the provided self -tapping pan -head' screws. The screw heads must be on the accessible side of the mounting strap. Repeat at the other end of the MANABLOC. Tighten screws securely. 2. Standing behind the studwall, measure up from the floor and make a mark on the back of one of the studs to represent the top of the MANABLOC. (See illustration.) 4' to 6' from floor Measure up from the floor while standing behind the studwall. Mark a location for the top of the MANABLOC. This mark should be between 4 feet and 6 feet from the floor but may be at any height, provided the height will allow all valves on the MANABLOC to be accessible. With a framing square or level, transfer and mark the noted height on the other stud. NOTE: A residence intended for disabled persons may require that the MANABLOC be mounted lower in the wall to provide access. 3. Standing behind the stud wall, hold the MANABLOC facing away from you and align the top of the UPPER 45716 Mounting Strap to the line on the stud that you made in Step 2. Loosely attach this Mounting Strap flush to the back outer edge of one stud using a 3/4" or longer drywall or other suitable wood screw (A). See illustration. D A ATTACH 0 o HERE 0 0 0 o 0 0 FIRST c B (View from back of wall) 4. Line up the LOWER Mounting Strap with the back outer edge of the stud and attach it in the same manner (B). Attach the remaining strap ends (C & D) to the other stud, and tighten all screws. 5. Standing in front of the wall, using a framing square or straight edge, mark the center line position of the top and bottom ports onto both studs (see illustration). Mega IM-PF 0511 520709 42 6. Detach the MANABLOC from its Mounting Straps (or 1 x 4s) and remove it from the installation area to prevent wood chips or other debris from falling into the unit. 7. Transfer the port location marks made in step 5 to the insides of the stud cavity using a square and pencil. 8. Measure 1-5/8" from the mounting surface. Draw a vertical line on the studs that passes through each of the horizontal port center lines - marked in step 7 (see illustration below). Be sure to mark the inside of both studs. 1-5/8" 9. Push a small nail through the printed centerline at one end of the Drill Guide (A). Push the nail into the cross formed where the top port mark intersects with the 1-5/8" mark. Tap the nail into the stud to hold the Drill Guide in place. 10. Push a small nail through the printed center line on the lower end of Drill Guide with the center line of the port. (B). Tap the nail into the stud to hold the Drill Guide in place. 11. Using an awl, nail or other pointed tool (C), mark the stud by tapping through the Drill Guide at each printed center line between the two nails. 12. Carefully remove the Drill Guide and repeat the marking procedure on the adjacent stud. 13. Drill 3/4" holes through both studs at each marked location. Be sure to hold the drill level perpendicular to the stud to prevent drilling holes at an angle. Remove any splinters or burrs made during drilling., 14. Mark and drill any holes for main water supply and hot water supply/return lines at this time. A 1-1/4" bit will provide adequate clearance for 3/4" or 1 " tubing. The tubing shall enter and/or exit the MANABLOC in a straight line so as not to induce bending stress on the MANABLOC. Necessary elbows, couplings and tees are allowed in the main water supply lines. vieg ,6 \ .f �l Drill 3/4" holes for distribution holes for supply1-1/4" When the MANABLOC is installed prior to wall finishing operations, the unit MUST be protected from paint, texture compounds and drywall dust. NOTE: The wall in which the MANABLOC is mounted must be accessible from both sides during installation to use the 45716 Mounting Straps. 15.2 Mounting the MANABLOC Between Studs Without Use of 45716 Straps If not using the 45716 Mounting Straps, this procedure applies: 1. Cut two pieces of lumber (1 x 4 - or 3/4" plywood — about 3-1/2" wide) to a length that provides a snug fit BETWEEN two studs. 1x4 (TOP VIEW) 1 x 4s attach at the back, inside the studs, and the MANABLOC is centered between the studs. n Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 2. The top of the MANABLOC should be between 4' and 6' from the floor (but may be at any height provided that it maintains accessibility to all of the ports on the MANABLOC). Make a mark near the back of the inside of one stud that would represent the top of the MANABLOC. With a framing square or level, minor the mark on the inside back of the other stud. 3. ATTACHING THE MANABLOC BETWEEN THE STUDS: a. Measure the total length of the MANABLOC. b. Attach the first (UPPER) 1 x 4 inside and flush to the back of the. studs (see TOP VIEW on previous page) at a height where the center of its width is centered on the marks from step 2. c. Attach the remaining (LOWER) 1 x 4 inside and flush to the back of the studs at a distance below the upper 1 x 4 that is equal to the length of the MANABLOC (step 3a) when measured from the top of the upper 1 x 4 to the bottom of the lower 1 x 4. See FRONT VIEW illustration. t Step X ahm between top andbottom of 1 x 0 is equal to b gth of MANABLOC 4. CENTER THE MANABLOC IN THE STUD CAVITY: Attach the MANABLOC to the 1 x 4s with four 1/2" - 3/4" drywall screws (DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN). 5. Continue to section 15.1 step 5 to finish installation. 15.3 Mounting the MANABLOC Without Studs, Surface Mount 1. A suitable base for the MANABLOC can be constructed from a section of 1/2" or thicker plywood that is a minimum 22-1/2" wide and slightly longer than the overall length of the MANABLOC. . 2. Securely attach a length of 2 x 4, or other suitable framing material with a thickness of 1-1 /2" and about 3-1/2" wide on the left and right sides of the mounting base running the full-length of the MANABLOC (see illustration below). The 2 x 4s will be used to secure the distribution lines at the correct height as they exit the MANABLOC. (Support clamps not to. exceed 6" spacing from end of ports.) 3. Attach the mounting base to the structure in a suitable location (see Section 14.3). The base should be mounted so the top of the MANABLOC is between 4 feet and 6 feet from the floor but may be at any height provided that the height maintains accessibility to all the ports on .the MANABLOC. 4. The mounting base must be firmly attached to a structure solid enough to support, at a minimum, the weight of the MANABLOC filled with water. The base should be square and level. 5. Center the MANABLOC on the base both vertically and horizontally as shown here. Attach the MANABLOC to the, mounting base with four 1/2" or longer drywall or wood screws through the holes in the plastic brackets on the MANABLOC. (DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN) 6. As the distribution lines are connected to the MANABLOC (see section 16.2), ensure that the tubing exits the unit at a 90-degree angle to the center line of the MANABLOC so as not to induce bending stress on the MANABLOC. 0 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 44 Cat:.r _ f _`! r y� refklg" f''y 51•� i 1 _ t". �..9 v.r 17y Nt�• y,�F.1 J s -i�.� � �. �,r g '`1 fi its ��r ft.-,� �F� Z .�* ,i s� `c r � �` �x. r'x` i ti:*� •, a't y,{ �M f ' 3 k � 1 � ' � � '' � ✓ •;{.; �. f � �•1 .S S�'��', 4 • GAF' p� �' � � 1 y A {- _: �' I �' Z '� � � ? �� l � �. t� .4.<5'.�x s, y, � ':, � i -.� :y � � k.Y; ti _ e � ,� .4 ? r �.:: < � • r �kY � . � +, a i; � "• a *"� t:•. Y, nt ri K vie a IV i gGizsa r�.„s s. �, s A. �i¢;« �- ;r f g i•4 �C t .. i fit_ '�,Y _+, r,j �.r�P 3 �,I �" `f�� yo r ?l, t ,� 4 k �:;� +.. •� ,fin n r aA +r f _'4 r,� P 4 �;+a +3 Sti '�y- eta, 4' ty._ � - ��-� ¢' rt•"i CtS • �.. >-.. 4. �:}... 4F' kR+.A -��` r. .7.'�.s.r1 .r ,e .� r), �. , t � s � •r 7. When attaching the distribution line tubing to the 2 x 4 supports, be sure to use appropriately sized Viega tubing clamps (For example, use stock code 52 000 for 3/8" tubing and stock code 52 020 for 1/2" tubing). Use one clamp per tube to ensure that the tubing is held securely. - Position clamps NO FARTHER: than six (6) inches from the end of the port. DO NOT pull tubing tight. Leave at least 7" of slack per 50' of tubing run. This is to accommodate for any expansion and/or contraction of the tubing caused by ambient air or water temperature changes. k 16.1 Installing MANABLOC Distribution Lines Run distribution lines continuously in the most direct route from the MANABLOC to the fixtures. A distribution line may contain a coupling or other fitting for purposes such as repairing a damaged section of tubing, handling a change of direction that cannot be made within the minimum bend radius guidelines, accommodating a fixture location change that requires a longer line, or to supply a low -demand accessory (i.e., ice maker). However, several pieces of shorter tubing should not be connected with fittings for the purpose of using up leftover lengths of tubing. NOTE: It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure that further construction, finishing and other mechanical system installations do not compromise the MANABLOC plumbing system as installed according to these instructions. Tubing coils are usually placed at the MANABLOC location and tubing is pulled to the fixture through stud cavities, holes drilled overhead in floor joists, etc. Several tubes may be pulled at one time. Viega's color -coded ViegaPEX tubing helps prevent cross -connections. 2. Do not pull tubing tightly. Some slack (7" per 50') is necessary to accommodate expansion and contraction. Leave enough excess tubing at the beginning and end of runs to make connections without putting strain on the tubing. 3. Exercise care when pulling PEX tubing to prevent cutting or abrading. Take care to prevent kinking of the coiled tubing. If kinking or cutting occurs, cut out the damaged section and install a coupling. 4. For the best results, connect the distribution lines to fixtures and the MANABLOC immediately upon installation. Label the end - use fixture on the MANABLOC cover plate next to the port. Self-adhesive labels are supplied with the MANABLOC. Mark tubes pulled as a bundle or those not connected immediately at both ends with a permanent marker to designate the fixture supplied. 5. Since plumbing fixtures are generally located in groups, and there may be several ViegaPEX distribution lines running to approximately the same location, it is easiest to run these distribution lines bundled together Hot and cold lines may be run in the same bundle. For a neat appearance, tie bundles with nylon ties (Stock Code 43714 or 43701 or plastic strapping at regular intervals. NOTE: Bundles shall be sufficiently tied for tubing support but shall NOT restrict tubing expansion and contraction caused by temperature variations. CAUTION: DO NOT USE DUCT TAPE FOR BUNDLING. Duct tape will not permit tubing movement. 6. Bundles can be supported with hangers designed for larger tubing sizes. 7. The 43714 or 43701 can be used to support PEX lines directly from wooden framing members. Any plastic cable ties capable of supporting the weight of the tube or bundle when filled with water can be used. 8. Holes drilled through studs, joists, plates, headers, etc. must be large enough to accommodate tubing bundles without binding to allow free movement. Several smaller holes (accommodating a few lines each) may be preferable to drilling a bundle -size hole. In no case should the hole size exceed building code guidelines, as this could weaken the structural support members. For more detailed instructions, refer to section 10 of this guide. 16.2 Connecting Distribution Lines to the MANABLOC PEX Press, PEX Crimp and Compression connection models are available and included with each MANABLOC model. Supply connections are not included and must be ordered separately. If there are unused ports Viega recommends to cap them, to protect from the home owner opening the wrong valve. Use Stock Code 36203 (1/2" ports) or 36202 (3/8" ports). ® UNDER CIRCUMSTANCES shall any form of thread sealant (Teflon® paste, pipe dope) be used on distribution line connections. The carriers present in these compounds can crack the plastic port connections, resulting in leaks and water damage. Viega IM-PF 0511 46 520709 `d..�; ,.�• -s ,.. y 4 t,. n �' , ' • ,F LA 'if - s rr. R>> ♦ S k r•'�'r`'., f. � t' � ,.. t ` f s s,. . r c i t t' eS ,...!'k . �. z_ r � - L 1 r .� i ♦r � � • ega � �, s i o"z L u „«iLt - � � °� .r '}t � pt �� s; v s may}; I � a •.f i �_.l�`�jf: f ,r 16.2.1 Compression Connections (3/8" & 1/2" ports) THE WATER SUPPLY TO THE MANABLOC AND THE PORT VALVES SHALL BE TURNED OFF BEFORE ATTEMPTING INSTALLATION OF PEX COMPRESSION CONNECTIONS. NOT FOR USE WITH • FOSTAPEX NOTE: The red MANABLOC valves designate hot ports, the blue valves designate cold ports. Make sure the distribution lines are connected to the correct ports (hot or cold). The use of color -coded ViegaPEX tubing reduces the possibility of cross connections. 1. For each distribution line, slide the Lock -In compression nut (A), Lock -In insert (B) and the plastic ferrule (C) onto the tubing in that order. See illustration below. 1 IIIIII', � ■IF;��s�r, The long taper of a 3/8" ferrule (C) must be TOWARD THE END OF THE TUBE; a 1/2" ferrule is symmetrical and may be installed facing either direction. Insert the stainless steel stiffener (D) COMPLETELY into the end of the tubing. AWARNING: DO NOT attempt to install the Lock -In insert backwards as it may break. ALWAYS insert the long portion of the insert sleeve over the tube first. DO NOT attempt to use or reuse inserts that are defective, cracked, broken or otherwise damaged, as connection failure will result. 2. Push the tubing into the port socket (E) until it bottoms out. Holding the tube so that it does not back out of the port socket, slide the white Lock -In insert and female snugly against the chamfer inside the port socket. While holding the tube against the bottom of the socket, thread the Lock -In compression nut onto the port and tighten hand -tight. 3. While holding the tube securely to prevent turning, finish tightening the nut with the MANABLOC Wrench (Stock Code 50631) until the white Lock -In insert appears between the lugs and becomes flush with the ends of the lugs, plus'1/4 to 1/2 turn. Complete the connection as soon as each distribution line is connected to the MANABLOC. Each valve should be turned counter clockwise a quarter turn to the open position after completing each connection, as shown above. WARNING: DO NOT use 1 slip -joint pliers to tighten the Lock -In nuts. Use the 50631 MANABLOC Wrench to tighten the compression connections. 4. After all connections are complete, recheck that all of the Lock -In inserts are visible between the lugs and are flush or protruding slightly beyond the lugs. 5. As the distribution lines are connected to the MANABLOC, they should immediately be labeled on the cover plate as to which fixture that line supplies. Fixture labels are included with each MANABLOC. Affix the appropriate label to the cover plate next to the port. 47 A1COMPRESSION CONNECTION CAUTION This plumbing system relies upon the proper tightening of distribution line compression connections. Failure to properly complete ALL connections may result in system failure. Incomplete or improper connections can hold pressure during a system test but may fail at a later date, resulting in water damage. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN � compression fittings. Overtightening of the Lock -In compression nuts may cause damage to the tubing, nut, valve or fitting body. DO NOT tighten Lock -In nuts beyond the recommendation of these instructions (Step 3). 16.2.2 PEX Press Connections (1 /2" ports) THE WATER SUPPLY TO THE MANABLOC AND THE PORT VALVES SHALL BE TURNED OFF BEFORE ATTEMPTING INSTALLATION OF PEX PRESS ADAPTERS. CAUTION Use only sealing elements supplied with the adapters. 1. Ensure sealing element (A) is in place and the tool locator ring (B) is present in its factory installed position. 2. Square off tubing to proper length and insert the fitting fully into the end of the tubing as shown. lel i" ICI _JIM, Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 3. Placing the PEX Press tool jaw over the attached press sleeve resting it against the tool locator ring, check for full tubing insertion at the view holes then press the sleeve with an appropriately sized press jaw. DO NOT PRESS TWICE. 4.'Remove tool locator ring (B) and slide swivel nut (C) over tubing as shown. i 1 ,�lul�llllll�� 5. Ensure sealing element (A) is in place and clean of any dirt or debris, wet sealing element with tap water. Insert the fitting into the desired port until the fitting flange sets flush with the end of the port. A i Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 A Thread the swivel nut (C) onto the MANABLOC port. Hand tighten . only. Open the port valve(s) before turning on the main water supply. 16.2.3 PEX Crimp 'Connection (1 /2" ports) THE WATER SUPPLY TO THE MANABLOC AND THE PORT VALVES SHALL BE TURNED OFF BEFORE ATTEMPTING INSTALLATION OF PEX CRIMP. ADAPTERS. QCAUTION: Use only • sealing elements supplied with the adapters. . NOT FOR USE WITH • FOSTAPEX 1. Slide the supplied swivel nut (D) and a crimp ring (C) 43600 fora/8" tubing 43620 for 1/2" onto the tubing (threads of the nut toward the end of the tubing). r Insert the barbed end of the fitting (B) fully into the end of the tubing, as shown. 2. Ensure sealing element (A) is in place; then insert the fitting into the desired port until the fitting flange sets flush with the end of the port. 3. Slide the crimp ring (C) within 1/8" to 1/4" from the end of tube. Crimp the ring with an appropriately sized full -circle crimp tool. 1/8" to 1/4" from the end of tube . DE=n� See section 7 of this guide for crimping instructions. DO NOT CRIMP TWICE. 4. Slide the swivel nut (D) over the crimped ring (C) and thread the nut onto the MANABLOC port. Hand tighten only! of 5. Each valve should be turned clockwise a quarter turn to the open position before tubing on the main water supply. - . 48 16.3 Connecting Distribution Lines to Fixtures There are a variety of male and female adapters, sweat adapters, turn out supports and stub out adapters to assist in terminating at the fixture. Refer to section 12.6 though 12.9 of this guide or the Viega product catalog. 16.4 Water Supply Connections The main water supply shall be turned off before making water supply connections. The MANABLOC water supply connection uses a special 1" swivel MANABLOC transition fitting that seals with a sealing element. MANABLOC Supply Adapter R" Body Svivel Nut SealOng Ehe t (PEX Press shown) This connection is used on the cold water supply and the hot water supply/return lines. This connection to the MANABLOC does not require any form of thread sealant and none shall be used. ®DO NOT USE ANY FORM OF THREAD SEALANT TO MAKE THIS CONNECTION NOTE: Water Service connections to adapt to most types of plumbing supply materials are available. Consult the Viega Product Catalog for a complete listing of available connections. Connect water service adapters to water supply piping before attaching the swivel fitting to the MANABLOC (instructions included with adapters.) Excessive force from threaded fittings, or solvents from solvent welding (PVC or CPVC) will cause damage to the MANABLOC. Drill all holes in wood members for water supply/return tubing BEFORE mounting the MANABLOC. 2. When using male or female pipe thread transition fittings, to connect to supply tubing, use only Teflon® TAPE to seal pipe threads. DO NOT use pipe dopes, thread sealers, Teflon® pastes, etc. 3. If copper sweat fittings are used anywhere in the MANABLOC water supply line or water heater supply/return lines, these fittings must be soldered, cooled and flushed of any flux residue before these lines are connected to the MANABLOC. _ Soldering creates a tremendous amount of heat, which could melt the MANABLOC, and solder flux contains strong acids and may also contain petroleum products. These compounds can attack the plastic materials from which the MANABLOC is made and cause crazing, cracking and failure of the MANABLOC, resulting in leaks and water damage. 4. Ensure that the hot/cold supply lines are connected to the correct supply inlet/outlet on the MANABLOC. Red valves designate hot ports; blue valves designate cold ports. " 5. Supply lines shall enter and/or exit the MANABLOC in a straight line. If bending of the supply lines is required, the tubing must be anchored to a framing member to isolate the bend stress from the MANABLOC or use a directional fitting. 6. After the supply tubing has been connected to the transition fitting, remove the plastic protective cap• from the MANABLOC inlet/outlet part and thread the swivel nut onto the threaded male adapter hand tight only. . DO NOT CROSS -THREAD. 71 vlega Viega Part No.50346 is available to connect 3/4" PEX, copper and CPVC lines to the MANABLOC. IMPORTANT WARNING: FLUX. PVC AND CPVC SOLVENTS WILL CRACK THE MANABLOC 140mta1s Im Wed wtgl fif rig. TO MANABLOC 50346 — COPPER PEX CPVC Swivel fittings must be ALIGNED CORRECTLY • before being attached to the MANABLOC. The piping material must not be allowed to put stress on the MANABLOC, as lealdng and damage may result r,o, ram, HAND TIGHTEN ONLY ji.r,r,Qji. — Damage f May Result if • Overtightened HAND TIGHTEN ONLY DO NOT ELECTRICALLY GROUND TO THIS • SYSTEM. 49 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 16.5 Filling and Testing the MANABLOC All PureFlow systems must be' pressure tested in accordance with local code or the system working pressure after installation. Connections may be pressure tested immediately after completion. Refer to section 17.1: Pressure Testing PureFlow Systems for specific testing requirements. 16.6 Draining the MANABLOC System If the MANABLOC system has been filled with water and there exists the possibility that the ambient temperature will drop close to or below 320 F (00 C), then the MANABLOC unit MUST be drained to prevent irreparable damage. The process of draining'involves loosening and removal of 1 or more supply line connections and 2 distribution lines from the MANABLOC. NOTE: Depending on the installation, some supply connections may be capped. If that is the case, remove the cap(s) as instructed below. Turn off all water supply(s) feeding the MANABLOC. Open both sides of all fixtures served by the manifold and leave the fixtures open during draining. For each port of the MANABLOC where there is a distribution line connected, make sure the port valve is in the open position. 2. Loosen and remove the bottom supply connection(s) (or cap(s)) and the lowest pair of hot and cold distribution lines. 3. As the connections are removed, most of the water contained in the MANABLOC main bores and some of the water in the distribution lines should purge from the system. 4. Allow to drain until no water purges. 5. Reattach the supply line(s) or cap(s) and the distribution lines. Tighten the supply connections according to the instructions in section 16.4. When reconnecting the distribution lines, DO NOT overtighten the connections. These only need to be hand -tight! NOTE: The procedure described above will leave a small amount of water in the MANABLOC unit and, depending on the installation, may leave some or most of the water in the distribution lines. This remaining water should. not cause damage to the manifold unit or to the PEX 'distribution lines in the event of a freeze. However, for complete assurance that freeze damage will not occur, perform the following additional steps. 16.7 To Completely Drain the System: 1. Loosen and remove all of the supply line connections (or caps) and all of the distribution lines from the MANABLOC. 2. Remove the 4 attachment screws and withdraw the MANABLOC unit from its mounting. Note: Grasp the unit firmly before removing the last attachment screw to prevent the unit from falling and being damaged. 3. Completely drain the MANABLOC unit by inverting the unit several times until there is no water coming from any of the supply connections or ports. 4. To purge the PEX distribution ' lines, first make sure that both sides of all of the fixtures are in the open position. Using low pressure air from a tank or compressor, force the water from the lines by connecting the air pressure source to each line one at a time and blow air through the lines until no water flows from the fixtures. 5. Reattach the MANABLOC and reconnect the supply and distribution line connections. - NOTE: When reconnecting the distribution lines, DO NOT overtighten the connections. Compression connections should require only about 1/8 turn past hand tight when reinstalling connections that were previously tightened to the specifications outlined in this installation guide. PEX Press and PEX Crimp connections only require to be hand tightened. Vega IM-PF 0511 520709 50 � • j J r L .+ R � tier � � ❑] �� J � f s. f i r �,. �� -si '�.�.`.� �� r � i t e. � S rsr,r v.� � L N G e' �'t�r.E`w_. •`� �t r•'r . v�L � ' 'b.",71 �e� ii -,,ram .. %+� a a 2• ! X.. �r 'r n•. e j - r+2 s. X 1 'rA H r �R a �� t a v IT �. _ r y .: r �,,. "r"�t'y i � �� r � a. • r � v t 'x5 9 Y - .r ; .�i+ "t+' r+ Y a't '• r fr-. „i.. n i ., t..tl v i e g a r �'r � s, x. n ��• � 6 <� k t'. • � + + _ r xi n i t- a •t, yr S "k A,.r e r i - � �.'gi 7 r.•. � � ft� � • ' v x.: r .rL [ r :5�� y'' x� s � +"t" �i _ 17.1 General , Upon completion of the installation the system shall be filled and pressure tested. When hydrostatic testing, use only POTABLE water. NOTE: During the initial pressure test period, the system pressure indicated on the gauge may decrease due to the initial deformation of the pipe, followed by a slow expansion. The pressure drop is dependent on ambient temperature, system capacity and pressure but shall not be more than 8 psi in an hour. When pressure testing the MANABLOC, open all connected port valves before filling the system with water or air and pressurizing. If the MANABLOC is filled and pressurized before the port valves have been opened, read valve notice below. Testing PEX Systems (Branch and Main / MANABLOC) Test Method Min/Max Duration (Min) Max Pressure (psi) Min Pressure (psi) Allowable Variance (psi) Water 15 min/1 hr 100 • 40 N/A Air 15 min/1 hr . 100 40 8* NOTICE - VALVE INFORMATIONI ' Opening a port valve to an empty or unpressurized distribution line may cause valve damage. • To prevent potential valve damage or failure, open the port valves before filling and pressurizing the lines. The force of water rushing to fill an empty line can cause the valve's seal to "clip off," resulting in incomplete sealing or complete valve failure. CARE must be exercised when opening a port valve to an empty or unpressurized line. The fixture to which the line is connected should be in the OFF position and the valve must be opened slowly until water starts to flow into the line. DO NOT CONTINUE to open the valve until the line is full and pressurized. Open the valve fully only after the line is up to system pressure. The fixture can then be opened to purge the line of air. Valve stems are replaceable. Order Stock Code 51602. ' * If the pressure in the system declines more than eight psi during the 15-minute to one -hour period, repressurize the system to the original test pressure and retest. If the system pressure declines more than 8 psi again during the test period, test the distribution line test caps or any other fittings in the system with the approved leak detect solution. NOTE: Some plumbing fixtures may not withstand test pressures greater than 80 psi. Consult fixture manufacturer's instructions for pressure limitations or plug all distribution lines at the fixture end. The system shall, at a minimum, withstand the test pressure, without leaking, for a period of 15 minutes. WATER TESTING SHALL BE AVOIDED DURING FREEZING CONDITIONS. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL THE SYSTEM BE TESTED AT TEMPERATURES LOWER THAN 10°F (-12°C). THE WATER HEATER SHALL BE ISOLATED AND NOT.INCLUDED IN THE SYSTEM AIR TEST. QWARNING! PRESSURES USED IN TESTING CAN BLOW UNMADE OR INCOMPLETE CONNECTIONS APART WITH TREMENDOUS FORCE! This force is many times greater when air is used as a test medium. To reduce the risk of personal injury, ensure that all connections are completed before testing. Use only the pressure and time required to determine that the system is leak free. 51 Mega IM-PF 0511 520709 17.2 Leak Detection Leak detection: Use only a mixture of Original Palmolive GreenTm dishwashing soap (#46100-46200) or Palmolive UftraTM (#356140 or 46128) mixed with potable water at a ratio of 2 ounces of soap to one gallon of water (mix Ultra at a ratio of 1.5 ounces per gallon) NOTE: If such a solution is used, the antifreeze solution must be sufficiently concentrated to withstand the lowest temperature encountered while the testing fluid is in the system. Antifreeze solutions should be purged and the system flushed with potable water prior. to consumer use. NOTE: If the solution does not show a leak on any of the caps or fittings, r isolate the MANABLOC by turning the valves to the "OFF" position, repressurize if needed, and apply the same solution to the MANABLOC manifold components: When testing a MANABLOC and no leaks are found on any of the caps, or fittings, isolate the MANABLOC by turning the valves to the "OFF" position, repressurized if needed, and apply the same solution to the MANABLOC manifold components. Any connections found to be in question must be replaced or remade and the pressure test repeated. Mega IM-PF 0511 52 520709 r r M 7,� P•,.- • i ;r �, < � t � � til � -. t t t y-t _-..� �,. ,s . x+i: r ,� I's�= +�`�Y f�a t� '>ff t .ia 2.i. � � �y� r{.s ♦ `4. .f3� b+ x:� : N { r �,L ;�x fi , y; �y �fe i , t.- .. i} � k S ,. �t �• eii� � - z . k v �:k .. �i 6 � r „rya*" t. � � r.-• � � ! f � �.. �r .M, f ,�. -,- x� t', �� e <y � ii # �, U 'Y+�,�.i „� �.. � 1�.< L� L '" .. }+' _'� t .�, �t • ��7 t��' � `� r� � i�•� t ':i ,-0,� 1 � ?r��T � ��F � �' ,b KL'� 4�� c4 ' r }t r �t:. t 4 '.R� }.�vie '� .a ;�, . �� 2h .k 4 �..€';,'• 1.; i. w'}b sir:; � t. 2 .e t .:aiy :air �,; ..: r 18.1 General , Local codes may require system disinfection. When no other method is available, follow the time limitations and exposure levels show below. 1. Use a chlorine solution and one of the exposure durations listed below: Concentration Period Authority 4 200 PPM 3 hours IPC/UPC® 50 PPM 24 hours IPC/UPC®- 2. Mix the disinfection solution thoroughly before adding it to the system. • 3. The chlorine solution must reach all parts of the system. Open all fixtures (both sides) and flow water until a chlorine smell is present. As an alternative, chlorine test tablets can be used to detect chlorine at each fixture. k 4. The chlorine source for the solution can be, but is not limited to, the following: Chlorine Source •% Active Chlorine. • Form Amount Per 100 Gallon Water for a 200 PPM solution Laundry bleach 5.25 Liquid 3 pints (48 oz.) 5. After the solution has been in the system for the time required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction or the exposure durations listed in step 1 above, the system shall be flushed completely with potable water. 6. The system must be purged or drained of all water or protected from freezing. FAILURE TO FLUSH THE SYSTEM NOTICE! To prevent reduced service life of system components, disinfection solutions shall not be allowed to stand in the system longer than 24 hours. Thoroughly flush the system with potable water after disinfection.. v � • '� r f ! n "1 �4 - a iP J l Y , �' I � t-�. � t �-J� _ • i ` f ; •.d � _ Y. t.�1 i% �y �l .:t r :• a is � 1 l i i �. Y . ' t •' � (.. _ +Y r i_� Lr c s , r �,. t.. tl ,� ��.. �j t ; � V ?•� +, L' . x 3 �. t d* "• �� G L r s,:;. � i ,•x i *: t1 � � C + 2 t 1.4 _ .! } !p F. n , _ x� . D. .r Y a• a .. z.fF } t ,n, J 1 � A i � � • � + � 4�f Y A V t � i �x �• i. % : � e. '� f i q Jam.; '4Yf ��s rIt l _ t _ � _ .! IL t-, 1 t � L _ Cx � t•, rr .r, .-� lC:K -" �r� 19.1 Codes PureFlow is accepted by the following model codes for use in potable hot and cold water distribution systems. UPC - Uniform Plumbing Code IPC - Intemational Plumbing Code IRC - International Residential Code NSPC - National Standard Plumbing Code Most state written codes Check with your local Viega representative for code compliance in your area. 19.2 Standards ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM F876/F2023: Standard Specification for Cross -linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing - This standard contains finite dimensional requirements for SDR9 PEX tubing in addition to burst, sustained pressure, chlorine resistance and other relevant performance tests at different water temperatures. ASTM F877: Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PE)) Plastic Hot- and Cold -Water Distribution Systems - This standard contains performance requirements for SDR9 PIX tubing and fitting systems. The standard contains finite dimensional requirements for tubing, in addition to burst, sustained pressure and other relevant performance tests at different water temperatures. . F1807 - This standard contains finite dimensional requirements for metallic t insert fittings for SDR9 PIX tubing and other relevant performance tests at different water temperature. F2159 - This standard contains finite dimensional requirements for plastic insert fittings for SDR9 PEX tubing and other relevant performance tests at different water temperatures. NSF Intemational ANSI/NSF 14: Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials - This standard establishes minimum physical and performance requirements for plastic piping components and related materials. These criteria were established for the protection of public health and the environment. ANSVNSF 61: Drinking Water System Components Health Effects - This standard establishes minimum health effects requirements for the chemical contaminants and impurities that are indirectly imparted to drinking water from products, components and materials used in drinking water systems. This standard does not establish performance or taste and odor requirements for drinking water system products components or materials. ISO - Intemational Standards Organization ISO 90M - This standard is intended to establish, document and maintain a system for ensuring production output quality. ISO 9001 certification is a tangible expression of a firm's commitment to quality that is intemationally understood and accepted. All PureFlow PEX press fittings are manufactured in ISO 9001 certified facilities. ' Check with Your 16A Viega- representative for further information or copies of above mentioned lisfings> and certifications. 19.3 Listings and Certifications PPI - Plastic Pipe Institute TR 4 Listed Materials Listing of Hydrostatic Design Bases (HDB) Strength Design Bases (SDB), Pressure Design Bases (PDB) and Minimum Required Strength (MRS) Ratings for Thermoplastic Piping Materials or Pipe. Pressurelremperature Ratings: •160 psi at 73.4°F 9100 psi at 180OF •80 psi at 200OF NSF Intemational NSF-pw certification mark - Product meets all applicable performance standards for pressure -rated potable water applications required in ANSVNSF Standard 14 and complies with ANSVNSF Standard 61 for health effects. cNSF®us pw-G - product meets Zero Lead listing meeting California AB 1953 and Vermont Act 193. CSA - Product meets requirements of Canadian CSA B137.5 listing. NSF U.P. Code - Product meets requirements of the Uniform Plumbing Code PEX 5006 - Tested and listed to the NSF- pw (CL5) chlorine resistance rating for an end use condition of 100% @ 140°F per ASTM F876, which is the highest chlorine resistance rating available through ASTM. When the product is marked with the PEX 5006 (CL5) designation it affirms the product is approved for use in continuous domestic hot water circulation systems with up to 140°F water temperatures. IAPMO R&T - Intemational Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials Research and Testing Certificate of Listing - Product meets the requirements of the Uniform Plumbing CodeTM. ICC - ES - Intemational Code Council - Evaluation Services [CC ES-PMGTM - Product complies with Intemational Plumbing Code. Viega IM-PF 0511 54 520709 j t v '��a•.ob��F--,�i"'O"'; •. ��. ,1 }�a .I.i; -tiy pP. a� i' •Ni-� 3 �....a w j. { �.? 't t k ,..E fi c �•-� .� ` x3j� k t Yi `+1. t{J W 'F _, � .F � _ ,�? '.'�jf.. ?`K .w° 1-,T - 4.� :3 � •3M' ii rY.. :� � ��k , � M • S n viega VIEGA LIMITED WARRANTY PUREFLOW® POTABLE WATER PLUMBING SYSTEMS Subject to the conditions and limitations in this Limited Warranty, VIEGA LLC (Viega) warrants to owners of real property in the United States that the components in its PureFlow Plumbing Systems (as described below) when properly installed by licensed plumbers in potable water systems, under normal conditions of use, shall be free from failure caused by manufacturing defects for a period of ten (10) years from date of installation. This warranty also applies to those supplying products covered by this warranty and installed on the property. PureFlow Plumbing Systems and components covered by this ten-year warranty are: ViegaPEXTm and ViegaPEXTM ULTRA cross -linked polyethylene (PEX) tubing, FostaPEX®, MANABLOCO, MiniblocTM or manifolds sold by Viega and using approved connections sold by Viega installed together in manifold plumbing systems. ViegaPEX and ViegaPEX ULTRA cross -linked polyethylene (PEX) tubing or FostaPEX installed with PEX press fittings and PEX press sleeves sold by Viega. ViegaPEX and ViegaPEX ULTRA cross -linked polyethylene (PEX) tubing and crimp insert fittings installed with copper crimp rings and meeting the specifications of ASTM F1807 and certified/listed for conformance with ANSVNSF Standards No. 14/61 and Viega PolyAlloyTM fittings. Power tools and jaws used with PEX Press fittings are warranted by the manufacturer and Viega extends no separate warranty on those tools or jaws. Viega warrants that PEX Press hand tools sold by Viega, under normal conditions of use, shall be free from failure caused by manufacturing defects for a period of two (2) years from date of sale. Viega warrants that PEX Crimp hand tools sold by Viega, under normal conditions of use, shall be free from failure caused by manufacturing defects for a period of twelve (12) months from date of sale. Viega warrants that properly installed stop valves, PEX lav and closet risers and riser accessories manufactured and/or sold by Viega shall be free from failure caused by manufacturing defects for a period of two (2) years from date of installation. Under this limited warranty, you only have a right to reimbursement if the failure or leak resulted from a manufacturing defect in the products covered by this warranty and the failure or leak occurred during the warranty period. You do not have a remedy or right of reimbursement under this warranty and the warranty does not apply if the failure or,resulting damage is caused by (1) components in the plumbing system other than those manufactured or sold by Viega; (2) not designing, installing, inspecting or testing the system in accordance with Viega's installation instructions at the time of the installation, applicable code requirements and good plumbing practices; (3) improper handling and protection of the product prior to and during installation, inadequate freeze protection, exposure to water pressures or temperatures in excess of the limitations on the tubing or application of unauthorized solvents or chemicals; (4) acts of nature such as earthquakes, fire, flood or lightening. In addition, the warranty does not apply if distribution lines and their connections to the MANABLOC system are not ViegaPEX or FostaPEX tubing or connections sold by Viega. In the event of a leak or other failure in the system, it is the responsibility of the property owner to obtain and pay for repairs. Only if the warranty applies will Viega be responsible for reimbursement under this warranty. The part or parts which you claim failed should be kept and Viega contacted at the address below' or by telephoning 800-976-9819 within thirty (30) days after the leak or other failure and identifying yourself as having a warranty claim. You should be prepared to ship, at your expense, the product which you claim failed due to a manufacturing defect, document the date of installation, and the amount of any claimed bills for which you claim reimbursement. Within a reasonable time after receiving the product, Viega will investigate the reasons for the failure, which includes the right to inspect the product at Viega and reasonable access to the site of damage in order to determine whether the warranty applies. Viega will notify you in writing of the results of this review. In the event that Viega determines that the failure or leak and any resulting damages were the result of a manufacturing defect in the products and occurred during the time periods covered by this warranty, Viega will reimburse the property owner for reasonable repair or replacement charges to include drywall, flooring and painting costs as well as damages to personal property resulting from the failure or leak. VIEGA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL ECONOMIC LOSS DAMAGES UNDER ANY LEGAL THEORY AND WHETHER ASSERTED BY DIRECT ACTION, FOR CONTRIBUTION OR INDEMNITY OR OTHERWISE. THE ABOVE LIMITED WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IF FOUND APPLICABLE, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE TIME LIMITS SET OUT IN THIS WRITTEN WARRANTY. Other than this limited.warranty, Viega does not authorize any person or firm to create for it any other obligation or liability in connection with its products. This written warranty applies for the full term of the applicable warranty regardless of any change of ownership in the property. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages or limitations on the duration of implied warranties in certain types of transactions, so the above exclusion or limitations may not apply to you. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights and you also may have other rights which vary from state to state. This warranty shall be interpreted and applied under the law of the state in which the product is installed. 301 N Main, 9th Floor, Wichita, KS 67202 55 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 + � a q � " e'�s y`.. f 'n 1 �T a. � ` y � '� , z. i::� . 9� �^ ' Syr• x T ��. •r�• h' � -N ° "ti ::� o r: ro A'..t a 1 -;�� 'c<<r " .,�A �;r � 'Y. )n� fi,1" y �t.rit�' � , '1.�:��,;: tf': r Cy.�_,�3 ��2.:'; r:_..s � '-.:�rY�it -� � "'a -�' ProfAe�ssional products �r� r �� a* Yfy x� y �, ,I S= 3 c& - -,�' +. ,�agrxy 4 - ,fy` i h�F��} xa ,1r �x` % 3 �+ service and tnin f�fo p rai L,�XSt A'4.r14T=itC x FQ K « ' A�:■ n 5..::'� t'i.r .y r�f+ :professional��contractors Rely on Viega for the most complete line of high-tech/ high -quality plumbing, heating and snow melting systems available today... plus the most comprehensive customer field support in the industry. Dedicated to education, Viega has been recognized by industry professionals as offering some of the most innovative, informative and interactive training courses. We have a comprehensive list of sessions in a variety of forms from half -day workshops to rigorous three-day programs. Call to receive our complete course catalog. Viega 301 N. Main, 9th Floor, Wichita, KS 67202 Phone: 1-800-976-9819 Fax: 1-800-976-9817 www.viega.com Viega IM-PF 0411 520709 ProPress® System Flameless copper joining technology. ProPressG'T- System Flameless copper fuel gas joining technology. PureFlow® Systems Flexible PDC tubing plumbing technology. ProRadiant- Systems Comfortable, efficient heating technology. S-no-Ice® System Snow and ice melting technology. 0 , t'' ea aloi Thefirst name in fireplaces Models: CD4236IR-C CD48421R-C CD42361LR-C By NOTICE DO NOT DISCARD THIS MANUAL • Important operating • Read, understand and follow • Leave this manual with and maintenance these instructions for safe party responsible for use instructions included. installation and operation. and operation. A WARNING: If the information in these instructions is not followed exactly, a fire or explosion may result causing property damage, personal injury, or death. • DO NOT store or use gasoline or other flam- mable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. • What to do if you smell gas - DO NOT try to light any appliance. - DO NOT touch any electrical switch. DO NOT use any phone in your building. - Immediately call your gas supplier from a neighbor's phone. Follow the gas suppli- er's instructions. - If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the fire department. • Installation and service must be performed by a qualified installer, service agency, or the gas supplier. This appliance may be installed as an OEM installation in manufactured home (USA only) or mobile home and must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the manufactured home construction and safety standard, Title 24 CFR, Part 3280 or Standard for Installation in Mobile Homes, CAN/CSA Z240MH, in Canada. This appliance is only for use with the type(s) of gas indicated on the rating plate. A WARNING HOT SURFACES! Glass and other surfaces are hot during operation AND cool down. Hot glass will cause burns. • DO NOT touch glass until it is cooled • NEVER allow children to touch glass • Keep children away • CAREFULLY SUPERVISE children in same room as fireplace. • Alert children and adults to hazards of high temperatures. High temperatures may ignite clothing or other flammable materials. • Keep clothing, furniture, draperies and other flammable materials. away. This appliance has been supplied with an integral barrier to prevent direct contact with the fixed glass panel. DO NOT operate the appliance with the barrier removed. Contact your dealer or Hearth & Home Technologies if the barrier is not present or help is needed to properly install one. In the Commonwealth of Massachusetts installation must be performed by a licensed plumber or gas fitter. See Table of Contents for location of additional Commonwealth of Massachusetts requirements. Installation and service of this appliance should be performed by qualified personnel. Hearth & Home Technologies suggests NFI certified or factory trained professionals, or technicians supervised by an NFI certified professional. Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 . Read this manual before installing or operating this appliance. Please retain this owner's manual for future reference. A. Congratulations Congratulations on selecting a Heatilator gas fireplace, an elegant and clean alternative to wood burning fireplaces. The Heatilator gas fireplace you have selected is designed to provide the utmost in safety, reliability, and efficiency. As the owner of a new fireplace, you'll want to read and carefully follow all of the instructions contained in this owner's manual. Pay special attention to all cautions and warnings. Homeowner Reference Information This owner's manual should be retained for future reference. We suggest that you keep it with your other important documents and product manuals. The information contained in this owner's manual, unless noted otherwise, applies to all models and gas control systems. Your new Heatilator gas fireplace will give you years of durable use and trouble -free enjoyment. Welcome to the Heatilator family of fireplace products! We recommend that you record the following pertinent information about your fireplace. Model Name: Date purchased/installed: Serial Number: Location on fireplace: 1 Dealership purchased from: Dealer Phone: Notes: Listing Label Information/Location - The model information regarding your specific fireplace can be found on the rating plate usually located in the control area of the fireplace. GAS -FIRED • al Neatlbtor, a brand of t 8 Home Technoloeba, Inc. Vier� Name inp� 7St J"-Y�m 7671 215th Street Wear, Lkeevllb, MN 53044 C us Type Of Gas yP O ` Not for use With solid fuel. OV dolt LISTED (Ne pas entre utilise avec un combusBble solids). - Type. o1 Gas (Some De Gaz): This appliance must he Installed In accordance with local codes, deny; if not, follow ANSI Z223.1 Inthe USAorCAWCGA B1491nstallabon codes. (/nstallerl'eppaMlselonlescodeso mosments NATURAL GAS locau ou, on /'absence do tols roVements, .salon les codes Olnstallafbn CAWCGA-8149.) ANSI Z21XX-XXXX • CSA 2.XX-MXX • UL307B Gas and Electric Information Minimum Permissible Gas Supply for Purposes of Input Adjustment. Approved Minimum (De Gaz) Acceptable 0.0 in w.c. (Po. Col. d'eau) Maximum Pressure (Pression) 0.0 In w.c. (Po. Col. d'eau) Maximum Manifold Pressure (Pression) 0.0 in w.c. (Po. Col. d'eau) Minimum Manifold Pressure (Pression) 0.0 in w.c. (Po. Col. d'eau) Total Electrical Requirements: OOOVac, OOHz., less than 00 Amperes MADE IN USA INCANADA ALTITUDE: 0-0000 FT Model:0000-OOOOFT. (Models): XXXXX)CXX MAX. INPUTBTUH: 00,000 00,000 MIN. INPUTBTUH: 00.000 00,000 ORIFICESIZE: #X)000( #)00p0( Serial (Sarre): XXXX)VUUC I! Model Number Serial Number 2 Heatilator a CD42361R-C, CD48421R-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 A Safety Alert Key: • DANGERI Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided will result in death or serious injury. • WARNINGI Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided could result in death or serious injury. • CAUTIONI Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. • NOTICE: Used to address practices not related to personal injury. Table of Contents A. Congratulations ................................. 2 B. Limited Lifetime Warranty .......:.................. 5 1 Listing and Code Approvals A. Appliance Certification ............................ 7 B. Tempered Glass Specifications ..................... 7 C. BTU Specifications ............................... 7 D. High Altitude Installations .......................... 7 E. Non -Combustible Materials Specification .............. 7 F. Combustible Materials Specification ................. 7 G. Electrical Codes .................................. 7 H. Requirements for the Commonwealth of Massachusetts.. 8 User Guide 2 Operating Instructions A. Gas Fireplace Safety ............................. 9 B. Your Fireplace .................................. 9 C. Fan Kit (optional) ............................... 10 D. Clear Space ....................................10 E. Decorative Doors and Fronts ...................... 10 F. Fixed Glass Assembly ........................... 10 G. Remote Controls, Wall Controls and Wall Switches..... 10 H. IPI Battery Tray/Battery Installation ................. 10 I. Control Module Operation ........................ 11 J. Before Lighting Fireplace ........:................ 11 K. Lighting Instructions (IPI) ......................... 12 L. After Fireplace is Lit ............................. 13 M. Frequently Asked Questions ...................... 13 3 Maintenance and Service A. Maintenance Tasks -Homeowner ................... 14 4 B. Maintenance Tasks -Qualified Service Technician ...... 15 C. Logs/Grate and Valve Assembly Removal ............ 16 D. Burner Identification/Verification .................... 18 Installer Guide 4 Getting Started A. Typical Appliance System ......................... 19 B. Design and Installation Considerations .............. 20 C. Tools and Supplies Needed ....................... 20 D. Inspect Appliance and Components ................. 20 6 Framing and Clearances A. Selecting Appliance Location ...................... 21 B. Constructing the Appliance Chase ................ 22 C. Clearances....................................23 D. Mantel and Wall Projections ........................ 23 6 Termination Locations A. Vent Termination Minimum Clearances .............. 24 F 7 Vent Information and Diagrams A. Approved Pipe.................................26 B. Vent Table Key ... ............................26 C. Use of Elbows.................................26 D. Measuring Standards ............................26 E. Vent Diagrams ................................. 27 8 Vent Clearances and Framing A. Pipe Clearances to Combustibles .................. 37 B. Wall Penetration Framing ......................... 37 C. Install the Ceiling Firestop ........................ 38 D. Install Attic Insulation Shield ....................... 39 E. Installing the Optional Heat -Zone® Gas Kit ........... 39 E 9 Appliance Preparation A. Top Vent......................................40 B. Rear Vent.....................................41 C. Installing the Non-combustible Board ................ 42 D. Securing and Leveling the Appliance ................ 42 10 Installing Vent Pipe (DVP and SLP Pipe) A. Assemble Vent Sections (DVP Pipe Only) ............ 43 B. Assemble Vent Sections (SLP Pipe Only) ............ 44 C. Assemble Slip Sections .......................... 44 D. Secure the Vent Sections ......................... 45 E. Disassemble Vent Sections ....................... 45 F. Install Decorative Ceiling Components (SLP only)...... 46 G. Install Metal Roof Flashing ........................ 47 H. Assemble and Install Storm Collar .................. 47 I. Install Vertical Termination Cap ..................... 48 J. Install Decorative Wall Components (SLP only)........ 48 K. Heat Shield Requirements for Horizontal Termination ... 48 L. Install Horizontal Termination Cap (DVP and SLP Pipe) . 49 11 Gas Information A. Fuel Conversion................................50 B. Gas Pressure..................................50 C. Gas Connection . .............................50 D. High Altitude Installations ......................... 50 12 Electrical Information A. Wiring Requirements ............................ 51 B. IntelliFire PlusTm Ignition System Wiring .............. 51 C. Optional Accessories Requirements ................ 51 D. Electrical Service and Repair ...................... 52 E. Junction Box Installation .......................... 52 F. Wall Switch Installation for Fan (Optional) ............ 52 Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 3 13 Finishing A. Mantel and Wall Projections ........................ 53 B. Facing Material ................................. 53 14 Appliance Setup A. Remove Fixed Glass Assembly ..................... 54 B. Remove the Shipping Materials .................... 54 C. Clean the Appliance ............................. 54 D. Accessories...................................54 E. Ember Placement ............................... 54 F. Place the Lava Rock and Vermiculite ................ 54 G. Install the Log Assembly ........................... 55 H. Fixed Glass Assembly ..........................' . 56 I. Install Trim and/or Surround ....................... 56 J. Air Shutter Setting ............ :................. 56 15 Troubleshooting 4 A. IntelliFire PlusTm Ignition System ................... 57 16 Reference Materials A. Appliance Dimension Diagram ................. :.... 59 B. Vent Components Diagrams .......................61 C. Service Parts..................................69 D. Contact Information ............................. 73 + = Contains updated information. 4 Heatilator CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C 2207-900 Rev. J 11/11 B. Limited Lifetime Warranty Hearth & Home Technologies Inc. LIMITED LIFETIME WARRANTY Hearth & Home Technologies Inc., on behalf of its hearth brands ("HHT"), extends the following warranty for HHT gas, wood, pellet, coal and electric hearth appliances that are purchased from an HHT authorized dealer. WARRANTY COVERAGE: HHT warrants to the original owner of the HHT appliance at the site of installation, and to any transferee taking ownership of the appliance at the site of installation within two years following the date of original purchase, that the HHT appliance will be free from defects in materials and workmanship at the time of manufacture. After installation, if covered compo- nents manufactured by HHT are found to be defective in materials or workmanship during the applicable warranty period, HHT will, at its option, repair or replace the covered components. HHT, at its own discretion, may fully discharge all of its obligations under such warranties by replacing the product itself or refunding the verified purchase price of the product itself. The maximum amount recoverable under this warranty is limited to the purchase price of the product. This warranty is subject to conditions, exclusions and limitations as described below. . WARRANTY PERIOD: Warranty coverage begins on the date of original purchase. In the case of new home construction, warranty coverage begins on the date of first occupancy of the dwelling or six months after the sale of the product by an independent, authorized HHT dealer/ distributor, whichever occurs earlier. The warranty shall commence no later than 24 months following the date of product shipment from HHT, regardless of the installation or occupancy date. The warranty period for parts and labor for covered components is produced in the following table. The term "Limited Lifetime" in the table below is defined as: 20 years from the beginning date of warranty coverage for gas appliances, and 10 years from the beginning date of warranty coverage for wood, pellet, and coal appliances. These time periods reflect the minimum expected useful lives of the designated components under normal operating conditions. Warranty Period HHT Manufactured Appliances and Venting Components Covered Parts Labor Gas Wood Pellet EPA Wood Coal Electric Venting 1 Year X X X X X X X All parts and material except as covered by Conditions, Exclusions, and Limitations listed 2years --' - - X X X ." --. _ .._- -_- Igniters, electronic components, and glass X X X X X Factory -installed blowers X _ _.--__ _ _._�_. _:;.� .. �. Molded refractory panels 3 years $ _.. _ _ . _ _:- X iL _ _ _ ;; v _ _ " Firepots and burn~ ots �r _ 5 years 1 year X X " _w� °_- Castings and baffles 7 years 3 years 3' —� X X X w r._ _ = _.___ �_ Manifold tubes, HHT chimne and termination - 10 ears 1 year X - AL " x ' Burners, logs and refractory Limited Lifetime 3 years X X X X X ' ._ __ Firebox and heat exchanger 90 Days X X X X X X X All replacement parts be and warranty period 4021-645C 12-29-10 See conditions, exclusions, and limitations on next page. Page 1 of 2 Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 B. Limited Lifetime Warranty (continued) WARRANTY CONDITIONS: • This warranty only covers HHT appliances that are purchased through an HHT authorized dealer or distributor. A list of HHT authorized dealers is available on the HHT branded websites. • This warranty is only valid while the HHT appliance remains at the site of original installation. • Contact your installing dealer for warranty service. If the installing dealer is unable to provide necessary parts, contact the nearest HHT authorized dealer or supplier. Additional service fees may apply if you are seeking warranty service from a dealer other than the dealer from whom you originally purchased the product. • Check with your dealer in advance for any costs to you when arranging a warranty call. Travel and shipping charges for parts are not covered by this warranty. WARRANTY EXCLUSIONS: This warranty does not cover the following: • Changes in surface finishes as a result of normal use. As a heating appliance, some changes in color of interior and exterior surface finishes may occur. This is not a flaw and is not covered under warranty. • Damage to printed, plated, or enameled surfaces caused by fingerprints, accidents, misuse, scratches, melted items, or other external sources and residues left on the plated surfaces from the use of abrasive cleaners or polishes. • Repair or replacement of parts that are subject to normal wear and tear during the warranty period. These parts include: paint, wood, pellet and coal gaskets, firebricks, grates, flame guides, light bulbs, batteries and the discolor- ation of glass. • Minor expansion, contraction, or movement of certain parts causing noise. These conditions are normal and com- plaints related to this noise are not covered by this warranty. • Damages resulting from: (1) failure to install, operate, or maintain the appliance in accordance with the installation instructions, operating instructions, and listing agent identification label furnished with the appliance; (2) failure to install the appliance in accordance with local building codes; (3) shipping or improper handling; (4) improper opera- tion, abuse, misuse, continued operation with damaged, corroded or failed components, accident, or improperly/ incorrectly performed repairs; (5) environmental conditions, inadequate ventilation, negative pressure, or drafting caused by tightly sealed constructions, insufficient make-up air supply, or handling devices such as exhaust fans or forced air furnaces or other such causes; (6) use of fuels other than those specified in the operating instructions; (7) installation or use of components not supplied with the appliance or any other components not expressly authorized and approved by HHT; (8) modification of the appliance not expressly authorized and approved by HHT in writing; and/or (9) interruptions or fluctuations of electrical power supply to the appliance. • Non-HHT venting components, hearth components or other accessories used in conjunction with the appliance. • Any part of a pre-existing fireplace system in which an insert or a decorative gas appliance is installed. • HHT's obligation under this warranty does not extend to the appliance's capability to heat the desired space. Informa- tion is provided to assist the consumer and the dealer in selecting the proper appliance for the application. Consider- ation must be given to appliance location and configuration, environmental conditions, insulation and air tightness of the structure. This warranty is void if: • The appliance has been over -fired or operated in atmospheres contaminated by chlorine, fluorine, or other damaging chemicals. Over -firing can be identified by, but not limited to, warped plates or tubes, rust colored cast iron, bubbling, cracking and discoloration of steel or enamel finishes. • The appliance is subjected to prolonged periods of dampness or condensation. • There is any damage to the appliance or other components due to water or weather damage which is the result of, but not limited to, improper chimney or venting installation. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY: • The owner's exclusive remedy and HHT's sole obligation under this warranty, under any other warranty, express or implied, or in contract, tort or otherwise, shall be limited to replacement, repair, or refund, as specified above. In no event will HHT be liable for any incidental or consequential damages caused by defects in the appliance. Some states do not allow exclusions or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so these limitations may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific rights; you may also have other rights, which vary from state to state. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROVIDED BY LAW, HHT MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THE WARRANTY SPECIFIED HEREIN. THE DURATION OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY IS LIMITED TO DURATION OF THE EXPRESSED WARRANTY SPECIFIED ABOVE. 4021-645C 12-29-10 Page 2 of 2 5 Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 - 1 Listing and Code Approvals A. Appliance Certification MODELS: CD42361R-C, CD42361LR-C, CD48421R-C, CD4842ILR-C LABORATORY. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) TYPE. Direct Vent Gas Appliance Heater STANDARD: ANSI Z21.88-2009 • CSA 2.33-2009 This product is listed to ANSI standards for "Vented Gas Appliance Heaters" and applicable sections of "Gas Burn- ing Heating Appliances for Manufactured Homes and Recreational Vehicles", and "Gas Fired Appliances for Use at High Altitudes". NOTICE. This installation must conform with local codes. In the absence of local codes you must comply with the National Fuel Gas Code, ANSI Z223.1-latest edition in the U. S.A. and the CAN/CGA B 149 Installation Codes in Canada. NOT INTENDED FOR USE AS A PRIMARY HEAT SOURCE. This appliance is tested and approved as either supplemen- tal room heat or as a decorative appliance. It should not be factored as primary heat in residential heating calculations. B. Tempered Glass Specifications Hearth & Home Technologies appliances manufactured with tempered glass may be installed in hazardous loca- tions such as bathtub enclosures as defined by the Con- sumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC). The tempered glass has been tested and certified to the requirements of ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16 CFR 1202 (Safety Glazing Certification Council SGCC# 1696 and 1597. Architectur- al Testing, Inc. Reports 02-31919.01 and 02-31917.01). This statement is in compliance with CPSC 16 CFR Sec- tion 1201.5 "Certification and labeling requirements" which refers to 15 U.S. Code (USC) 2063 stating"... Such certificate shall accompany the product or shall otherwise be furnished to any distributor or retailer to whom the product is delivered." Some local building codes require the use of tempered glass with permanent marking in such locations. Glass meeting this requirement is available from the factory. Please contact your dealer or distributor to order. C. BTU Specifications Models U.S. (0-2000 R.) or Canada (2000-45oo ff.) Maximum Input BTU/h Minimum Input BTUth OAflce Size us 30,000 16,000 37 CD42361R-C (NG) CANADA 27,000 14,400 38 us 29,000 16,000 52 CD42361LR-C (LP) CANADA 26,100 14,400 53 Vs 35,000 18,000 33 CD48421R-C (NG) CANADA 31,500 16,200 34 us 32,500 17,000 51 CD4842ILR-C (LP) CANADA 1 29,250 15,300 52 D. High Altitude Installations NOTICE: If the heating value of the gas has been reduced, these rules do not apply. Check with your local gas utility or authorities having jurisdiction. When installing above 2000 feet elevation: • In the USA: Reduce input rate 4% for each 1000 feet above 2000 feet. • In CANADA: Reduce input rate 10% for elevations between 2000 feet and 4500 feet. Above 4500 feet, consult local gas utility. Check with your local gas utility to determine proper orifice size. E. Non -Combustible Materials Specification Material which will not ignite and burn. Such materials are those consisting entirely of steel, iron, brick, tile, concrete, slate, glass or plasters, or any combination thereof. Materials that are reported as passing ASTM E 136, Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 760 eC and UL763 shall be considered non-combustible materials. F. Combustible Materials Specification Materials made of or surfaced with wood, compressed pa- per, plant fibers, plastics, or other material that can ignite and burn, whether flame proofed or not, or plastered or unplastered shall be considered combustible materials. G. Electrical Codes NOTICE. This appliance must be electrically wired and grounded in accordance with local codes or, in the absence of local codes, with National Electric Code ANSI/NFPA 70-latest edition or the Canadian Electric Code CSA C22.1. • A 110-120 VAC circuit for this product must be protected with ground -fault circuit -interrupter protection, in compliance with the applicable electrical codes, when it is installed in locations such as in bathrooms or near sinks. Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 Note: The following requirements reference various Massachusetts and national codes not contained in this document. H. Requirements for the Commonwealth of Massachusetts For all side wall horizontally vented gas fueled equipment installed in every dwelling, building or structure used in whole or in part for residential purposes, including those owned or operated by the Commonwealth and where the side wall exhaust vent termination is less than seven (7) feet above finished grade in the area of the venting, in- cluding but not limited to decks and porches, the following requirements shall be satisfied: Installation of Carbon Monoxide Detectors At the time of installation of the side wall horizontal vented gas fueled equipment, the installing plumber or gas fitter shall observe that a hard wired carbon monoxide detector with an alarm and battery back-up is installed on the floor level where the gas equipment is to be installed. In addi- tion, the installing plumber or gas fitter shall observe that a battery operated or hard wired carbon monoxide detec- tor with an alarm is installed on each additional level of the dwelling, building or structure served by the side wall horizontal vented gas fueled equipment. It shall be the responsibility of the property owner to secure the services of qualified licensed professionals for the installation of hard wired carbon monoxide detectors. In the event that the side wall horizontally vented gas fu- eled equipment is installed in a crawl space or an attic, the hard wired carbon monoxide detector with alarm and battery back-up may be installed on the next adjacent floor level. In the event that the requirements of this subdivision can not be met at the time of completion of installation, the owner shall have a period of thirty (30) days to comply with the above requirements; provided, however, that dur- ing said thirty (30) day period, a battery operated carbon monoxide detector with an alarm shall be installed. Approved Carbon Monoxide Detectors Each carbon monoxide detector as required in accor- dance with the above provisions shall comply with NFPA 720 and be ANSI/UL 2034 listed and IAS certified. Signage A metal or plastic identification plate shall be permanent- ly mounted to the exterior of the building at a minimum height of eight (8) feet above grade directly in line with the exhaust vent terminal for the horizontally vented gas fu- eled heating appliance or equipment. The sign shall read, in print size no less than one-half (1/2) in. in size, "GAS VENT DIRECTLY BELOW. KEEP CLEAR OF ALL OB- STRUCTIONS". Inspection The state or local gas inspector of the side wall horizon- tally vented gas fueled equipment shall not approve the installation unless, upon inspection, the inspector ob- serves carbon monoxide detectors and signage installed in accordance with the provisions of 248 CMR 5.08(2)(a)1 through 4. Exemptions The following equipment is exempt from 248 CMR 5.08(2)(a)1 through 4: • The equipment listed in Chapter 10 entitled "Equipment Not Required To Be Vented" in the most current edition of NFPA 54 as adopted by the Board; and • Product Approved side wall horizontally vented gas fu- eled equipment installed in a room or structure separate from the dwelling, building or structure used in whole or in part for residential purposes. MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS Gas Equipment Venting System Provided When the manufacturer of Product Approved side wall horizontally vented gas equipment provides a venting system design or venting system components with the equipment, the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installation of the equipment and the venting system shall include: • Detailed instructions for the installation of the venting system design or the venting system components; and • A complete parts list for the venting system design or venting system. Gas Equipment Venting System hI Provided When the manufacturer of a Product Approved side wall horizontally vented gas fueled equipment does not pro- vide the parts for venting the flue gases, but identifies "special venting systems", the following requirements shall be satisfied by the manufacturer: • The referenced "special venting system" instructions shall be included with the appliance or equipment in- stallation instructions; and The "special venting systems" shall be Product Ap- proved by the Board, and the instructions for that sys- tem shall include a parts list and detailed installation instructions. . A copy of all installation instructions for all Product Ap- proved side wall horizontally vented gas fueled equip- ment, all venting instructions, all parts lists for venting instructions, and/or all venting design instructions shall remain with the appliance or equipment at the completion of the installation. See Gas Connection section for additional Common- wealth of Massachusetts requirements. Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD48421R-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 2 Operating Instructions User Guide A. Gas Fireplace Safety A WARNING HOT SURFACES! Glass and other surfaces are hot during operation AND cool down. Hot glass will cause burns. • DO NOT touch glass until it is cooled • NEVER allow children to touch glass • Keep children away • CAREFULLY SUPERVISE children in same room as fireplace. • Alert children and adults to hazards of high temperatures. High temperatures may ignite clothing or other flammable materials. • Keep clothing, furniture, draperies and other flammable materials away. This appliance has been supplied with an integral barrier to prevent direct contact with the fixed glass panel. DO NOT operate the appliance with the barrier removed. Contact your dealer or Hearth & Home Technologies if the barrier is not present or help is needed to property install one. If you expect that small children or vulnerable adults may come into contact with this fireplace, the following precau- tions are recommended: • Install a physical barrier such as: - A decorative firescreen. - Adjustable safety gate. • Install a switch lock or a wall/remote control with child protection lockout feature. Figure 2.1 General Operating Parts • Keep remote controls out of reach of children. • Never leave children alone near a hot fireplace, whether operating or cooling down. Teach children to NEVER touch the fireplace. • Consider not using the fireplace when children will be present. Contact your dealer for more information, or visit: www. hhgba.org/safe -information. To prevent unintended operation when not using your fire- place for an extended period of time (summer months, vacations, trips, etc): • Remove batteries from remote controls. • Turnoff wall controls. • Unplug 6 volt transformer plug and remove batteries on IPI models. • Turn off gas controls valve on standing pilot models. When lighting the pilot light on fireplaces with a standing pilot, remove the fixed glass assembly so you can de- tect presence of residual gas build-up. See Standing Pilot. Lighting instructions and Maintenance Tasks. B. Your Fireplace WARN/NGI DO NOT operate fireplace before read- ing and understanding operating instructions. Failure to operate fireplace according to operating instructions could cause fire or injury. Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 9 C. Fan Kit (optional) If desired, a fan kit may be added. Contact your dealer to order the correct fan kit. D. Clear Space WARN/NGI DO NOT place combustible objects in front of the fireplace or block louvers. High temperatures may start a fire. See Figure 2.2. Avoid placing candles and other heat -sensitive objects on mantel or hearth. Heat may damage these objects. E. Decorative Doors and Fronts WARNING! Risk of Firel Install ONLY doors or fronts approved by Hearth & Home Technologies. Unapproved doors or fronts may cause fireplace to overheat. This fireplace has been supplied with an integral barrier to prevent direct contact with the fixed glass panel. DO NOT operate the fireplace with the barrier removed. Contact your dealer or Hearth & Home Technologies if the barrier is not present or help is needed to properly install one. For more information refer to the instructions supplied with your decorative door or front. F. Fixed Glass Assembly See Section 14.H. G. Remote Controls, Wall Controls and Wall Switches Follow the instructions supplied with the control installed to operate your fireplace: For safety: • Install a switch lock or a wall/remote control with child protection lockout feature. • Keep remote controls out of reach of children. See your dealer if you have questions. H. IPI Battery Tray/Battery Installation The IntelliFire Pluem system has a battery backup option. Battery longevity and performance will be affected by the service temperatures of this appliance. NOTICE. Batteries should only be used as a power source in the event of an emergency such as an outage. 10 Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 I. Control Module Operation . 1: The control module has an ON/OFF/REMOTE selector switch that must be set. See Figure 2.3. OFF Position: Appliance will ignore all power inputs and will not respond to any commands from a wall switch or remote. The unit should be in the OFF position during installation, service, battery installation, fuel conversion, and in the event that the control goes into LOCK -OUT' mode as a result of an error code. ON Position: Appliance will ignite and run continuously in the HI flame setting, with no adjustment in flame output. This mode of operation is primarily used for initial installation or power outage operation with battery backup. REMOTE Position: Appliance will initiate commands from an optional wired wall switch and/or the wireless remote (RC300). 2. If using a wired wall switch with the module in REMOTE mode, the flame output can be adjusted with the HI/LO selector switch on the module. See Figure 2.3. Note that the flame HI/LO selector switch will become inactive once an optional remote control (RC200/RC300) is programmed to the control module. Note that the control module will always ignite the fireplace on HI and remain so for the initial 10 seconds of operation. If the HI/LO is switched to the LO position, the flame output will automatically drop to the lowest setting after the flame has been established for 10 sec. After this 10 second period, the flame can be adjusted from HI to LO with the switch. 3. The control module has safety feature that automatically shuts down the fireplace after 9 hours of continuous operation without receiving a command from the RC300 remote. 4. If you intend to use both an optional wired wall switch and the RC300 remote control to operate your fireplace, the wall switch will override any commands given by the remote. MODULE o• � SELECTOR SWITCH 0 ® •,• ON •a• OFF i NG/LP SETTING WIRE LEAD FROM REGULATOR CONNECTS HERE Figure 2.3 Control Module 5. Module Reset This module may lock -out under certain conditions. When this occurs, the appliance will not ignite or respond to commands. The module will go into lock -out mode by emitting three audible beeps, then continuously displaying a RED/GREEN error code at its status indicator LED. • Check battery tray. Remove batteries if installed. Batteries should only be installed for use during power outages. See Section H. • Locate the module selector switch. (See Figure 2.3). Set the module selector switch to the OFF position. • Wait five (5) minutes to allow possible accumulated gas to clear. • Set the module selector switch to ON or REMOTE position. • Start the appliance. WARNING! Risk of Explosion! DO NOT reset the mod- ule more than one time within a five minute time period. Gas may accumulate in firebox. Call a qualified service technician. Nine Hour Safety Shutdown Feature F This appliance has a safety feature that automatically shuts down the fireplace after 9 hours of continuous operation without receiving a command from the RC300 remote. J. Before Lighting Fireplace Before operating this fireplace for the first time, have a qualified service technician: • Verify all shipping materials have been removed from inside and/or underneath the firebox. • Review proper placement of logs, ember material and/ or other decorative materials. • Ensure plastic finishing strips have been removed after use for incorporating finishing materials. • Check the wiring.. • Check the air shutter adjustment. • Ensure that there are no gas leaks. • Ensure that the glass is sealed and in the proper position and that the integral barrier is in place. WARN/NGI Risk of Fire or Asphyxiation/ DO NOT op- erate fireplace with fixed glass assembly removed. Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 11 K. Lighting Instructions (IPI) I FOR YOUR SAFETY I READ BEFORE LIGHTING .WARNING: If you do not follow these instructions exactly, afire or explosion may result causing property damage, personal injury or loss of life. A. This appliance is equipped with an intermittent pilot ignition (IPI) device which automatically lights the burn- er. DO NOT try to light the burner by hand. B. BEFORE LIGHTING, smell all around the appliance area for gas. Be sure to smell next to the floor because some gas is heavier than air and will settle on the floor. WHAT TO DO IF YOU SMELL GAS • DO NOT try to light any appliance. • DO NOT touch any electric switch; do not use any phone in your building. • Immediately call your gas supplier from a neighbor's phone. Follow the gas supplier's instructions. • If you cannot reach your gas sup- plier, call the fire department. C. DO NOT use this appliance if any part has been under water. Imme- diately call a qualified service tech- nician to inspect the appliance and to replace any part of the control system and any gas control which has been underwater. WARNING: CAUTION: DO NOT CONNECT LINE VOLT- AGE (110/120 VAC OR 220/240 VAC) TO THE CONTROL VALVE. Improper installation, adjustment, al- teration, service or maintenance can cause injury or property damage. Re- fer to the owner's information manual provided with this appliance. This appliance needs fresh air for safe operation and must be installed so there are provisions for adequate combustion and ventilation air. If not installed, operated, and main- tained in accordance with the manufac- turer's instructions, this product could expose you to substances in fuel or fuel combustion which are known to the State of California to cause can- cer, birth defects, or other reproductive harm. Keep burner and control compartment Hot while in operation. DO NOT touch. Keep children, clothing, furniture, gaso- line and other liquids having flammable vapors away. DO NOT operate the appliance with fixed glass assembly removed, cracked or broken. Replacement of the fixed glass assembly should be done by a licensed or qualified service person. NOT FOR USE WITH SOLID FUEL For use with natural gas and propane. A conversion kit, as supplied by the manufacturer, shall be used to convert this appliance to the alternate fuel. Also Certified for Installation in a Bedroom or a Bedsitting Room. For assistance or additional informa- tion, consult a qualified installer, ser- vice agency or the gas supplier. c ean. ee insta at and operating instructions accompanying appliance. For additional information on operating your Hearth & Home Technologies fireplace, please refer to ~A Final inspection by 0 LIGHTING 0 INSTRUCTIONS (IPI) 1. This appliance is equipped with an ignition device which automatically lights the burner. DO NOT try to light the burner by hand. .0rid, W(** .4'0, I L� 0 M 2. Wait five (5) minutes to clear out any gas. Then smell for gas, including near the floor. If you smell gas, STOP! Follow "B° in the Safety Information located on the left side of this la- bel. If you do not smell gas, go to next step. 3. To light the burner: Equipped with wall switch: Turn ON/OFF switch to ON. Equipped with remote or wall control: Press ON or FLAME button. Equipped with thermostat: Set temperature to desired setting. 4. If the appliance does not light after three tries, call your service technician or gas supplier. 0 TO TURN OFF 0 GAS TO APPLIANCE 1. Equipped with wall switch: Turn ON/OFF switch to OFF. Equipped with remote or wall control: Press OFF button. Equipped with thermostat: Set temperature to lowest setting. 2. Service technician should turn off electric power to the control when performing service. 593-913G 12 Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD48421R-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 L. After Fireplace is Lit Initial Break-in Procedure • The fireplace should be run three to four hours continuously on.high. • Turn the fireplace off and allow, it to,completely cool. • Remove fixed glass assembly. See Section 14.H. ` • Clean fixed glass assembly. See Section 3. • Replace the fixed glass assembly and run continuously on high an additional 12 hours. •', ` This cures the materials used- to manufacture .the fire- place. NOTICEI Open windows for air circulation during fire- place break-in. . Some people may be sensitive to smoke and odors. • Smoke detectors may activate. M. Frequently Asked Questions c t i x .l9t� ISSUE�--.,ram.,-.-N SOLUTIONS b V °t,. Condensation on the glass This is a result' of gas combustion and temperature variations. As the appliance warms, this, condensation will disappear. Blue flames This is a result of normal operation and the flames will begin to yellow as the appliance is al- lowed to burn for 20 to 40 minutes. When first operated, this appliance may release an odor for the first several hours. This is caused Odor from appliance by the curing of the paint and the burning off of any oils remaining from manufacturing. Odor may also be released from finishing materials and adhesives used around the appliance. This is a normal result of the curing process of the paint and logs. Glass should be cleaned Film on the glass within 3 to 4 hours of initial burning to remove deposits left by oils from the manufacturing process. A non-abrasive 'cleaner such.as gas fireplace glass cleaner may be necessary. See your dealer. Noise is caused by metal expanding and contracting as it heats up and cools down, similar to Metallic noise f the sound produced by a furnace or heating duct. This noise does not affect the operation or longevity of the appliance. In an intermittent pilot ignition system (IPI), the pilot flame should turn off when appliance is Is it normal to see the pilot flame burn turned off. Some optional control systems available with IPI models may allow pilot flame to continually? 1 remain lit. In a standing pilot system the pilot will always stay on. 8 Maintenance and Service Any safety screen or guard removed for servicing must be replaced prior to operating the fireplace. When properly maintained, your fireplace will give you many years of trouble -free service. We recommend an- nual service by a qualified service technician. A. Maintenance Tasks -Homeowner Installation and repair should be done by a qualified service technician only. The fireplace should be inspected before use and at least annually by a professional service person. The following tasks may be performed annually by the homeowner. If you are uncomfortable performing any of the listed tasks, please call your dealer for a service ap- pointment. More frequent cleaning may be required due to lint from carpeting or other factors. Control compartment, burner and circulating air passageway of the fireplace must be kept clean. CAUTION! Risk of Burnsl The fireplace should be turned off and cooled before servicing. Glass Cleaning Frequency: Seasonally By: Homeowner Tools Needed: Protective gloves, glass cleaner, drop cloth and a stable work surface. CAUTION/ Handle fixed glass assembly with care. Glass is breakable. • Avoid striking, scratching or slamming glass • Avoid abrasive cleaners DO NOT clean glass while it is hot • Prepare a work area large enough to accommodate fixed glass assembly and door frame by placing a drop cloth on a flat, stable surface. Note: Fixed glass assembly and gasketing may have res- idue that can stain carpeting or floor surfaces. • Remove door or decorative front from fireplace and set aside on work surface. • See Section 14.H for instructions to remove fixed glass assembly. Doors, Surrounds, Fronts Frequency: Annually By: Homeowner Tools needed: Protective gloves, stable work surface • Assess condition of screen and replace as necessary. • Inspect for scratches, dents or other damage and repair as necessary. • Check that louvers are not blocked. • Vacuum and dust surfaces. Remote Control Frequency: Seasonally By: Homeowner Tools needed: Replacement batteries and remote con- trol instructions. • Locate remote control transmitter and receiver. • Verify operation of remote. Refer to remote control operation instructions for proper calibration and setup procedure. , • Place batteries as needed in remote transmitters and battery -powered receivers. • Place remote control out of reach of children. If not using your fireplace for an extended period of time (summer months, vacations/trips, etc), to prevent unin- tended operation: • Remove batteries from remote controls. • Unplug 6 volt transformer plug on IPI models. • Unplug battery backup from control module. Venting Frequency: Seasonally By: Homeowner Tools needed: Protective gloves and safety glasses. • Inspect venting and termination cap for blockage or obstruction such plants, bird nests, leaves, snow, debris, etc. • Clean glass with a non-abrasive commercially available • Verify termination cap clearance to subsequent construc- cleaner. tion (building additions, decks, fences, or sheds). See Section 6. - Light deposits: Use a soft cloth with soap and water • Inspect for corrosion or separation. - Heavy deposits: Use commercial fireplace glass cleaner (consult with your dealer) • Verify weather stripping, sealing and flashing remains • Carefully set fixed glass assembly in place on fireplace. intact. Hold glass in place with one hand and secure glass • Inspect draft shield to verify it is not damaged or missing. latches with the other hand. • Reinstall door or decorative front. 14 Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD48421R-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 B. Maintenance Tasks -Qualified Service Technician The following tasks must be performed by a qualified ser- vice technician. Gasket Seal and Glass Assembly Inspection Frequency: Annually By: Qualified Service Technician Tools needed: Protective gloves, drop cloth and a stable work surface. • Inspect gasket seal and its condition. • Inspect fixed glass assembly for scratches and nicks that .can lead to breakage when exposed to heat. • Confirm there is no damage to glass or glass frame. Replace as necessary. • Verify that fixed glass assembly is properly retained and attachment components are intact and not damaged. Replace as necessary. Logs Frequency: Annually By: Qualified Service Technician Tools needed: Protective gloves. • .Inspect for damaged or missing logs. Replace as neces- sary. Refer to Section 14 for log placement instructions. • Verify correct log placement and no flame impingement causing sooting. Correct as necessary. Firebox Frequency: Annually By: Qualified Service Technician Tools needed: Protective gloves, sandpaper, steel wool, cloths, mineral spirits, primer and touch-up paint. • Inspect for paint condition, warped surfaces, corrosion or perforation. Sand and repaint as necessary. • Replace fireplace if firebox has been perforated. Control Compartment and Firebox Top Frequency: Annually By: Qualified Service Technician Tools needed: Protective gloves, vacuum cleaner, dust cloths • Vacuum and wipe out dust, cobwebs, debris or pet hair. Use caution when cleaning these areas. Screw tips that have penetrated the sheet metal are sharp and should be avoided. • Remove all foreign objects. • Verify unobstructed air circulation. Burner Ignition and Operation Frequency: Annually By: Qualified Service Technician Tools needed: Protective gloves, vacuum cleaner, whisk broom, flashlight, voltmeter, indexed drill bit set, and a manometer. • Verify burner is properly secured and aligned with pilot or igniter. • Clean off burner top, inspect for plugged ports, corrosion or deterioration. Replace burner if necessary. • Replace Glowing embers with new dime -size pieces. DO NOT block ports or obstruct lighting paths. Refer to Section 14 for proper ember placement. • Verify batteries have been removed from battery back- up IPI systems to prevent premature battery failure or leaking. • Check for smooth lighting and ignition carryover to all ports. Verify that there is no ignition delay. • Inspect for lifting or other flame problems. • Verify air shutter setting is correct. See Section 14 for required air shutter setting. Verify air shutter is clear of dust and debris. • Inspect orifice for soot, dirt and corrosion. Verify orifice size is correct. See Service Parts List for proper orifice sizing. • Verify manifold and inlet pressures. Adjust regulator as required. • Inspect pilot flame pattern and strength. See Figure 3.1 for proper pilot flame pattern. Clean or replace orifice spud as necessary. • Inspect IPI flame sensing rod for soot, corrosion and deterioration. Polish with fine steel wool or replace as E required. • Verify that there is not a short in flame sense circuit by checking continuity between pilot hood and flame sensing rod. Replace pilot as necessary. (IPI only) Figure 3.1 IPI Pilot Flame Patterns Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD48421R-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 15 C. Logs/Grate and Valve Assembly Removal It may become necessary to remove the logs/grate and valve assembly. This task should be performed by a quali- fied service technician. The base pan does not need to be removed to service the burner assembly. 1. Remove the two top logs from the log/grate assembly. These logs are not secured to the assembly with screws. See Figure 3.2. Figure 3.2 Remove Top Two Logs 2. Remove screw from each tab at the front of the log/grate assembly that secures the assembly to the base pan. See Figure 3.3 Figure 3.3 Remove Screws from Front Tab 3. Remove screws from log tabs on both ends of the rear log and remove the log. See Figure 3.4. 4. The standard metal refractory will have to be removed in order to access the valve assembly. This is done by removing 8 screws (10 screws for CD4842IR-C model). There are 4 screws per side panel, Figure 3.5 shows the 2 screws on the bottom of panels and Figure 3.6 shows the 2 screws on the top of the panels. The 2 other screws for CD4842IR-C models are located in back wall of firebox as shown in Figure 3.7. One is up by exhaust baffle and the other is behind logs and near fireplace bottom. Figure 3.5 Bottom Screws For Metal Refractory Figure 3.6 Top Screws For Metal Refractory Figure 3.7 CD48421R-C Extra Metal Refractory Screws Figure 3.4 Remove Screws from Log Tabs 16 Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C 2207-900 Rev. J 11/11 5. Remove the two screws from the back corners of the burner assembly. See Figure 3.8. Figure 3.8 Remove Screws from Burner Assembly Rear Corners 6. Remove burner skirt by removing 4 screws. See Figure 3.9. Figure 3.9 Remove Burner Skirt 7. Bend down grate tab at the right of burner assembly. Assembly will slide out to the right. See Figure 3.10. Figure 3.10 Grate Tab Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD48421R-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 17 D. Burner Identification/Verification ' The burner may be accessed for identification and .veri- fication purposes. This task should be performed by a qualified service technician. Only the log/grate assembly and burner skirt need to be removed in order to identify burner. See Figure 3.12,for burner identification chart. r- CD42361R-C (NG) CD42361R-C (LP) LP) C= CNXT42361H/T-C (NG & LP) ' r- CD48421R-C (NG) L•- CD4842IR-C (LP) ;LP� o !� CNXT48361H/T-C (NG & LP) 'Bottom left feature determines fireplace size "Bottom right feature determines fireplace style "'LP stamp determines gas type (for CD models only) CD42361R-C (NG) CD42361R-C (LP) X CNXT42361H/T-C (NG & LP) X CD48421R-C (NG) . X CD48421R-C (LP) X X CNXT4842IH/T-C (NG & LP) X X Figure 3.12 Burner Identification Examples 18 4 Getting Started InStafler Guide A. Typical Appliance System NOTICE: Illustrations and photos reflect typical installations and are for design purposes only. Illustrations/diagrams are not drawn to scale. Actual product may vary from pictures in manual - HORIZONTAL Note: Dual venting configurations TERMINATION CAP (SECTION 10.1-) ARE NOT allowed. Appliance MUST be vented EITHER vertically, OR horizontally. VERTICAL TERMINATION CAP (SECTION 10.1) 0 . ONON-COMBUSTIBLE ROOF FLASHING MAINTAINS MINIMUM CLEARANCE AROUND PIPE (SECTION 10.G) - STORM COLLAR 1 (SECTION 10.H) , VENT PIPE PENETRATES ROOF PREFERABLY WITHOUT AFFECTING ROOF RAFTERS (SECTION 8.C) ' ATTIC INSULATION SHIELD (NOT VENT PIPE (SECTIONS 7 and 8) SHOWN) MUST BE USED HERE TO KEEP INSULATION AWAY FROM VENT PIPE IF ATTIC IS INSULATED (SECTION 8.D) - CEILING FIRESTOP ON FLOOR OF ATTIC (SECTION 8.C) FRAMINGIHEADER (SECTION S.B) FRAMING HEADED OFF IN CEILING JOISTS (SECTION S.C) - OPTIONAL WALL SWITCH (SECTION 12C) , MANTELAND MANTELLEG - - _ (SECTION 5.D) 0 SURROUND O I , .Q I . HEARTH EXTENSION (not required) GAS LINE (SECTION 11). Figure4.1 Typical System Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 19 B. Design and Installation Considerations Heatilator direct vent gas appliances are designed to op- erate with all combustion air siphoned from outside of the building and all exhaust gases expelled to the outside. No additional outside air source is required. Installation MUST comply with local, regional, state and national codes and regulations. Consult insurance carrier, local building inspector, fire officials or authorities having jurisdiction over restrictions, installation inspection and permits. Before installing, determine the following: • Where the appliance is to be installed. • The vent system configuration to be used. • Gas supply piping requirements. • Electrical wiring requirements. • Framing and finishing details. • Whether optional accessories —devices such as a fan,. wall switch, or remote control —are desired. Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, service or maintenance can cause injury or property damage. For assistance or additional information, consult a qualified service technician, service agency or your dealer. C. Tools and Supplies Needed Before beginning the installation be sure that the following tools and building supplies are available. Tape measure Framing material Pliers Non -corrosive leak check solution Hammer Phillips screwdriver Gloves Framing square Voltmeter Electric drill and bits (1/4 in.) Plumb line Safety glasses Level Reciprocating saw Manometer Flat blade screwdriver 1/2 - 3/4 in. length, #6 or #8 Self -drilling screws Caulking material (300°F minimum continuous exposure . rating) One 1/4 in. female connection (for optional fan). D. Inspect Appliance and Components • Carefully remove the appliance and components from the packaging. • The vent system components and decorative doors and fronts may be shipped in separate packages. • If packaged separately, the log set and appliance grate must be installed. • Report to your dealer any parts damaged in shipment, particularly the condition of the glass. • Read all of the instructions before starting the instal- lation. Follow these instructions carefully during the installation to ensure maximum safety and benefit. WARNING! Risk of Fire or Exp/osionl Damaged parts could impair safe operation. DO NOT install damaged, in- complete or substitute components. Keep appliance dry. Hearth & Home Technologies disclaims any responsibility for, and the warranty will be voided by, the following actions: • Installation and use of any damaged appliance or vent system component. • Modification of the appliance or vent system. • Installation other than as instructed by Hearth & Home Technologies. • Improper positioning of the gas logs or the glass door. • Installation and/or use of any component part not approved by Hearth & Home Technologies. Any such action may cause a fire hazard. WARNING! Risk of Fire, Explosion or Electric Shockl DO NOT use this appliance if any part has been under water. Call a qualified service technician to inspect the appliance and to replace any part of the control system and/or gas control which has been under water. 20 Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 ~ 5 Framing and Clearances A. Selecting Appliance Location NOTICE. Illustrations reflect typical installations and are When selecting a location for the appliance it is important to FOR DESIGN PURPOSES ONLY. lllustrations/diagrams consider the required clearances to walls (see Figure 5.1). are not drawn to scale. Actual installation may vary due to individual design preference. WARNING! Risk of Fire or Bums! Provide adequate clearance around air openings and for service access. Due to high temperatures, the appliance should be locat- ed out of traffic and away from fumitune and draperies. NOTE: THE REAR STANDOFF MAY NEED TO BE REMOVED WHEN VENTING AT W G 112 1N. O ALCOVE INSTALLATION E A B C TOP VENT ONE 900 ELBOW /� REAR VENT, REAR VENT ' HORIZONTAL TERMINATION ONE ELBOW TWO ELBOWS REAR VENT B NO ELBOWS B D r—B --I D O T O 0 OO F �D �-- D —� A B C D E F G H I CD4236 Series in. 51 42 72 56-5/8 See Section D. Mantel Projections 22 17-3/4 8 6-3/4 mm 1295 1067 1829 1438 559 451 203 171 CD4842 Series in. 55-7/8 49 79 61-1/2 See Section D. Mantel Projections 22 19-3/4 10 1.0-1/8 mm 1419 1245 2007 1562 559 502 254 257 Heatilator CD42361R-C, CD48421R-C 2207-900 Rev. J 11/11 21 B. Constructing the Appliance Chase A chase is a vertical box -like structure built to enclose the gas appliance and/or its vent system. In cooler climates the vent should be enclosed inside the chase. NOTICE: Treatment of ceiling firestops and wall shield firestops and construction of the chase may vary with the type of building. These instructions are not substitutes for the requirements of local building codes. Therefore, you MUST check local building codes to determine the requirements to these steps. Chases should be constructed in the manner of all out- side walls of the home to prevent cold air drafting prob- lems. The chase should not break the outside building envelope in any manner. Walls, ceiling, base plate and cantilever floor of the chase should be insulated. Vapor and air infiltration barriers should be installed in the chase as per regional codes for the rest of the home. Additionally, in regions where cold air infiltration may be an issue, the inside surfaces may be sheetrocked and taped for maximum air tightness. To further prevent drafts, the wall shield and ceiling fire - stops should be caulked with caulk with a minimum of 300OF continuous exposure rating to seal gaps. Gas line holes and other openings should be caulked with caulk with a minimum of 300OF continuous exposure rating or stuffed with unfaced insulation. If the appliance is being installed on a cement surface, a layer of plywood may be placed underneath to prevent conducting cold up into the room. (a. -*'COMBUSTIBLE FLOORING MAYBE INSTALLED;f NEXT TO;THE FRONT, OF THE APPLIANCE. ,.. 1• , ..._. c - .. •. 1 v;:._` gal. .� _ i E ' ,-� `. ' r `•,,,r°«' `.." *:MINIMUM FRAMING DIMENSIONS r7 A B C"* D E F G H I J.. 4� Rough Rough Rough Rough Clearance Combustible Combustible Behind Sides of Front of , '.�..; Models; ;.t a - � "f a ` ` ' Opening Opening Opening Opening to Ceiling Floor Flooring Appliance Appliance Appliance ii • (Width) (Height) (Depth) (Width) in. 10 40-1/8 22 42 25 0 0 1/2 1/2 36 CD4236 Series mm 254 1019 1 559 1 1067 1 635 1 0 1 0 1 13 13 914 In. 10 42-1/8 1 22 49 25 0 0 1/2 1/2 36 CD4842 Series mm 254 1019 559 1245 635 0 0 13 13 914 * Adjust framing dimensions for interior sheathing (such as sheetrock) C** Add 12 inches for rear venting with one 900 elbow. Figure 5.2 Clearances to Combustibles 22 Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C • 2207-900 Rev. J * 11/11 C. Clearances NOTICE: Install appliance on hard metal or wood surfaces extending full width and depth. DO NOT install directly on carpeting, vinyl, tile or any combustible material other than wood. WARNING/ Risk of Firel Maintain specified air space clearances to appliance and vent pipe: • Insulation and other materials must be secured to prevent accidental contact. • The chase must be properly blocked to prevent blown insulation or other combustibles from entering and making contact with fireplace or chimney. • Failure to maintain airspace may cause overheating and a fire. D. Mantel and Wall Projections WARNINGI Risk of Firel Comply with all minimum clear- ances as specked. Framing or finishing material closer than the minimums listed must be constructed entirely of noncom- bustible materials (i.e., steel studs, concrete board, etc). Note: All measurements in inches. TO CEILING 16 12 11 101 32 9 8 25 7 19 6 15 • 5 17 3 16 — 15 14 13 T11 L T 111I2 I -------D ---- MEASUREMENTS FROM TOP EDGE OF THE OPENING Figure 5.3 Minimum Vertical and Maximum Horizontal Dimensions Mantel Legs or Wall Projections Top of Appliance Drywall �A B Mantel Leg or Perpendicular Wall A 1 in. (25 mm) min. to perpendicular wall B 3-1/2 in. (89 mm) min. from fireplace opening to perpendicular wall Figure 5.4 Mantel Leg or Wall Projections (Acceptable on both sides of opening) Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842lR-C, • 2207-900 Rev. J 11/11 23 A'. Vent Termination Minimum Clearances r- HORIZONTAL OVERHANG r \ • 2 FT - 20 INCHES MIN A -VERTICAL .. - WALL -. LOWEST DISCHARGE _ OPENING GAS DIRECT VENT TERMINATION CAP - X y 12 - • • qr • ROOF PITCH •'Y .IS w12 Y H(MIN.)-MINIMUMHEIGHTFROMROOF - TO LOWEST DISCHARGE OPENING ................... ..................................... A B 6 in. (minimum) up to 20 in. 18 in. minimum 152 mm/508 mm 457 mm 20 in. and over 0 in. minimum Gas, Wood or Fuel Oil . Termination Cap B ' Gas Termination Cap.. H Ka ER3.c{ E-: -• o000 If using decorative cap cover(s); this distance may need to be increased. Refer to the installation instructions supplied with the decorative cap cover. . .. In a staggered installation With both gas and wood or fuel oil terminations, the wood or fuel oil termination cap must be higher than the gas termination cap. Figure 6.2 Staggered Termination Caps • Roof Pitch Flat to 6/12............ ................................. A B 6 in. (minimum) up to 20 in. 18 in. minimum 152 mm/508 mm 457 mm 20 in. and over 0 in. minimum Gas, Wood or Fuel Oil . Termination Cap B ' Gas Termination Cap.. H Ka ER3.c{ E-: -• o000 If using decorative cap cover(s); this distance may need to be increased. Refer to the installation instructions supplied with the decorative cap cover. . .. In a staggered installation With both gas and wood or fuel oil terminations, the wood or fuel oil termination cap must be higher than the gas termination cap. Figure 6.2 Staggered Termination Caps • Roof Pitch Flat to 6/12............ ................................. ' H (min.) Ft .............. 1.0' : • - • . - . ' • Over 6/12 to 7/12.................... ............ 24 4 Y YC171 1 CRIY1119AL X = AIR SUPPLY INLET ® = AREA WHERE TERMINAL IS NOT PERMITTED A = 12 inches ... .............. clearances above grade, veranda, porch, deck or balcony B = 12 inches ................. clearance to window or door that may be opened, or to permanently closed window C = 18 inches.................clearance below unventilated soffit 18 inches.................clearance below ventilated soffit 30 inches .................clearance below vinyl soffits and electrical service D = 9 inches ...................clearance to outside comer E = 6 inches ...................clearance to inside comer F = 3 ft. (Canada) .......... not to be installed above a gas me- ter/regulator assembly within 3 feet horizontally from the center -line of the regulator G = 3 ft...........................clearance to gas service regulator vent outlet H = 9 inches (U.S.A) 12 inches (Canada). clearance to non -mechanical (unpow- ered) air supply inlet, combustion air inlet or direct -vent termination i = 3 ft. (U.S.A.) 6 ft. (Canada) ........... clearance to a mechanical (powered) air supply inlet All mechanical air intakes within 10 feet of a termination cap must be a minimum of 3 feet below termination. J = 7 ft .......................... On public property: clearance above paved sidewalk or a paved driveway. A vent shall not terminate directly above a sidewalk or paved driveway which is located between two single family dwellings and serves both dwellings. K = 6 inches.................clearance from sides of electrical service L = 12 inches................clearance above electrical service Location of the vent termination must not interfere with access to the electrical service. M = 18 inches .................... clearance under veranda, porch, deck, balcony or overhang 42 inches ................vinyl or composite overhang Permitted when veranda, porch, deck or balcony is fully open on a minimum of 2 sides beneath the floor. Figure 6.3 Minimum Clearances for Termination Electrical Service T Covered Alcove Applications (Spaces open only on one side and with an overhang) N = 6 inches ........... non -vinyl sidewalls 12 inches ......... vinyl sidewalls O = 18 inches ......... non -vinyl soffit and overhang 42 inches ......... vinyl soffit and overhang P = 8 ft. QMIN RMAX 1 cap 3 feet 2 x Q ACTUAL 2 caps 6 feet 1 x Q AITUAL 3 caps 9 feet 2/3 x Q ACTUAL 4 caps 12 feet 1/2 x Q ACTUAL Q,.,, _ # termination caps x S R,• _ (2 / # terrnlnadon caps) x Q.. Measure vertical clearances from this surface. Measure horizontal clea CAUTION/ Risk of Bumst Termination caps are HOT, consider proximity to doors, traffic areas or where people may pass or gather (sidewalk, deck, patio, etc.). Listed cap shields available. Contact your dealer. • Local codes or regulations may require different clearances. • Vent system termination is NOT permitted in screened porches. • Vent system termination is -permitted in porch areas with two or more sides open. • Hearth & Home Technologies assumes no responsibility for the improper performance of the appliance when the venting system does not meet these requirements. • Vinyl protection kits are suggested for use with vinyl siding. Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 25 A. Approved Pipe This appliance is approved for use with Hearth & Home Technologies DVP or SLP venting systems., Referto Sec- ' tion 16B for vent component information. DO NOT mix pipe, fittings. or joining methods from'differ- ent manufacturers.. a. The pipe is tested to be run inside an enclosed•wall There is no requirement for. inspection openings at each joint within the wall. WARNING! Risk of Fire or Asphyxiation: This appli--. ance requires a separate vent: -DO -NOT vent to a pipe serving a separate solid fuel buming appliance.'`. B. Vent Table Key The abbreviations listed in this vent table key are -used in ' the vent diagrams. • �?�, �.� -�-. �Yr �-.... �, �Sdaa.. � r +. � p -. .,#��,. h 3 ...ali'�. r. *�.`tY V, First section (closest to appliance) of vertical length V2 Second section of vertical length ' Hi First section (closest to appliance) of horizontal length H2 Subsequent sections of horizontal length - D.`Measuring Standards Vertical- and horizontal measurements listed in the vent diagrams were made using the following standards. • Pipe measurements are shown using the effective length of pipe (see Figure 7..2)... .Horizontal terminations are measured to the outside r mounting surface (flange of termination cap) (see Figure C. Use of Elbows 6.3). Diagonal runs have both vertical and horizontal vent as Vertical terminations" are measured to bottom of pects when calculating the effects. Use the rise for the termination cap. = vertical aspect and. the run for the horizontal aspect (see • Horizontal pipe installed level with no rise. Figure 7.1). Two 450 elbows may be -used in place of one 900 elbow. - On 450 runs, one foot of diagonal is equal to 8-1/2 in.-(216 mm) horizontal run and 8-1/2 in. (216 mm) vertical run. A " length of straight pipe is allowed between two 45° elbows (see Figure 7.1). + , At < ,y PI e p r rr ' EffectivesLengtt' inches, loMillim6ters DVP4 4 102 DVP6 6 152 DVP12 12 305 DVP24 1 24 610 DVP36 36 914 DVP48 48 1219 DVP6A 3 to 6 76 to 152 DVP12A 3 to 12 76 to 305 DVPI2MI 3 to 12 76 to 305 DVP24MI 3 to 24 76 to 610 E. Vent Diagrams /4 ft min. (1.22 m) - 20 ft max. (6.10 m) Top Vent —Horizontal Termination —Two 450 Elbows Installation requirements to replace the first 900 elbow with two 450 elbows: Figure 7.3 I Top Vent - Horizontal Termination Note: The CD series fireplaces can adapt to SLIP series vent pipe, if desired. When venting off the top of the unit, use a DVP-2SL adapter and a minimum 48 inch vertical section of SLP series vent pipe. A DVP-SLP24 adapter may also be used with a 24 inch vertical section of SLP series vent pipe. After the 48 inch vertical section, the venting table rules must be followed. The first 48 inch vertical section is NOT counted as part of the vertical components in the table. It is still counted as part of the overall maximum run. All venting table rules for the vent run must still be followed. Example: DVP pipe 3 ft. min. vertical = 11 ft. max. horizontal SLP pipe 7 ft. min. vertical = 11 ft. max. horizontal A WARNING Fire Risk. Explosion Risk. Do NOT pack insulation or other combustibles between ceiling firestops. • ALWAYS maintain specified clearances around venting and firestop systems. • Install wall shield and ceiling firestops as speci- fied. Failure to keep insulation or other material away from vent pipe may cause fire. A WARNING Fire Risk. • When using DVP-HRC-SS and DVP-HRC-ZC- SS termination caps on top vented fireplaces, a 6 inch minimum vertical vent section is required before installing first elbow. Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 . 27 Top Vent - Horizontal Termination One Elbow V1 . H, Figure 7.4 V, Minimum H1 Maximum Elbow only 2 ft 616 mm 1/2 ft. 152 mm 6 ft. 1.8 m 1 ft. 305 mm 11 ft. 3.4 m 1-1/2 ft. 457 mm 18 ft. 5.5 m 2ft. 610mm 25 ft. 7.6m V1 + H, = 40 ft. (12.2 m) Maximum H = 25 ft. (7.6 m) Maximum Note: For corner installations: A 6 inch (152 mm) section of straight pipe may need to be attached to the appliance before a 900 elbow, to allow the vent pipe to clear the top standoffs. t Two Elbows Note: For corner installations: A inch (152 mm) section of straight pipe may need to be attached to the appliance before a 900 elbow, to allow the vent pipe to clear the top standoffs. V, Minimum H11 + HZ Maximum Elbow only 2 ft 610 mm 1/2 ft. 152 mm 6 ft. 1.8 m 1 ft. 305 mm 11 ft. 3.4 m 1-1/2-ft.— 457 mm 18 ft. 5.5 m 2ft. 610mm 25 ft. 7.6m .V1 + H, + HZ = 40 ft. (12.2 m) Maximum H + H = 25 ft. (7.6 m) Maximum V1 Hz H INSTALLED HORIZONTALLY 0 , • � 0 O Figure 7.5 0 .0 t 0 OCR 28 Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C 2207-900 Rev. J 11/11 Top Vent - Horizontal Termination (continued) Three Elbows Figure 7.6 V, Min. Hi Max. VZ Min. Hz Max. Elbow only 2 ft. 610 mm O.in. 0 mm 1 ft. 305 mm 6 in. 152 mm 3 ft 914 mm 6 in. 152 mm 2 ft. 610 mm. 1 ft. .305 mm 6 ft. 1.8 m 1 ft. 305 mm 6 ft. 1.8 m 2ft.. 610mm 11 V 3.4m* 2ft. 610mm 10ft.* 3.1 m* 3ft. 914mm 16ft* 4.9m* 1 3ft. 914mm 14V 4.3m* *H1 + HZ = 20 ft. (6.1 m) Maximum Vi + VZ + H, + Hz = 40 ft. (12.2 m) Maximum O Heatilator CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C 2207-900 Rev. J 11/11 29 Top Vent - Vertical Termination No Elbow V1 = 60 ft. Max. (18.3 m) V1 = 3 ft. Min. (914 mm) Note: If installing a vertical vent/ termination off the top of the ap- pliance, the flue restrictor should be used. o V1 0 ♦ 0 O O .0 ' 0 Om Figure 7.7 Flue Restrictor Instructions 1. Remove exhaust shield using a 1/4 inch nut driver by romnvinn tha fni it ccrawc cPri irinn it in nlara (qPP Fini ira Denaing Lne par[ DaCK ana Torn unto 11 QreaKs (See Figure 7.9). 0 0 0 0 0 0 BREAK HERE 0 0 0 0 0 Figure 7.9 Flue Restrictor 30 Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C 2207-900 Rev. J 11/11 Top Vent_ - Vertical Termination (continued)' 4; Center the Flue Restrictor on'vent and secure in place by using two self -tapping screws (see Figure .7.'8 and 3. Match the amount of vertical. you have* in the system Figure 7.11)... with the chart to find the appropriate position to set the 5.' Reinstall the Exhaust Shield. _. Flue Restrictor (see Figure 1.10). • r -' hVert�cal •?' "4.,-.:;�.� ��' H7 VENT K i tL ?"REAR VENT _ . _ a NG_31e '�.•LP'N` � s w�iNGe• "G �*ks LP4.�r.,F 4 ft. 1-1 No Restrictor No Restrictor No Restrictor 8 ft. 2-2 1-2 1-1 No Restrictor` 15 ft. 3-3 3-2 2-2 . 1-2 ' 20 ft. 3-4- 3-3 3-3 . 2-3 ' 25 ft. 3-4 3-3 3-3 2-3 30 ft. 4-4 3-4 3-4 3-3 35 ft. 4-4 3-4 .3-4 -' 3-3 40 ft. 4-4 4-4 4-4 3-4 50 ft.+ 4-4- 4-4 44 4-4 ` rigure 1.1u Note: If the DVP-2SL or DVP-SLP24 adapter is used with SLP pipe, you MUST subtract one number from the table above. - Example: Top vent 40 ft vertical with DVP pipe = 4-4 Top vent 40 ft vertical with SLIP pipe = 3-3 V, H, Maximum V2 V, + V2 Min. ' Elbow only . , -• 2 ft. 610 mm 6in. 152mm 6ft. 1.8m *- 2ft. 610mm 11 ft. 3.4m 3ft. 914mm 116ft. 4.9m 4 ft. 1.2 m 120ft.1 6.1 m *No V, + V2 + H, = 60 ft. (18.3 m) Maximum specific restrictions on this value EXCEPT V, + V2 + H, cannot exceed 60 ft (15.2 m) f Top Vent - Vertical Termination - (continued) Three Elbows H2 Figure 7.13 32 Vi H, + H2 V2 V1 + V2 Minimum H, + H2 Maximum Elbow only 1 ft. 305 mm * * 1 ft. 305 mm 6in. 152mm 2ft. 610mm * 2ft. 610mm 1 ft. 305 mm 2ft. 610mm 2ft. 610mm 2ft. 610mm 4ft. 1.2m * * * 4ft. 1.2m .3ft. 914mm 9ft. 2.7m * * * 9ft. 2.7m 4ft. 1.2m 18ft. 5.5m * * 18ft. 5.5m H, + H2 = 20 ft. (6.1 m) Maximum . V, + V2 t H, + H2 = 60 ft. (18.3 m) Maximum INSTALLED HORIZONTALLY Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C c 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 Rear Vent - Horizontal Termination No Elbow H, = 18 in. (457 mm) Maximum Figure 7.14 One 45e Elbow Figure 7.15 H1=12 in. (305 mm) Maximum CD42361R H1=15 in. (381 mm) Maximum CD4842IR Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 33 Rear Vent - Horizontal Termination - (continued) Two Elbows Figure 7.16 Three Elbows INSTALLED HORIZONTALLY H, Maxim um V, Minimum H2 H, + H2 Maximum 1 ft. 305 mm Back to Back. 900 Elbows 1 ft. 305 mm 2 ft. 610 mm 2ft. 610 mm 6in. 152mm 2ft. 610 mm 4ft. 1.2m 3ft. 914mm 1 ft. 305 mm 2ft. 610 mm 5ft. 1.5m 3ft. 1914mm 2ft. 610 mm 4ft. 1.2m 7ft. 2.1 m 3ft. 914mm 3ft. 914mm 9ft. 2.7m 12ft. 3.7m 3 ft 1914mm 4ft 1 1.2m 17ft. 5.2m 20V 6.1 m• V, + 1-11 + H2 = 40 ft. (12.2 m) Maximum H, = 3 ft. (914 mm) Maximum 'H1 + H2 = 20 ft (6.1 m) Maximum %50 H3� H2 P4 V.7 Figure 7.17 34 H, Maximum V, Minimum H 2 + H3 H1+ H 2 + H3 Max. 1 ft. 305 mm Back to Back 900 Elbows 1 ft. 305 mm 2 ft. 610 mm 2 ft. 610 mm 6 in. 152 mm 1.5 ft. 457 mm 3.5 ft. 1.1 m 3ft. 914mm 1 ft. 305 mm 2ft. 610 mm 5ft. 1.5m 3ft. 914mm 2ft. 610 mm 4ft. 1.2m 7ft. 2.1 m 3ft. 914mm 3ft. 914mm 9ft. 2.7m 12ft. 3.7m 3ft. 914mm 4ft. 1.2m 12ft. 3.7m 15ft. 4.6m V,+ H1+ H 2 + H3 40 ft. (12.2 H1+ H m) Maximum H,= 3ft. (914 mm) Maximum 2 + H3 20 ft. (6.1 m) Maximum Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C 2207-900 Rev. J 11/11 Rear Vent - Vertical Termination One Elbow a Figure 7.18 Two Elbows Figure 7.19 V Minimum H Maximum 6 in. 152 mm 2 ft. 610 mm 1 ft. 305 mm 3 ft. 914 mm 2ft. 610mm 5ft. 1.5m . 3ft. 914 mm 7ft. 2.1 m 4ft. 1.2m 8ft. 2.4m 5ft. 1.5m 1 8ft. 2.4m V, + H, = 40 ft. (12.2 m) Maximum H = 8 ft. (2.4 m) Maximum V, Minimum H, + HZ Maximum Back to Back 900 Elbows 3 ft. 914 mm 2ft. 610mm 6ft. 1.8m 4ft. 1.2m 9ft. 2.7m 6ft. 1.8m 12ft. 3.7m 8ft. 2.4m 15ft. 4.6m V, + H; = 40 ft. (12.2 m) Maximum H, + HZ = 8 ft. (2.4 m) Maximum INSTALLED ' HORIZONTALLY H 1 '111� rH 2 Heatilator CD42361R-C, CD48421R-C 2207-900 Rev. J 11/11 35 Three Elbows H, Maximum V, Minimum H2 H,,+ H2 Maximum 2ft. 610mm 6in. 152mm 2ft. 610 mm 4ft. 1.2.m 3 ft. 914 mm 1 ft. 305 mm 4 ft. . 1.2 m. 7 ft. 2.1 m 5ft. 1.5m 2ft. 61.0mm 6ft. 1.8m 11 ft. 3.4m 7ft. 2.1 m aft. 914mm 8ft. 2.4m 15ft. 8ft 2.4m 4ft. 1.2m 10ft. 3.1 m 18ft. �55 H,=8ft(2.4m)Max. V,+V2+H,+HZ 40 ft (12.2 m) Max. H, + H2 =20 ft (6.1 m) Max. H, 142 H3. V, Minimum H, + H2 + H3 Maximum * 8ft. 2.4m Eft. 1.8m * 9ft.. 2.7m 7ft. 2.1 m . 10 ft. 3.1 m _ 8 ft. 2.4 m . * * 10ft. 3.1 m 1 8ft. 2.4m V, + H, + H2 + H3 = 40 ft. (12.2 m) Maximum. *No specific restrictions on this value EXCEPT V, + H, + H2 + H3 cannot exceed 40 ft. (12.2 m) Maximum H + H + H = 8 ft. (2.4 m) Maximum 8 Vent Clearances and Framing A. Pipe Clearances to Combustibles WARNING/ Risk of Firel Maintain airspace clearance to vent. DO NOT pack insulation or other combustibles: • Between ceiling firestops • Between wall shield firestops .• Around vent system Failure to keep insulation or other material away from vent pipe may cause overheating and fire. Note: Heat shields MUST overlap by a minimum of 1-1r2 in. (38 mm). DVP heat shield - designed to be used on a wall 4 in. to 7-1/4 in. (102 mm to 184 mm) thick. If wall thickness is less than 4 in. the existing heat shields must be field trimmed. If wall thickness is greater than 7-1/4 in. a DVP-HSM-B will be required. SLIP heat shield - designed to be used on a wall 43/8 in. to 7-5/8 in. (111 mm to 194 mm thick). If wall thickness is less than 4-3/8 the existing heat shields must be field trimmed. If wall thickness is greater than 75/8 in. a DVP-HSM-B will be required. (DVPSLP Pipe Shown) Heat 3 in. (76 mm) 3 in. (76 mm) Shiel0 Ftop dearence' top clearance Heat I L7_ Shield 1 in. (25 mm) clearance around vertical sections d11U 1 in. (25 mm) Wall clearance Shield bottom & sides Firestop Heat 3 in. (76 mm) Shield top clearance Heat Shield r. ++l 1 I `1 in. (25 mm) Wall clearance Shield bottom & sides Firestop WALL When using SLID or SL-D pipe, minimum clearances from the vent pipe to combus- tible materials at inside wall firestops are: Top: 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) Bottom: 1r2 in. (13 mm) Sides: 1 In. (25 mm) Figure 8.1 Horizontal Venting Clearances To Combustible Materials B. Wall Penetration Framing. Combustible Wall Penetration Whenever a combustible wall is penetrated, you must frame a hole for the wall shield firestop(s). The wall shield firestop maintains minimum clearances and prevents cold air infiltration. . • The opening must be framed on all four sides using the same size framing materials as those used in the wall .construction. • SLP pipe -A wall shield firestop must be placed on each side of an interior wall. A minimum 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) overlap of attached heat shields must be maintained. • DVP pipe -A wall shield firestop is required on one side only on interior walls. If your local inspector requires a wall shield firestop on both sides, then both wall shield firestops must have a heat shield (refer to Section 16.6.) attached to them. • See Section 10.L. for information for regarding the in- stallation of a horizontal termination cap. Non -Combustible Wall Penetration If the hole being penetrated is surrounded by noncom- bustible materials such as concrete, a hole with diameter one inch greater than the pipe is acceptable. Whenever a noncombustible wall is penetrated, the wall. shield firestop is only required on one side and no heat shield is necessary. 10 In. � 121n. O . i - I D 0 OC�7 10In. 121n. A' Ig• ' Shows center of vent framing hole for top or rear venting. The center of the hole is one (1) in. (25.4 mm) above the center of the horizontal vent pipe. Figure 8.2 Wall Penetration CD4236 in. 42-3/4 27-7/8 41-3/4 26-7/8 mm 1086 708 1060 683 CD4842 in. 44-3/4 29-7/8 44-1/8 28-7/8 Min 1137 759 1111 733 Heatilator CD42361R-C, CD48421R-C •. 2207-900 Rev. J 11/11 37 C. Install the Ceiling Firestop A ceiling firestop MUST be used between floors and attics. • DVP pipe only - Frame an opening 10 in. by 10 in. (254 mm by 254 mm) whenever the vent penetrates a ceiling/floor (see Figure 8.3). • SLP pipe only - Frame opening 9 in. x 9 in. (229 mm x 229 mm) whenever the vent penetrates a ceiling/floor (see Figure 8.3). • Frame the area with the same sized lumber as used in ceiling/floor joist. • The ceiling firestop may be installed above or below the ceiling joists when installed with a attic insulation shield. It must be under joists between floors that are not insulated. Refer to Figure 8.4. • Secure with three fasteners on each side. WARN/NGI Risk of Firel DO NOT pack insu- lation around the vent. Insulation must be kept back from the pipe to prevent overheating. I ATTIC ABOVE I I I II i A I I A I �c o 0 0 PIPE A DVP 10 in. (254 mm) SLP 9 in. (229 mm) INSTALL ATTIC INSULATION SHIELDS BEFORE OR AFTER INSTALLATION OF VENT SYSTEM 3FASTENERS PER SIDE r L 1 1 CEILINGIFIRESTOP CEILING FIRESTOP INSTALLED BELOW CEILING INSTALLED ABOVE CEILING Figure 8.4 Installing the Attic Shield 38 Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD48421R-C 4 2207-900 Rev. J 11/11 D. Install Attic Insulation Shield WARN/NGI Fire Risk. DO NOT allow loose materials or insulation to touch vent. Hearth & Home Technologies Inc. requires the use of an attic shield. The National Fuel Gas Code ANSI Z223.1 and NFPA 54 requires an attic shield constructed of 26 gauge minimum metal that extends at least 2 in. (51 mm) above insulation. Attic shields must meet specified clearance and be se- cured in place. Flat Ceiling Installation • Remove one shield from box. NOTICE: Cut previously installed batt insulation to make room for the attic insulation shield. • Wrap shield around pipe if pipe is already installed in area to be insulated. • Match the three holes in each side and fasten with three screws to form a tube. • Bend three tabs on the bottom of the shield outward to allow attachment to the ceiling firestop. • .Bend the remaining bottom tabs inward 900 to maintain the air space between the pipe and the shield. Set the shield on the ceiling firestop and attach to the firestop. • Bend all tabs inward 900 around the top of the shield. These tabs must be used to prevent blown insulation from getting between the shield and vent pipe, and to maintain air space clearance. Vaulted Ceiling Installation • Remove one shield from box. NOTICE: Cut previously installed Batt insulation to make room for the attic insulation shield. • Cut the attic insulation shield (if application is for vaulted ceiling) to fit your ceiling pitch. Snip cut edge to recreate 1 in. bend tabs all the way around the bottom. • .Wrap shield around pipe if pipe is already installed in area to be insulated. • Match the three holes in each side and fasten with three screws to form a tube. • Bend three -tabs on the bottom of the shield outward to allow attachment to the ceiling firestop. • Bend the remaining bottom tabs inward 900 to maintain the air space between the pipe and the shield. Set the shield on the ceiling firestop and attach to the firestop. • Bend all tabs inward 900 around the top of the shield. These tabs must be used to prevent blown insulation from getting between the shield and vent pipe, and to maintain air space clearance. BEND ALL TABS INWARD 90• TO MAINTAIN CLEARANCE AND PREVENT INSULATION FROM FALLING INSIDE BEND 3 TABS OUTWARD TO FASTEN TO CEILING FIRESTOP-BEND REMAINING TABS INWARD 90 DEGREES TO MAINTAIN INSERT 3 SCREWS Figure 8.5 Attic Insulation Shield E. Installing the Optional Heat -Zone® Gas Kit F • Remove the knockout from the fireplace and discard it (see Figure 8.6). • Center the duct collar around the exposed hole and attach it to the fireplace with 3 screws. Note: Do this BEFORE final positioning of fireplace. • Determine the location for the air register/fan housing assembly. Reference the Heat -Zone® Gas kit instructions for the remaining installation steps. , Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C • 2207-900 Rev: J • 11/11 39 r gAppliance Preparation A. Top Vent NOTICE: Once the seal cap has been removed it CANNOT CAUTION1 Risk of Cuts, Abrasions or Flying Debris. be reattached. Wear protective gloves and safety glasses during instal- lation. Sheet metal edges are sharp. NOTICE. Once appliance is set up for top or rear venting, it CANNOT be changed at a later time. Figure 9.1 Cut the seal cap strap across the rectangles next to the disk. For rear vent, skip this step. Figure 9.2 Remove the white gasket material covering the seal cap. Figure 9.4 Remove the insulation basket and white insu- lation from the center vent pipe. Figure 9.6 Remove the insulation from the outer vent pipe. For rear venting there is no insulation in the outer vent pipe. Figure 9.3 Remove the seal cap. 40 Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C • 2207-900 Rev. J 11/11 Figure 9.6 To attach the first section of vent pipe, make sure to use the fiberglass gasket in the manual bag to seal between the first vent component and the outer fireplace wrap. Use 2 self tapping screws to,secure the gasket to the outer wrap. Secure the first section of venting to the fireplace by screw- ing through the two straps left over from cutting the seal cap strap in step 2. B. Rear Vent - 5 I CAUTIONI Risk of Cuts, Abrasions or Flying Debris. Wear protective gloves and safety glasses during instal- lation. Sheet metal edges are sharp. NOTICE. Once appliance is set up for top or rear venting, it CANNOT be changed at a later time. Figure 9.7 Fold the tabs toward the center of the seal cap (900) and remove the insulation gasket. Figure 9.9 Fold the center parts of the retaining band out and use to remove the seal cap. NOTICE. Once the seal cap has been removed it CANNOT be reattached. Figure 9.10 Discard the vent cap, remove and discard the insulation basket. Figure 9.8 Cut the metal retaining band and fold';the sides out. Heatilator CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C 2207-900 Rev. J 11/11 41 Figure 9.11 Attach the first vent section (it will `snap into: place). Slide the insulation gasket onto the vent section, up against the appliance and over the tabs. - '' r C. Installing the Non-combustible Boardl ; The factory supplied non-combustible board spans the dis-' tance from the top of the fireplace to the center of the framing' header. This board must be used. See Figure 9.12. - i W _ Atr,-- .,.' •�........,..:;'..-m,..--- };� i (mot � .. •.Keep nailing tabs flush with the framing. • Level the appliance from side to side and front to back. • "Square" the unit by securing diagonal'dimensions to within 1/4 inch of each other. See Figure 9.13.. • Shim the appliance as necessary. It is acceptable to use , wood shims underneath the appliance. • Secure the appliance -to the framing by using nails or • screws through the nailing tabs. Secure the appliance to the floor by inserting two screws through the pilot holes at the bottom of the appliance. Figure 9.12 Non-combUstible Board D. Securing and Leveling the Appliance - WARNINGI Risk of Firel Prevent contact with: Sagging or loose insulation ' • Insulation backing or plastic • Framing and other combustible materials J. Block openings into the chase to prevent entry, of blown - in insulation. Make sure insulation and other materials are secured. DO NOT notch the framing around the "appliance . standoffs. , Failure, to maintain air space ,clearance may cause , overheating and fire. The diagram shows how to properly position and secure the appliance (see Figure 9.15). Nailing tabs are provided_ to secure the appliance to the framing members. • Bend out nailing tabs on each side. Place the appliance into position. 42 Heatilator, CD42361R-C, CD4842_ IR-C •.2207-900 Rev. J 11111 A B T7-1 O O Note: Diagonal dimensions (A) and (B) must be within 1/4 Inch of each other. Figure 9.13 Positioning the Appliance Squarely r 10 Installing Vent Pipe (DVP and SLP Pipe) A. Assemble Vent Sections (DVP Pipe Only) Attach Vent to the Firebox Assembly Note: The end of the pipe sections with the lanced tabs will face toward the appliance. Attach the first pipe section to the starting collar: • Lanced pipe end to the starting collar • Inner pipe over inner collar { • Push the pipe section until all lanced tabs snap in place • Lightly tug on pipe to confirm it has locked. Commercial, Mufti -family (Multi -level exceeding two sto- ries), or High42ise Applications All outer pipe joints must be sealed with silicone with a minimum of 300OF continuous exposure rating, including the slip section that connects directly to the horizontaliter- mination cap. • Apply a bead of silicone sealant inside the female outer pipe joint prior to joining sections. See Figure 10.1 I • Only outer pipes need to be sealed. All unit collar, pipe, slip section, elbow and cap outer flues shall be sealed in this manner, unless otherwise stated. I WARN/NGI Risk of Fire or Exp/osfonl DO NOT break silicone seals on slip sections. Use care when remov- ing termination cap from slip pipe. If slip section seals are broken during removal of the termination cap, vent may leak. . . t Assemble Pipe Sections Per Figure 10.2: • Start the inner pipe on the lanced end of section A into the flared end of section B. • Start the outer pipe of section A over the outer_ pipe of section B. • Once both vents sections are started, push firmly until all lanced tabs lock into place. • Lightly tug on the pipe to confirm the tabs have locked. It is acceptable to use screws no longer than 1/2 in.,(13 mm) to hold outer pipe sections together. If predrilling holes, DO NOT penetrate inner pipe. ' For 900 and 450 elbows that are changing the vent direction from horizontal to vertical, one screw minimum should be put in the outer flue at the horizontal elbow joint to prevent the elbow from rotating. Use screws no longer than ;1/2 in. (13 mm). If predrilling screw holes, DO NOT penetrate inner pipe. Figure 10.1 High Temperature Silicone Sealant Figure 10.2 Figure 10.3 Note: Make sure that the seams are not aligned to prevent unintentional disconnection: CORRECT 1. Figure 10.4 Seams INCORRECT Heatilator CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 43 W. B. Assemble Vent Sections (SLP Pipe Only) To attach the first vent component to the Starting collars of the appliance: • Attach a DVP-2SL or DVP-SLP24 adapter to the starting collar of the appliance. • Lock the vent components into place by sliding the pipe section onto the collar. • Align the seam of the pipe and seam of collar to allow engagement. Rotate the vent component to lock into place. Use this procedure for all vent components. See ti Figure 10.5. • Slide the gasket over the first vent section and place it flush to the appliance. This will prevent cold air infiltration. Caulk with a minimum of 300OF continuous exposure rating may be used to hold the part in place. • Continue adding vent components, lockingeach . succeeding component into place. ' • 'Ensure that each succeeding vent component is securely fitted and locked into the preceding component. Commercial, Multi -family (Mull -level exceeding `two sto- ries), or High4tise Applications For Installation into a commercial, multi 4am'ily (multi -level exceeding two stories) or high-rise applications: All outer pipe joints must be sealed with silicone with a minimum of 360OF continuous exposure rating, including the slip sec- tion that connects directly to the horizontal termination cap. ` • Apply a bead of silicone sealant inside the female outer pipe joint prior to joining sections. See Figure 10.1. • Only outer pipes need to be sealed. All unit collar, pipe, slip section, elbow and cap outer flues shall be sealed in this manner, unless otherwise stated: WARNING! Risk of Fire or Explosionl DO NOT break silicone seals on slip sections. Use care when remov- . ing termination cap from slip pipe.,lf slip section seals are broken during removal of the termination cap, vent C. Assemble Slip Sections . � r Slide the inner flue of the slip section into the inner flue of the pipe section and the outer flue of the slip section over the outer flue of the'pipe section. See Figure 10.6. • Slide together to the desired length. - Figure 10.6 Slip Section Pilot Holes • Maintain a 1-1/2'in. (38 mm) overlap between the slip section and the pipe section. • Secure the pipe andslip section with two screws no longer than 1/2 in. (13 mm), using the pilot holes in the slip section. See Figure 10.7. Figure 10.7, Screws Into Slip Section • Continue adding pipe as necessary following instructions - in "Assembling, Pipe Sections." NOTICE., lfslip section is too long, the innerand outerflues of the slip section can be cut to the desired length. NOTICE: When installing a vent system with an HRC termination cap, all pipe system joints shall be sealed using a high temperature silicone sealant. • Apply a bead of silicone sealant inside the female outer pipe joint prior to joining sections. • Only outer pipes are sealed, sealing the inner flue is not required. • All unit collar, pipe, slip. section, elbow and cap outer flues shall be sealed. 44 Heatilator CD42361R-C, CD48421R-C 2207-900 Rev. J 11/11 MCI A. Note: Align seams to engage pipe, then rotate counterclockwise to lock . Figure 10.5 Adding Venting Components 2 0 _ D. Secure the Vent Sections 1, �� E. Disassemble Vent Sections' R T r Vertical runs of DVP pipe `must be supported every 8 ft. _' •: ' Rotate either section (see Figure 10 .10) so the seams '(2.44 m) after,the 25 ft..(7.62 m) maximum unsupported on both pipe sections are aligned as shown in Figure rise. : , I t 10.11. , - • Vertical runs of SLP pipe must be supported every,8 ft. • -Pull carefully to separate the pieces of pipe. . (2.44 m). • Horizontal sections.must be'supported every ,5-feet' Fk • Vent supports or plumbers strap (spaced 1200apart) may be used to support vent sections. See Figures 10.8 g ......... and 10.9. • Wall shield firestops may be used to provide horizontal," .,. support vent sections. .413 .• i • SLP ceiling firestops have tab_ s that may be used to — provide vertical support. WARNING! Risk of Fire, Explosion or Asphyxiation!' Improper support may allow vent to sag and 'separate. Use vent run supports and connect vent sections per in- _ stallation instructions. DO NOT allow vent to 'sag below Figure 10.10 Rotate seams for Disassembly connection point to appliance. F • h - • ' t• + Heatilator,• CD42361R-C, CD48421R-C 2207-900 Rev. J 11/11, - • . 45 F. Install Decorative Ceiling Components (SLP only) A decorative ceiling thimble can be installed on a flat ceil- ing through which the vent passes. The decorative ceiling thimble is used to cover the flrestop. • Seal the gap between the vent pipe and firestop using silicone with a minimum of 300OF continuous exposure rating to prevent cold air infiltration. • Install the decorative ceiling thimble by sliding it up to the ceiling and attaching it using the provided screws. A decorative cathedral ceiling support box can be installed on a cathedral ceiling through which the vent passes. • Use a plumb -bob to mark the center line of the venting system on the ceiling and drill a small hole through the ceiling and roof at this point. Locate the hole and mark the outline of the cathedral ceiling support box on the outside roof. • Remove shingles or other roof covering as necessary to cut the rectangular hole for the support box. Cut the hole 1 /8 in. (3 mm) larger than the support box outline. • Lower the support box through the hole in the roof until its bottom is at least 2 in. (51 mm) below the ceiling (Figure 10.12). • Level the support box both vertically and horizontally and temporarily tack it in place through the inside walls into the roof sheathing. • Use tin snips to cut the support box from the top corners down to the roof line and fold the resulting flaps to the roof. See Figure 10.13. • Nail the flaps to the roof AFTER running a bead of non hardening sealant between the flaps and the roof. WARN/NGI Risk of Firel Clean out ALL materials from inside the support box and complete the vertical vent nm and termination. LEVEL CATHEDRAL CEILING m ® m SUPPORT BOX m ® 2 In. (51 mm) MIN. BELOW FINISHED CEILING CUT HOLE 1/8 In. (3 mm) GREATER IN SIZE THAN 1 PATTERN OF SUPPORT BOX AS IT IS PROJECTED ONTO ROOF LINE -► t-- Figure 10.12 46 Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD48421R-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 G. Install Metal Roof Flashing a • See minimum vent heights for various pitched roofs (Figure 10.14) to determine the length of pipe to extend through the roof. ' • Slide the roof flashing over the pipe sections extending through the roof as shown in Figure 10.15.-• { HORIZONTAL - OVERHANG r> ..__ �x'v_..� 2 FT. 20 INCHES MIN. . VERTICAL MIN. WALL-' LOWEST ,:. 'DISCHARGE ;t• OPENING GAS DIRECT VENT + n TERMINATION CAP .r7. t X ..° 12 L ROOF PITCH IS X/ 12 a� r H (MIN.) - MINIMUM HEIGHT FROM ROOF TO LOWEST DISCHARGE OPENING,. Roof Pitch Flat to 6/12............................. H (Min.) Ft. ........... 1.0* Over 6/12 to 7/12................:...........1.25* ~ ' Over 7/12 to 8/12..............................1.5* Over 8/12 to 9/12................... :........... 2.0. Over 9/12 to 10/12............................. 2.5 Over 10/12 to 11/12......................... 3.25 Over 11/12 to 12/12............................ 4.0 ' Over 12/12 to,14/12........................... 5.0 ' Over 14/12 to 16/12.................. :.......... 6.0 Over 16/12 to 18/12..............:............ 7.0, Over 18/12 to 20/12:.......................... 7.5 Over 20/12 to 21/12..........:.....:.......... 8.0 * 3 foot minimum in snow regions Figure 10.14 Minimum Height From Roof To Lowest Discharge Opening NOTICE. Failure to property caulk the roof flashing,and pipe seams may permit entry of water.• • Caulk the gap between the roof flashing and the outside diameter of the pipe. • Caulk the perimeter of the flashing where it contacts the roof surface. See Figure 10.15. • Caulk the overlap seam of any exposed pipe sections that are located above the roof line. H. Assemble and Install Storm Collar CAUTION/ Risk of Cuts, Abrasions or Flying Debris. Wear protective gloves and safety glasses during installa- tion: Sheet metal edges are sharp: • Connect both halves of the storm collar with two screws ' (see Figure 10.16): Wrap the storm collar around the exposed pipe section closest to the roof and align brackets. Insert a bolt (provided) through the brackets and tighten the nut to complete the storm collar assembly. Make sure the collar is tight against the pipe section. • Slide the assembled storm collar down the pipe section until it rests on the roof flashing (see Figure 10.17). • Caulk around the top of the storm collar (see Figure 10.18). i Figure 10.,16 Assembling the Storm Collar A� I Figure 10.17 Assembling,tlie�Storm Collar Around the Pipe Heatilator CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 47 I. Install Vertical Termination Cap ' y. • Attach the vertical termination cap by sliding the inner collar of the cap into the inner flue of the pipe section while placing the outer collar.of the cap over the outer . flue of the pipe section. Secure the cap by driving three self-tappingscrews (supplied) through the pilot holes in the outer collar of the cap into the outer flue of the pipe (see Figure 10.18). TERMINATION CAP M 1 i L (1 of 3) STORM COLLAR SCREWS CAULK q •� 4 n J. Install Decorative Wall Components (SLP z. only) , A decorative wall thimble can be installed on wall through which the vent passes. The decorative_ wall thimble is'used to cover the wall shield firestop. • Slide the decorative wall thimble over the last section of horizontal pipe before connecting the termination cap to the pipe. • Once the pipe section and the termination cap have been connected, slide the wall thimble up to the interior wall surface and attach with screws provided. See Figure 10.19. K. Heat ,Shield Requirements for Horizontal _Termination n WARNINGI Risk of Firel To prevent overheating and fire, heat shields must extend through the entire wall thick- ness. DO NOT remove the heat shields attached to the wall shield firestop and the horizontal termination cap ' (shown in Figure 10.20): . o.Heat-shields must overlap 1-112 in. (38 mm) mini- mum. There are two sections of the heatshield. One section As factory -attached to the wall rshield firestop. The other section is factory -attached to the cap. See Figure 10.20. If the wall thickness does not allow the required 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) heat shield overlap when installed, an extended heat shield must be used. • If the wall thickness is less than 4 in./102 mm (DVP) or 4-3/8 in./ 111 mm (SLIP), the heat shields on the cap and wall shield firestop must be trimmed. A minimum • 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) overlap MUST be maintained. • Use an extended heat shield if the finished wall thickness is greater than 7-1/4 in. (184 mm). o The extended Heat shield may need to be cut to length ' maintaining sufficient length for a 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) overlap between heat shields. • Attach the extended heat shield to either of the existing heat shields using the screws supplied with the extended heat shield.. Refer to vent components diagrams in the back of this manual. • Rest the small leg on the extended heat shield on top of the pipe section to properly space it from the pipe 'section. Important Notice: Heat shields may be field constructed. 48 Heatilator CD42361R-C, CD48421R-C 2207-900 Rev. J 11/11 y . n L: Install Horizontal Termination Cap (DVP and SLP Pipe) WARN/NGI Risk of Firel The telescoping flue section of the termination cap MUST be used when connecting vent. • 1-112 (38 mm) minimum overlap of flue telescoping section is required. Failure to maintain overlap may cause overheating and fire. • Vent termination must not be recessed in the wall. Siding may be brought to the edge of the cap base. • Flash and seal as appropriate for siding material at outside edges of cap. • When installing a horizontal termination cap, follow the cap location. guidelines as prescribed by current ANSI Z223.1 and CAN/CGA-B149 installation codes and refer to Section 6 of this manual. CAUT/ONI Risk of Bumsl Local codes may require in- stallation of a cap shield to prevent anything or anyone from touching the hot cap. NOTICE. For certain exposures which require superior resistance to wind -driven rain penetration, a flashing kit and HRC caps are available. When penetrating a brick wall, a brick extension kit is available for framing the brick. . Note: When using termination caps with factory -supplied heat shield attached, no additional wall shield firestop is required on the exterior side of a combustible wall. HEATSHIELDOR HEAT SHIELD EXTENDED 1-0/21N. (38 MM) MIN. WALL SHIELD 'HEATSHIELD OVERLAP - FlRESTOP' / VCASLIP SECTION - N BE EXTENDED INNER VENT SHEATHING OUTER VENT INTERIOR - EXTERIOR . VENT DEPTH FROM BACK OF APPLIANCE TO OUTSIDE SURFACE OF EXTERIOR WALL -► (SEE CHART BELOW) Figure 10.20 Venting through the wall Cap Specification Chart (depth without using additional pipe sections) DVP-TRAPKI DVP-TRAP1 DVP-TRAPK DVP-TRAP2 Top Vent Rear Vent I Top Vent 1 Rear Vent 2-3/4 In. to 3-1/8 In. to 5-1/8 In. to 5-1/2 In. to CD4236 4-5/8 In. 1 51n. 1 9-1181n. 9-1/2 In. CD4842 Series DVP-HPC1 I DVP-HPC1 I DVP-HPC2 DVP-HPC2 Top Vent Rear Vent Top Vent Rear Vent 12-3/4 In. to 13-1/8 In. to 14-7/8 In. to 15-1/4 In. to 4-7/8 In. 5-1/4 In. 9 In. 9-3/8 In. DVP-TRAP1 can adjust 1-1/2 In. (3-1/8 to 4-5/8 In.) DVP-TRAP2 can adjust 4 In. (5-3/8 to 9-3/8) DVP-HPC1 can adjust 2-1/8 In. (4-1/4 to 6-3/8) DVP-HPC2 can adjust 4-1/8 In. (6-3/8 to 10-1/2) Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 49 11 Gas Information A. Fuel Conversion • ' Make sure the appliance is compatible with available gas types. • Conversions must be made by a qualified service technician using Hearth & Home Technologies specified and approved parts. B. Gas Pressure • Optimum appliance performance requires proper input pressures. • Gas line sizing requirements will be determined in ANSI Z223.1 National Fuel Gas Code in the USA and CAN/ CGA B149 in Canada. • *Pressure requirements are: Gas Pressure Natural Gas Propane Minimum inlet pressure 5.0 in. w.c. 11.0 in. w.c. Maximum inlet pressure 10.0 in. w.c. 13.0 in. w.c. Manifold pressure 3.5 in. w.c. 1 10.0 in. w.c. WARN/NGI Risk of Fire or Explosion/ High pressure will damage valve. Low pressure may cause explosion. • Verify inlet pressures. Verify minimum pressures when other household gas appliances are operating. • Install regulator upstream of valve if line pressure is greater than 1/2 psig. A WARNING Fire Risk. Explosion Hazard. High pressure will damage valve. • Disconnect gas supply piping BEFORE pressure testing gas line at test pressures above 1/2 psig. • Close the manual shutoff valve BEFORE pressure testing gas line at test pressures equal to or less than 1/2 psig. Note: Have the gas supply line installed in accordance with local codes, if any. If not, follow ANSI 223.1. Installation should be done by a qualified installer approved and/or licensed as required by the locality. (In the Commonwealth of Massachusetts installation must be performed by a licensed plumber or gas fitter). C. Gas Connection • Refer to Reference Section 16 for location of gas line access in appliance. • Gas line may be run through knockout(s) provided. • The gap between supply piping and gas access hole may be caulked with caulk with a minimum of 300OF continuous exposure rating or stuffed with non-combustible, unfaced insulation to prevent cold air infiltration. • Ensure that gas line does not come in contact with outer wrap of the appliance. Follow local codes. • Pipe incoming gas line into valve compartment. • Connect incoming gas line to the 1/2 in. (13 mm) connection on manual shutoff valve. WARN/NGI Risk of Fire or Exp/osionl Support control when attaching pipe to prevent bending gas line. • A small amount of air will be in the gas supply lines. WARNING! Risk of Fire or Explosion! Gas build-up dur- ing line purge could ignite. • Purge should be performed by qualified service technician. • Ensure adequate ventilation. • Ensure there are no ignition sources such as sparks or open flames. Light the appliance. It will take a short time for air to purge from lines. When purging is complete the appliance will light and operate normally. WARNING/ Risk of Fire, Explosion or Asphyxiation/ Check all fittings and connections with a non -corrosive commercially available leak -check solution. DO NOT use open flame. Fittings and connections could have loos- ened during shipping and handling. WARNING/ Risk of Firel DO NOT change valve settings. This valve has been preset at the factory. D. High Altitude Installations NOTICE. If the heating value of the gas has been reduced, these rules do not apply. Check with your local gas utility or authorities having jurisdiction. When installing above 2000 feet elevation: • In the USA: Reduce burner orifice 4% for each 1000 feet above 2000 feet. Note: A listed (and. Commonwealth of Massachusetts ap- • In CANADA: Reduce burner orifice 10% for elevations proved) 1/2 in. (13 mm) T-handle manual shut-off valve between 2000 feet and 4500 feet. Above 4500 feet, and flexible gas connector are connected to the 1/2 in. (13 consult local gas utility. mm) control valve inlet. • If substituting for these components, please consult local codes for compliance. 50 Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 wl 12 Electrical Information A. Wiring Requirements NOTICE: This appliance must be electrically wired and grounded in accordance with local codes or, in the absence of local codes, with National Electric Code ANSI/NFPA 70-latest edition or the Canadian Electric Code CSA C22.1. • Wire the appliance junction box to 110-120 VAC. This is required for use of optional accessories (standing pilot ignition) or proper operation of the appliance (IntelliFire PIusTM ignition). • All 0-120 VAC circuit for this product must be protected with ground -fault circuit -interrupter protection, in compliance with the applicable electrical codes, when it is installed in locations such as in bathrooms or near sinks. • Low voltage and 110 VAC voltage cannot be shared within the same wall box. WARNING! Risk of Shock or Exp/osionl DO NOT wine 110V to the valve or to the appliance wall switch. Incorrect wiring will damage controls. - TO JUNCTION BOX (110V) F ;J� Figure 12.1 IPI Wiring Diagram B. IntelliFire Plus"m Ignition System Wiring • Wire the appliance junction box to 110 VAC for proper operation of the appliance. WARNING! Risk of Shock or Explosion/ DO NOT wire IPI controlled appliance junction box to a switched circuit. Incorrect wiring will override IPI safety lockout. • Refer to Figure 12.1, IPI.Wiring Diagram. • This appliance is equipped with an IntelliFire PIusTM control valve which operates on a 6 volt system. • Plug the 6 volt transformer plug into the appliance junction box to supply power to the unit OR install 4 AA cell batteries (not included) into the battery pack before use. C. Optional Accessories Requirements This appliance may be used with a wall switch, wall mounted thermostat and/or a remote control. Wiring for optional Hearth & Home Technologies approved accessories should be done now to avoid reconstruction., Follow instructions that come with those accessories. • Hearth & Home Technologies recommends that Intel- liFire PIusTM wireless controls be used for their features and functionality with the IntelliFire PIusTM ignition sys- tem. Ell FLAME IGNITOR SENSE MODULE Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 51 D. Electrical Service and Repair WARNING! Risk of Shockl Label all wires prior to discon- nection when servicing controls. tiring errors can cause improper and dangerous operation. Verify proper opera- tion after servicing. WARNING! Risk of Shockl Replace damaged wire with type 1050 C rated wire. Wire must have high temperature insulation. E. Junction Box Installation If the box is being wired from the INSIDE of the appli- ance: • Remove the screw attaching the junction box/receptacle to the outer shell, rotate the junction box inward to disengage it from the outer shell (see Figure 12.2). • Pull the electrical wires from outside the appliance through the opening into the valve compartment and secure wires with a Romex connector. See Figure 12.2. • Make all necessary wire connections to the junction boxtreceptacle and reattach the junction box/receptacle to the outer shell. F. Wall Switch Installation for Fan (Optional) ' If the box is being wired to a wall mounted switch for use . with a fan (See Figure 12.3): • The power supply for the appliance must be brought into a switch box. • The power can then be supplied from the switch box to the appliance using a minimum of 14-3 with ground wire. • At the switch box connect the black (hot) wire and red (switch leg) wire to the wall switch as shown. • At the appliance connect the black (hot), white (neutral) and green (ground) wires to the junction box as shown. ' • .Add a 1/4 in. insulated female connector to the red (switch leg) wire, route it through the knockout in the face of the junction box, and connect to the top fan switch connector (114 in. male) as shown- ;.3 Romex Connector �. 14/2WG S°, ji * A' s �,•s. 0 { r,'� fix', i �. i y �. Cover Plate outside firebox °D Copper b . GRN wire ground attached inside box to GRN screw with O GRN wire NOTICE. DO NOT wire 110 VAC to wall switch. Figure 12.2 Junction Box Detail. Switch Minimum 14-3AWG r with Ground Junction Box �"•�` o Switch Box Power Supply o °jD o ID c e Wires �* Knockout Red Figure 12.3 Junction Box Wired to Wall Switch or BC10 i 52 Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C 2207-900 Rev. J 11/11 Finishing 13'�g A. Mantel and Wall Projections B. Facing Material WARNING! Risk of Fidel Comply with all minimum clear- • Metal front faces may be covered with non-combustible ances as specified. Framing closer than the minimums listed materials only. must be constructed entirely of noncombustible materials • Facing and/or finishing materials must not interfere with (i.e., steel studs, concrete board, etc.) air flow through louvers, operation of louvers or doors, Combustible Mantels or access for service. TO CEILING 1s 12 10 32 9 8 2s 7 19 s 18 s 17 1s 1s 14 13 r1112 11 1, MEASUREMENTSFROM TOP EDGE OF THE OPENING Figure 13.1 Minimum Vertical and Maximum Horizontal Dimensions Mantel Legs or Wall Projections Top of Appliance Drywall 1-Mantel Leg or Perpendicular Wall A 1 in. (25 mm) min. to perpendicular wall B 3-1/2 in. (89 mm) min. from fireplace opening to perpendicular wall Figure 13.2 Mantel Leg or Wall Projections (Acceptable on both sides of opening) Facing and/or finishing materials must never overhang into the glass opening. • Observe all clearances when applying combustible materials. • Seal joints between the finished wall and appliance top and sides using a 300 OF minimum sealant. Refer to Figure 13.3. WARN/NGI Risk of Fire/ DO NOT apply combustible materials beyond the minimum clearances. Comply with all minimum clearances to combustibles as specified in this manual. Overlapping materials could ignite and will interfere with proper operation of doors and louvers. B FACTORY -INSTALLED NON-COMBUSTIBLE BOARD DO NOT REMOVE A • O O A B CD4236 inches 39-3/4 41 millimeters 1010 1041 CD4842 inches 41-3/4 48 millimeters 1060 1219 Figure 13.3 Noncombustible Facing Diagram Heatilator CD42361R-C, CD48421R-C •. 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 53 1T 14 Appliance Setup A. Remove Fixed Glass Assembly See Section 14.H. B. Remove the Shipping Materials Remove shipping materials from inside or underneath the firebox. C. Clean the Appliance Clean/vacuum any sawdust that may have accumulated inside the firebox or underneath in the control cavity. D. Accessories Install approved accessories per instructions included with accessories. Contact your dealer for a list of ap- proved accessories. WARNING! Risk of Fire and Electric Shockl Use ONLY Hearth & Home Technologies -approved optional acces- sories with this appliance. Using non -listed accessories could result in a safety hazard and will void the warranty. E. Ember Placement WARNING! Risk of Explosion/ Follow ember placement instructions. DO NOT place ember directly over burner ports. Replace embermaterial annually. Improperly placed ember material interferes with proper bumer operation. Place the Ember Material See Figures 14.1 and 14.2. Place a small amount of 1/2 in. diameter pieces (dime -size) of ember material on the burner top. Be careful not to cover burner ports. It is not necessary to use the entire bag. Save the remaining amount for future use. WARN/NGI Risk of Exp/osionl Follow ember placement instructions. DO NOT place embers directly over burner ports. Replace ember material annually. Improperly placed embers interfere with proper burner operation. Ember material is shipped with this gas appliance. To place the ember material: • Embers CANNOT be placed directly over ports. Care should be taken not to cover the lighting trail of ports (from back to front). • Place dime -size pieces of Glowing Embers® just in front of the port trail, but not on or in between the ports (see Figure 14.2). Care should be taken so that the ports are not covered. Failure to follow this procedure will likely cause lighting and sooting problems. Figure 14.1 Placement of Embers f VerrNcuGle and Vemdcurite anc lava rock ;�`•••., ��'% lava rock placement on placement on sides and front aides and front of hearth pan. ..................... of heats pen. Figure 14.2 Placement of Embers F. Place the Lava Rock and Vermiculite See Figures 14.3 and 14.4. Lava rock should be evenly spread on firebox bottom, It is not necessary to use the entire bag. Save the remaining amount for future use. Figure 14.3 Placement of Lava Rock Spread vermiculite in a light, even pattern on top of lava rock. It is not necessary to use the entire bag. Save the remaining amount for future use. Figure 14.4 Placement of Vermiculite 54 Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 G. Install the Log Assembly Log Set Assembly: LOGS-4236, LOGS-4842 Models: CNXT42361T-C, CNXT48421T-C, CNXT42361H-C, CNXT48421H-C CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C CAUTION: Logs are fragile, handle with care. Log A: SRV2208-702 Log 13: SRV2208-703 Log C: SRV2208-704 Log D: SRV2208-073 (4236 models) SRV2211-073 (4842 models) Figure 1. Base Logs Figure 2. Left Log and Right Log Reference Points Figure 3. Left Log In Proper Position LOG PLACEMENT INSTRUCTIONS 1. Base logs have been permanently mounted on the grate assembly. Do not attempt to remove or relocate the logs. See Figure 1. 2. Be sure the left end of log A is not covering ports. Slide the left end of log A back if it's covering ports. See Figure 2. 3. Left log placement (SRV2208-705) : Mate rear and front faces of left log with indentations on rear and base logs as shown in Figure 2 and Figure 3. Slide the left log back. 4. Right log placement (SRV2208-706) : Place the right log by positioning the front "V" of the log on the indentation on the base log and resting the rear of the log on the flat area of the rear log. See Figure 2 and Figure 4. 5. Figure 4 shows the Left and Right Logs properly placed. Both Left and Right Logs should sit securely on the rear and corresponding base logs. Figure 4. Left and Right Log In Proper Position Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 55 H. Fixed Glass Assembly WARNING/ Risk of Asphyxiationl Handle fixed glass assembly with care. Inspect the gasket to ensure it is undamaged and inspect the glass for cracks, chips or scratches. • DO NOT strike, slam or scratch glass. • DO NOT operate fireplace with glass removed, cracked, broken or scratched. • Replace as a complete assembly. Removing Fixed Glass Assembly • Pull the four glass assembly latches out of the groove on the glass frame. Remove glass door from the appliance (see Figure 14.5). Replacing Fixed Glass Assembly • Replace the glass door on the appliance. Pull out and latch the four glass assembly latches into the groove on the glass frame. I. Install Trim and/or Surround • Install optional trim kits and/or surrounds using the .instructions included with the accessory. • Use non-combustible materials to cover the gap between the sheet rock and the appliance (when applicable to the model). J. Air Shutter Setting Air shutter settings should be adjusted by a qualified ser- vice technician at the time of installation. The air shutter is set at the factory for minimum vertical vent run. Adjust air shutter for longer vertical runs. See Figure 14.6. o Loosen the wing nut. Move the air handle to the right to open the air shutter. • Move the air handle to the left to close the air shutter. • Tighten the wing nut. NOTICE. If sooting occurs, provide more air by opening the air shutter. Air Shutter Settings NG LP CD42361R-C 1/8 in. 5/8 in. CD4842IR-C 5/16 in. Fully Open 56 Heatilator CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 Cf 15 Troubleshooting With proper installation, operation, and maintenance your gas appliance will provide years of trouble -free service. If you do experience a problem, this troubleshooting guide will assist a qualified service technician in the diagnosis of a problem and the corrective action to be taken. This troubleshooting guide can only be used by a qualified service technician. Contact your dealer to arrange a service call by a qualified service technician. A. IntelliFire PlusTm Ignition System Symptom Possible Cause Corrective Action 1. Pilot won't light. A. Incorrect wiring. Verify "S" wire (white) for sensor and "I" wire (orange) for ignitor are The ignitor/module connected to correct terminals on module and pilot assembly. makes noise, but no spark. B. Loose connections or electrical Verify no loose connections or electrical shorts in wiring from mod - shorts in the wiring. ule to pilot assembly. Verify connections underneath pilot assembly are tight; also verify igniter and flame sense wires are not grounding out to metal chassis, pilot burner, pilot enclosure, mesh screen if present, or any other metal object. C. Ignitor gap is too large. Verify gap of igniter to right side of pilot hood. The gap should be approximately .17 in. or 1/8 in. (3 mm). 2. Pilot won't light, A. No power, transformer installed Verify that transformer is installed and plugged into module. Check there is no noise or incorrectly, or depleted batteries. voltage of transformer at connection to module. Acceptable read - spark. ings of a good transformer are between 6.4 and 6.6 volts AC. Bat- tery power supply voltage must be at least 4 volts. If below 4 volts, replace batteries. B. A shorted or loose connection in Remove and reinstall the wiring harness that plugs into module. Ver- wiring configuration or wiring har- ify there is a tight fit. Verify pilot assembly wiring to module. Remove ness. and verify continuity of each wire in wiring harness. Replace any damaged components. C. Improper wall switch wiring. Verify that 110NAC power is "ON" to junction box. D. Module not grounded. Verify black ground wire from module wire harness is grounded to metal chassis of appliance. 3. Pilot sparks, but A. Gas supply. Verify that incoming gas line ball valve is "open". Verify that inlet Pilot will not light: pressure reading is within acceptable limits. B. Ignitor gap is too large. Verify gap of igniter to right side of pilot hood. The gap should be approximately .17 in. or 1/8 in. (3 mm). C. Module is not grounded. Verify module is securely grounded to metal chassis of appliance. D. Pilot valve solenoid. Verify that 1.5 to 1.8 VDC is supplied to pilot solenoid from module. If below 1.5 volts, replace module. If 1.5 volts or greater, replace valve. Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 57 E Troubleshooting (continued) Symptom Possible Cause Corrective Action A. A shorted or loose connection in flame Verify all "connections to wiring diagram in manual. Verify 4. Pilot lights but contin- sensing rod. connections underneath pilot assembly are tight. Verify ues to spark, and main flame sense or igniter wires are not grounding out to metal burner will not ignite. chassis,.pilot burner, pilot enclosure onscreen if present, or (If the pilot continues any other metal object. to spark after the pilot flame has been lit, B. Poor flame rectification or contaminated With fixed glass assembly in place, verify that flame is en- flame rectification has flame. sensing rod. gulfing flame sensing rod on left side of pilot hood. Flame not occurred.) sensing rod should glow shortly after ignition. With a multi - meter, verify that current in series between module and sense lead is at least 0.14 microamps. Verify correct pilot orifice is installed and gas inlet is set to pressure specifi- cations. Polish flame sensing rod with fine steel wool to remove any contaminants that may have accumulated on flame sensing rod. C. Module is not grounded. Verify module is securely grounded to, metal chassis of ap- pliance. Verify that wire harness is firmly connected to the module. D. Damaged pilot assembly or.contami- Verify that ceramic insulator around the flame sensing rod nated flame sensing rod. is not cracked, damaged, or loose. Verify connection from flame sensing rod to white sensor wire. Polish flame sens- ing rod with fine steel wool to remove any contaminants that may have accumulated on flame sensing rod. Verify Conti- nuity with a multi -meter with ohms set at lowest range. Re- place pilot if any damage is detected. E. Module. Turn ON/OFF rocker switch or wall switch to OFF position. Remove ignitor. wire "I" from module. Place ON/OFF rocker switch or wall switch in ON position. If there is no spark at "I" terminal module must be replaced. If there is a spark at "I" terminal, module is fine. 58 1 Reference Materials A. Appliance Dimension Diagram Dimensions are actual appliance dimensions. Use for reference.only. For framing dimensions and clearances refer to Section 5. L - <—M—� - N I I Q E 1 0 0111180.. �P� I � E A� � I.—F—• LEFT SIDE FRONT VIEW RIGHT SIDE Location Inches Millimeters A 41 '1041 B 36-1/8 918 C 33-1/2 851 D 34-5/8 879 E 2-1/4 57 F 9-11/16 246 G 26-7/8 683 H 6 dia 152 I 39-7/8 1013 Figure 16.1 Appliance Dimensions CD42361R-C Models Location Inches Millimeters J 21 533 K 11-11/16 297 L 28-1/2 724 M 14-1 /4 362 N 8-1/2 216 O 2-7/8, 73 P 8-1/2 216 Q 1 25 R 40-7/8 1038 H I i Location Inches Millimeters J 21 533 K 11-11%16 297 L . 35-1 /2 . 901 M 17-3/4 451 N 8-1/2 216 O 2-7/8 73 P 8-1/2 216 Q 1. 25 R .42-7/8 1089 Location Inches Millimeters A 48 1219 B 43-1 /8 1096 C 34-3/8 873 D 36-5/8 930 E 2-3/8 60 F 9-15/16 252 G 28-7/8 734 H 6 152 1 41-7/8 1064 Figure 16.1 Appliance Dimensions CD48421R-C Models B. Vent Components Diagrams Effective Height/Length DVP Pipe (see than.) Assembled Height: 24 in./610 mm Diameter: 10 inJ254 mm . DVP-AS2 10 in. (254 mm) 1 Pipe Effective Length -Inches I Millimeters DVP4 4 102 DVP6 6 152 DVP12 12 305 DVP24 24 610 DVP36 36 914 DVP48 48 1219 DVP6A 3 to 6 76 to 152 DVP12A 3 to 12 76 to 305 DVP12MI 3 to 12 76 to 305 DVP24MI 3 to 24 76 to 610 10 in. 10 1 in. (254 mm) I (26 mm) DVP-FS (Ceiling Firestop) 10 in. 1-112 in. (254 mm) — —il (38 mm) UP 5 in. 12 in. (127 mm) (305 mm) 2L L:J—L DVP-HVS (Vent Support) Figure 16.2 DVP vent components 10-1/2 in. (267 mm) 4*5 4-7/8 in. ° (276 mm) 10-7/8 in. (276 mm) DVP45 (45° Elbow) 11-3/8 in. (289 mm) t 7-3/8 in. (187 mm) (32 mm) 9-1/4 in. (235 mm) 1/2 in. TYP 13-1/4 in. (13 mm) (337 mm) DVP90ST (90° Elbow) 12 in.) 1 I� 1 in. (305 mm) (25 mm) i I 8 in. (203 mm) i i 14 in: iyl (356 mm) -i-•-•-•-•- i �(152�mm� DVP-WS (Wall Shield Firestop) Heatilator CD42361R-C, CD48421R-C 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 61 B. Vent Components Diagrams (continued) Note: Heat shields MUST overlap by a minimum of 1-1/2 in. (38 mm). The heat shield is designed to be used on a wall 4 in. to 7-1/4 in. (102 mm to 184 mm) thick. If wall thickness is less than 4 in. (102 mm) the existing heat shields must be field trimmed. If wall thickness is greater than 7-1/4 in. (184 mm) a DVP-HSM-B will be required.. 15-1/8 in. (384 mm) f' 12in.� (305 mm) DVP-TRAP Horizontal Termination Cap DVP-TRAPK1 ru DVP-HPC1 Figure 16.3 DVP vent components 1 . IIIII III IIIII i�� it Max Effective Length Term Cap Minimum Effective Length Maximum Effective Length 3-1/8 in. 4-5/8 in. Trap1 79 mm 117 mm 5-3/8 in. 9-3/8 in. Trap2 137 mm 238 mm DVP-TRAP2 DVP-TRAPK2 DVP-HPC2 62 Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 B. Vent Components Diagrams (continued) 31in. (787 mm) 13-1/4 in. (367 mm) 24-5/8 ii (626 mm 24-5/8 in. 27-1/2 in. — (625 mm) \ , / � (127 mm) RF6M Roof Flashing Multi-pak 13-3/4 in. 5 in. (349 mm)� (127 mm)t 13-3/4 in. (349 mm) RF12M Roof Flashing Multi-pak 11-718 in. (302 min 13-7/8 in. (352 mm) BEK DVP-BEK2 Trap Cap Brick Extension DVP-HPC Cap Brick Extension 11-5/8 in. �� \ (295 mm)� 00 12-1/8 in. m 7-1/8 in. (308 mm) • (181 mm) ® (� L .I DVP-TRAPFL �5-3/4 in. Flashing (146 mm) . COOL -ADD Cap Shield 26 in. 660 mm C777= DVP-HSM-B . Extended Heat Shield Figure 16.4 DVP vent components r 13-7/8 in. 9-1/2 in. (352 mm) (24, 1 mm) 14 in. (356 mm) DRC-RADIUS Cap Shield Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 63 B. Vent Components Diagrams (continued) 7-3/8 in. (187 mm) 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) 17-3/4 in. 14 in. (451 mm) (356 mm) 12 in. (305 mm) DVP-TB1 BasementVent Cap DVP-TV VerticalTermination Cap ,Not for use with these models R\ HOT `Fillers DVP-TRAP to DVP-HPC Side Filler Kit . 12 In. PVK-80 7-1/4 In. (184 mm) (Not compatible with /ntellifire P/usTM'.) 12 1l2 (318 mm) (For use with /P/ and DS/ appliances only.) 6-1/4 in. 33 mm) DVP-TVHW 16-7/8 in. 14 in. VerticalTermination Cap (Highwind) 4 (429 mm) (356 mm) HOT 7-1/4 In. 1 In. (184 mm) (25 mm) 12 in. I (305 mm) 7-1/8 in. 14 in. 12-1/8 in. (181 mm) (356 mm) (314 mm 8-3/4 in. 318 in. (10 mm) —►j (222 mm) 1 In. (25 mm) 7-3/4 to 10-3/8 in. 1ti5/8 in. (197 to 264 mm) (41 mm) DVP-FBHT DVP-HPC FireBrickTermination Cap High Performance Cap Figure 16.5 DVP vent components 64 Heatilator CD42361R-C, CD48421R-C • 2207-900 Rev. J 11/11 15 in. (381 mm) 13.518 IN. 346 mm 12.112IN. 318 mm f ,;,_.` lOptlonal;Wi�e Harness ; .. Y� `1`1,a , 'DESCRIPTION ��{ `, �„PAftT NUMBEk4� 10 ft. PV Wire Harness PVI-WH10 20 ft. PV Wire Harness PVI-WH2O •40 ft. PV Wire Harness - -' PVI-WH40 . 60 ft. PV Wire Harness PVI-WH60 80 ft. PV Wire Harness PVI-WH80' 100 ft. PV Wire Harness PVI-WH100 ' 20.314IN. Note: Wire harnesses required to power the PVI-SLP 527 mm ' - % connect to the appliance and are ordered separately from " PVI-SLP. Contact your dealer to order. PVI-LP - Power Vent Inline 161N. 406 mm ` 4-1/2 IN. E-16IN. 114 mm (361 mm) e ` -3116IN.' r ` (233 mm) y r = s 13-5/8 1641/16 IN. 16.111% IN. , (346 mm) 424 mm (424 mm) - T 1 r f 0 124121 . A SLP-LPC ' (318mm) ,` - SLP Low Profile Cap 8-1/8-in. 13 in. (206 mm) (330 mm) Effective Length'- . - 5n. 146 too213/mm 140 mm 213n. / mm • 87° 10-1/2 in. 267 mm O 10-7/8 in. ' � �• 27I6Imm • i r DVP-HRC-SS r {.• DVP-HRC-ZC-SS r Figure 16.6 DVP vent components HORIZONTAL TERMINATION CAP ' Heatilator •, CD42361R-C, CD48421R-C • 2207-900 Rev. J 11/11 65 } B. Vent Components Diagrams (continued) �6-1/2 in. 165 mm 8-3/4 in. 6-1/2 in. 165 mm� 6-1/2 in. 165 mm 222 mm I 9-1/4 in. 6 in. i 235 mm 152 mm 6-5/8 in 168 mm t 6-5/8 in- SLP45 168 mm 45° Elbow 9-7/8 251 n.... SLP90 900 Elbow Effective Height/Length Effective Height/ Length L SLID PIPE Pipe inches mm SLP4 4 102 SLP6 6' 152 SLP12 12 305 SLP24 24 610 SLP36 36 914 SLP48 48 1219 SLP6A 2-6 51-152 SLP12A 2-12 51-305 SLP-HVS SLP-FS Horizontal Pipe Ceiling Firestop Support Figure 16.7 SLP Series Vent Components C:::1 DVP-SLP24 Adapter SLP-WS Wall Shield Firestop 66 Heatilator CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C • 2207-900 Rev. J 11/11 B. Vent Components Diagrams (continued) V ' Note: Heat shields MUST overlap by a minimum of 1-1/2 in. (38 mm). The heat shield is designed to be used on a wall 4 in. to 7-1/4 in. (102 mm to 184 mm) thick. If wall thickness is less than 4 in. (102 mm) the existing heat shields must be field trimmed. If wall thickness is greater than 7-1/4 in. (184 mm) a DVP-HSM-B will be required. 15-1/8 in. (384 mm) 12in.� (305 mm) SLP-TRAP Horizontal Termination Cap Uly Heat Shield maw Effective Length SLP-SNKD SLP-CCS-BK Snorkel Cathedral Ceiling Termination Cap Support Box -Black Minimum Maximum Term Cap Effective Length Effective Length 3-1/8 in. 4-3/4 in. Trap1 79 mm 121 mm 5-1/4 In. 9-1/4 In. Trap2 133 mm 235 mm SLP-TVHW Vertical Termination Cap 26 in. E 660 mm DVP-HSM-B Extended Heat Shield O SLP-DCF-BK SLP-WT-BK Ceiling Firestop Wall Thimble -Black Black Figure 16.8 SLP Series Vent Components Heatilator ° CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C ° 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 . 67 A WARNING Fire Risk. • When using SLP-HRC-SS and SLP-HRC-ZC- SS termination caps on top vented fireplaces, a one foot minimum vertical vent section is required before installing first elbow. • When using DVP-TB1 termination cap on top vented fireplaces, a three foot minimum vertical vent section is required before installing. first elbow. 8-1/8 in. 13 in. (206 mm) - I (330 mm) I Effective Length 5-3/4 to 8-3/8 in. 5-12 in. 8.3/8 in. . 146 to 213 mm 140 mm 213 mm 87. 3�I� — 15 in. (381 mm) O 4 SLP-HRC-SS SLP-HRC-ZCSS HORIZONTAL TERMINATION CAP 7-1/4 in. �- 1 in. (184 mm) (25 mm) 14 in. (356 mm) 3/8 in. (10 mm) = 1 in. (25 mm) r�--j . I 7-3/4 to 10-3/8 in. (197 to 264 mm) DVP-FBHT FireBrickTerrnination Cap 1412 in. I 267 mm O I 10.7/6 in. -IIL 276 mm LDS33/LDS46 Decorative Shroud Catalog # A B C D in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm LDS33 36 914 36 914 8.5 2161 11 279 LDS46 48 1219 72 1829 8.5 216 11 279 I Figure 16.9 I 68 Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 h, eafiMr• The first name in fireplaces C. Service Parts 36 in. Caliber - DV C D42361 R-C, C D42361 LR-C Beginning Manufacturing Date: Dec 2009 Ending Manufacturing Date: Log Set Assembly 7� 9� 8\1* p 10 �► O U• 14 11y 6 1�� 12 � ,I 17 13 21 18 - ' - 20 - �19 IMPORTANT: THIS IS DATED INFORMATION. When requesting service or replacement parts for your appliance please provide model number and serial number. All parts listed in this manual Stocked' may be ordered from an authorized dealer. 'at Depot �, 5 ITEM,. �' N DESCRIPTION _ . �' „? � , �'- - ..- . . -� W COMMENTS ::PART NUMBER Log Assembly LOGS-4236 Y 1 Log #1 SRV2208-702 2 Log #2 SRV2208-703 3 Log #3 SRV2208-704 4 Log #4 SRV2208-073 5 Log #5 SRV2208-705 6 Log #6 SRV2208-706 7 Insulation Board 2166-136 8 Refractory Back 2207-720 Left 2207-721 9 Refractory Side r Right 2207-722 10 Glass Heat Shield 2207-723 11 Grate Assembly 2208-015 Burner Assembly NG 2207-007 Y 12 Burner Assembly LP 2207-008 Y 13 Burner Skirt 2208-102 14 Glass Assembly GLA-600OG Y 15 Mesh Assembly 530-382A Y 16 Hood , . SRV60-143-BK 17 Louver Assembly, Top 2208-021 18 LouverAssembly, Bottom 2208-020 19 Valve Assembly Refer to valve page 20 Base Pan 2208-100 21 Junction Box (Plastic) 1 4021-013 Y Additional service part numbers appear on following page. Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C • 2207-900 Rev. J • 11/11 69 h, eafikWrm The first name in fireplaces Service Parts 42 in. Caliber - DV C D48421 R-C, C D48421 L R-C Beginning Manufacturing Date: Dec 2009 Ending Manufacturing Date: Log Set Assembly 7 8 5 4 6 9� v 3 fi 10 O "i 822 17�� \ 12 13 0.121 18 20 19 IMPORTANT: THIS IS DATED INFORMATION. When requesting service or replacement parts for your appliance please provide model number and serial number. All parts listed in this manual may be ordered from an authorized dealer. Stocked at Depot ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENTS PART NUMBER Log Assembly LOGS4842 Y 1 Log #1 SRV2208-702 2 Log #2 SRV2208-703 3 Log #3 SRV2208-704 4 Log #4 SRV2211-073 5 Log #5 SRV2208-705 6 `Log #6 SRV2208-706 7 Insulation Board 2170-136 8 Refractory Back 2210-720 9 Refractory Side Left 2210-721 Right 2210-722 10 Glass Heat Shield 2210-723 11 Grate Assembly 2211-015 Burner Assembly NG 2210-007 Y 12 Burner Assembly LP 2210-008 Y 13 Burner Skirt 2208-102 14 Glass Assembly GLA-950TR Y 15 Screen Assembly 560-382A Y 16 Hood SRV560-175 17 Louver Assembly, Top 2210-021 18 Louver Assembly, Bottom 2210-020 19 Valve Assembly Refer to valve page 20 Base Pan 2211-100 21 Junction Box (Plastic) 4021-013 Y 22 Exhaust Cover Shield 385-105 Additional service part numbers appear on following page. 70 Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C • 2207-900 Rev. J - 11/11 Service Parts -CD42361R-C, CD42361LR-C,�CD48421R-C, CD48421LR-C p�® y The first name in fireplaces ,. Beginning Manufacturing Date: Dec 2009 Ending Manufacturing Date: • #19 Valve Assembly, i 19.+ , 19.2 19.13� .3< ' r 19op '• 19.12� 19.4 - - 19.6� 19.10 a 19.919.8 19.7 IMPORTANT THIS IS DATED INFORMATION. When requesting service or replacement parts for your appliance please provide model number and serial number. All parts listed in this manual ;Stocked; may be ordered from an authorized dealer. T ' y o at.Depot +'ITEM„, DESCRIPTION��, COMMENTS jai y t PARTINUMBER�{'�;3 ,� _ _� Pilot Assembly - NG - 2208-012 Y Pilot Assembly - LP 2208-013 Y Pilot Tube SRV485-301 Y ,19.2 Pilot Bracket 2208-101 19.3 Burner Leg 2208-106 _ 19.4 Valve Bracket - 2118-104 19.5 Battery Pack" 2166-323 • Y ' 19.6 Power Supply 2166-305 Y 19.7 Flex Ball Valve Assembly, ' - 302-320A Y 19.8 Valve - NG ; ' 2166-302 Y Valve - LP 2166-303 Y 19.9 Male Connector T' Pkg of 5 303-315/5 Y 19.10 Bulkhead W/ Fllex 3 7000-156 - Y 19.11 Shutter Bracket Assembly 2118-121 Y 19.12 Wire Harness 2166-304 Y 19.13 Module 2166-307 Y Orifice (#37C) - NG 582-837 Y. CD42361R-C Orifice (#52C) - LP 582-852 Y Orifice (#33C) - NG 582-833 Y CD48421R-C Orifice(#51C) - LP • 77 582-851 Y "Fuse for battery pack can be sourced locally, not a warranty item. Specs are 500mA-10A 3/4" long Additional service part numbers appear on following page. Heatilator_• CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C •:2207-900 Rev. J 11/11� + ` j Service Parts CD42361R-C, CD42361LR-C,'CD48421R-C, CD48421LR-C IMPORTANT. THIS IS DATED INFORMATION. When requesting service or replacement FA «parts for your appliance please provide model number and serial -number. All parts listed ocd'in this manual may be ordered from an authorized dealer.- Depot' ITEM `r 1"'F ''ZESCRIPTIOW.:.;4 COMMENTS tCPART-NUMBER r `L- Clips, Hood Pkg of 24' 047-805-24 Y Clips, Mesh Pkg of 24 2005-192-24 Y Exhaust Cover Shield 385-105 Flue Restrictor 385-128 t Gasket Assembly Includes Burner Neck, Vent, Valve LED, and Air Shutter Gaskets 2166-081 Glass Clip Support Assembly Pkg of 2 33858/2 . Y Jumper Wires 2187-198 Y" Lava Rock Bag Assembly _ 4040-094 Lava Rock 4021-297 Mineral Wool 14333B Vermiculite (small) _. 28746 Surround Assembly ; • CD42361R-C 2166-019 CD48421R-C 2170-019 Thermostat Wire Assembly ; 2118-170 Y Conversion Kit NG CD42361R-C DCKVN-CAL36 Y Conversion Kit LP DCKVP-CAL36 Y Conversion Kit NG CD48421R-C DCKVN-CAL42 Y Conversion Kit LP DCKVP-CAL42 Y Orifice, Pilot NG - 593-528 Y Orifice, Pilot LP f. 593-527 Y Regulator NG NGK-DXV-50 j Y Regulator LP LPK-DXV 50 Y 72 Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C 2207-900 Rev. J 11/11 D. Contact Information it h, eatila r The first name in fireplaces r Heatilator, a brand of Hearth &, Home Technologies Inc. 7571 2151" Street West, Lakeville, MN 55044 www. heatilator.com ' Please contact your Heatilator dealer with any questions or concerns. For the location of your nearest Heatilator dealer, please visit www.hdatilator.com. -NOTES - NOTICE DO NOT DISCARD THIS MANUAL • Important operating Read, understand and follow Leave this manual with and maintenance these instructions for safe party responsible for use instructions included. installation and operation. and operation. This product may be covered by one or more of the following patents: (United States) 5328356, 5601073, 5613487, 5647340, 5890485, 5941237, 5947112, 5996575, 6006743, 601.9099, 6053165, 6145502, 6170481, 6374822, 6484712, 6601579, 6769426, 6863064, 7077122, 7098269, 7258116, 7470729 or other U.S. and foreign patents pending. 2000-945 Printed in U.S.A. - Copyright 2011 Heatilator • CD42361R-C, CD4842IR-C •. 2207-900 Rev. J 11/11 73 May 17, 2010 To Whom It May Concern: This is to verify that Spates Fabricators, Inc. of Thermal, CA is a Subscriber in the Timber Products Inspection (TP) and General Testing and Inspection (GTI) Truss Quality Auditing Program since June, 1990. The TP and GTI Truss Quality Auditing Programs are recognized by the International Accreditation Service (IAS) with the assigned number of AA-664. TP and the GTI quality assurance marks have been recognized in the West by the truss industry and code jurisdictions since 1969. TP currently audits truss manufacturing facilities nationwide. TP is conducting unannounced, third party audits at Spates Fabricators, Inc. of Thermal, CA. This facility is currently in good standing in the TP Truss Quality Auditing Program. Spate's Fabricators, Inc. personnel are authorized to, apply the GTI quality mark to trusses that are manufactured in accordance with the latest revision of the ANSI/TPI Standards. All stamping takes place at the truss manufacturing facility, under supervision of qualified plant personnel. If you have questions regarding the status of any plant in. the TP/GTI Program, please contact me on my cell 208.818,7869. Sincerely, TIMBER PRODUCTS INSPECTION i4wcao�, Brian Hensley Truss Manager —Western Division /j r Xc: File 105 SE 124th Avenue m ``y P.O. Box 919 0 1641 Sigman Road Vancouver, Washington 98684 Ai5I Conyers, Georgia 30012 360/449-3840 o FAX: 360/449=3953 770/922-8000 o FAX: 770/922-1290 IMES Evaluation Report ESR-1988 Reissued June 1, 2010 This report is subject to re-examination in two years. www.icc-es.or4 1 (800) 423-6587 1 (562) 699-0543 A Subsidiary of the International Code Council® DIVISION: 06 00 00-WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES Section: 06 17 53-Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses REPORT HOLDER: MITEK INDUSTRIES, INC. 14515 NORTH OUTER FORTY, SUITE 300 CHESTERFIELD, MISSOURI 63017 www.mii.com EVALUATION SUBJECT: MiTek® TRUSS CONNECTOR PLATES: TL18, MT18, MTI8HSTm, TL20 and MT20 1.0 EVALUATION SCOPE Compliance with the following codes: ■ 2009 International Building Code® (2009 IBC) ■ 2009 International Residential Code® (2009 IRC) ■ 2006 International Building Code (2006 IBC) ■ 2006 International Residential Code® (2006 IRC) ■ 1997 Uniform Building CodeTm (UBC) Property evaluated: Structural 2.0 USES MiTek® metal truss connector plates are used as joint connector components of light wood -frame trusses. 3.0 DESCRIPTION 3.1 MiTeO TL18 and MT18: Models TL18 and MT18 metal truss connector plates are manufactured from minimum No. 18 gage [0.0466 inch total thickness (1.18 mm)], ASTM A 653 SS, Grade 40 steel, with a G60 galvanization coating [0.0005 inch thickness on each side (0.013 mm)] and having a base -metal thickness of 0.0456 inch (1.16 mm). The plates have teeth 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) long, punched in pairs formed at right angles to the face of the parent metal so that two teeth per hole occur along the length. The spacing along the longitudinal direction of each punched slot is 1 inch (25.4 mm) on center. The transverse centerlines of adjacent slots are staggered 0.10 inch (2.54 mm). The distance between longitudinal centerlines of the slots is 0.25 inch (6.35 mm). There are eight teeth per square inch (645 mm2) of surface area. Plates are available in 1/2-inch (12.7 mm) width increments, up to 12 inches (304.8 mm), and lengthwise in 1-inch (25.4 mm) multiples. See Figure 1 for details. 3.2 MiTek® MT18HSTM: Model MT18HSTM metal truss connector plates are manufactured from minimum No. 18 gage [0.0466 inch total thickness (1.18 mm)], ASTM A 653, Grade 60, high -strength, low -alloy steel (HSLAS) with a G60 galvanization coating [0.0005 inch thickness on each side (0.013 mm)] and having a base -metal thickness of 0.0456 inch (1.16 mm). The plate has teeth 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) long, punched in pairs formed at right angles to the face of the parent metal so that two teeth per hole occur along the length. The spacing along the longitudinal direction of each punched slot is 1 inch (25.4 mm) on center. The transverse centerlines of adjacent slots are staggered 0.10 inch (2.54 mm). The distance between longitudinal centerlines of the slots is 0.25 inch (6.35 mm). There are eight teeth per square inch (645 mm2) of surface area. Plates are available in 1/2-inch (12.7 mm) width increments, up to 12 inches (304.8 mm), and lengthwise in 1-inch (25.4 mm) multiples. See Figure 1 for details. 3.3 MiTeV TL20 and MT20Tm: Models TL20 and MT20Tm metal truss connector plates are manufactured from minimum No. 20 gage [0.0356 inch total thickness (0.9 mm)], ASTM A 653 SS, Grade 40 steel, with a G60 galvanization coating [0.0005 inch thickness on each side (0.013 mm)] and having a base -metal thickness of 0.0346 inch (0.88 mm). The plates have teeth 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) long, punched in pairs formed at right angles to the face of the parent metal so that two teeth per hole occur along the length. The spacing along the longitudinal direction of each punched slot is 1 inch (25.4 mm) on center. The transverse centerlines of adjacent slots are staggered 0.10 inch (2.54 mm). The distance between longitudinal centerlines of the slots is 0.25 inch (6.35 mm). There are eight teeth per square inch (645 mm2) of surface area. Plates are available in 1/2-inch width (12.7 mm) increments, up to 12 inches (304.8 mm), and lengthwise in 1-inch (25.4 mm) multiples. See Figure 1 for details. 4.0 DESIGN AND INSTALLATION 4.1 General: All truss plates are pressed into the wood for the full depth of their teeth by hydraulic -platen embedment presses, multiple roller presses that use partial embedment followed by full -embedment rollers, or combinations of partial embedment roller presses and hydraulic -platen presses that feed trusses into a stationary finish roller press. Trusses must be assembled within the tolerances provided by the Truss Plate Institute's Quality Criteria for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses, shown as Section 4 in ANSI/TPI 1 National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction. ICC-ES Evaluation Reports are not to be construed as representing aesthetics or any other altributer not specifically addressed, nor are they to be construed as an endorsement of the subieci of the report or a recommendation for its use. There is no warranty by ICC Evaluation Service. LLC, arpress or implied• its to ary finding at- other nrnr/er in this report, or as to any product covered by the report, Copyright © 2010 Page 1 of 4 PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com ESR-1988 1 Most Widely Accepted and Trusted Page 2 of 4 4.2 Allowable Design Values: Allowable design values for MiTek® metal truss connector plates to be used in the design of metal plate connected wood roof and floor trusses are shown in Tables 1 and 2. Allowable design values are applicable when the connection is made with identical plates. on opposite sides of the joint. This evaluation report is limited to the evaluation of connection capacity of the MiTek® metal truss connector plates listed in this report. The design, manufacture, and installation of trusses employing the truss plates have not been evaluated. 5.0 CONDITIONS OF USE The MiTek® Industries metal truss connector plates described in this report comply with, or are suitable alternatives to what is specified in, those codes listed in Section 1.0 of this report, subject to the following conditions: 5.1 This evaluation report and the manufacturer's published installation instructions, when required by the code official, must be submitted at the time of permit application. In the event of a conflict between the manufacturer's published installation instructions and this document, the instructions in this document govern. 5.2 Each application for a building permit, using these truss plate connectors, must be accompanied by documentation showing that the design, manufacture, and proposed installation conform with the requirements of the.applicable code. 5.3 This report establishes plate design values only. For items not covered by this report, such as truss design, fabrication, quality assurance and special inspection, refer to ANSI/TPI 1, engineering drawings and the applicable code. 5.4 The design values (lateral resistance values, effective tension strength ratios, and effective shear resistance ratios) used in the design of trusses, using MiTek® Industries metal truss connector plates, must not exceed those listed in Tables 1 and 2 of this report. Load combination reductions must be in accordance with the applicable code. 5.5 All lumber used in the fabrication of trusses using MiTek® Industries metal truss connector plates must be graded in compliance with the applicable building code, and must have a moisture content not exceeding 19 percent at the time of assembly. Wet service factors from ANSI/TPI 1 Section 6.4.5 must be applied to the table values when the lumber moisture content exceeds 19 percent. Allowable values shown in the tables of this report are not applicable to metal connector plates embedded in either fire -retardant - treated lumber or preservative -treated lumber. 5.6 Metal truss connector plates must be installed in pairs on opposite faces of truss members. 5.7 Galvanized G60 metal truss plate connectors subject to corrosive environments must be protected in accordance with Section 6.5 of ANSI/TPI 1. 5.8 MiTek® metal truss connector plates are manufactured in St. Charles, Missouri; Phoenix, Arizona; Tampa, Florida; Edenton, North Carolina; and Bradford, Ontario, Canada. 6.0 EVIDENCE SUBMITTED 6.1 Data in accordance with the National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction, ANSI/TPI 1- 2007. 6.2 Manufacturer's descriptive literature. 6.3 A quality control manual. 7.0 IDENTIFICATION The MiTek® connectors are identified by an imprint of the plate name embossed into the surface of the plate (for example, the MT20TM plate is embossed "MT20"). Additionally, boxes containing the connector plates must be labeled with the MiTek® Industries name, the metal connector plate model, and the evaluation report number (ESR-1988). PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com ESR-1988 Most Widely Accepted and Trusted Page 3 of 4 TABLE 1-ALLOWABLE LATERAL RESISTANCE VALUES, HYDRAULIC -PLATEN EMBEDMENT' (lb/in'/PLATE) LUMBER SPECIES SG AA EA AE EE TL18, MT18, MTi8HSTm, TL20 and MT20Tm Douglas fir -larch 0.49 248 203 170 171 Hem -fir 0.43 188 159 133 141 Spruce -pine -fir 0.42 206 162 125 122 Southern pine 0.55 . 244 192 171 178 For SI: 1lb/in` = 6.9 kPa. NOTES: 'Tooth -holding units = psi for a single plate (double for plates on both faces when applying to area on only one face). To achieve values, plates must be installed on opposite sides of joint. AA = Plate parallel to load, wood grain parallel to load." EA = Plate perpendicular to load, wood grain parallel to load. AE = Plate parallel to load, wood grain perpendicular to load. EE = Plate perpendicular to load, wood grain perpendicular to load. 'All truss plates are pressed into the wood for the full depth of their teeth by hydraulic -platen embedment presses, multiple roller presses that use partial embedment followed by full -embedment rollers, or combinations of partial -embedment roller presses and hydraulic -platen presses that feed trusses into a stationary finish roller press. TABLE 2-EFFECTIVE TENSION AND SHEAR RESISTANCE ALLOWABLE DESIGN VALUES' PROPERTY FORCE DIRECTION TL18 AND MT18 MTI8HS'm TL20 AND MT20M Efficiency Pounds/ inch/Pair of Connector Plates Efficiency Pounds/ inch/Pair of Connector Plates Efficiency Pounds/ inch/Pair of Connector Plates Tension values in accordance with Section 5.4.4.2 of TPI-1 (Minimum Net Section over the joint)Z Tension @ 0° 0.5 1149 0.48 1596 0.49 857 Tension @ 90° 0.52 1208 0.5 1671 0.49 854 Tension values in accordance with TPI-1 with a deviation [see Section 5.4.9 (e) 1) (Maximum Net Section Occurs over the joint) Tension @ 0° 0.59 1349 0.59 1975 0.59 1035 Tension @ 90° 0.53 1214 0.51 1727 0.49 861 Shear Values Shear @ 0° 0.56 874 0.55 1099 0.51 604 Shear @ 300 0.66 1023 0.57 1153 0.74 876 Shear @ 600 0.83 1283 0.74 1492 0.82 970 Shear @ 900 0.49 757 0.52 1052 0.58 686 Shear @ 1201 0.39 608 0.4 802 0.42 498 Shear @ 1501 0.45 702 0.37 745 0.5 592 For SI: 1 lb/inch = 0.175 N/mm, 1 inch = 25.4 mm. NOTES: 'Minimum coated thickness is 0.0356 inch (0.904 mm) for 20 gage, or 0.0466 inch (1.184 mm) for 18 gage in accordance with Section 4.3.4 of ANSI/TPI 1. Minimum coating thickness for G60 is 0.0010 inch (0.025 mm) total for both sides in accordance with Section 4.3.6 of ANSI/TPI 1. ZMinimum Net Section - A line through the plate's tooth pattern with the minimum amount of steel for a specified orientation. For these plates, this line passes through a line of holes. 'Maximum Net Section - A line through the plate's tooth pattern with the maximum amount of steel for a specified orientation. For these plates, this line passes through a section of the plate with no holes. r s. PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffacto[y.com ESR-1988 I Most Widely Accepted and Trusted Page 4 of 4 0.125" 0.250" 0.125" 0.375" 3.2 mm 6.4 mm 3.2 mm 9.5 mm 000000 o00000 oaaaoo oa000.o 000aoa 00000o Z . _E W o E J E U 0 J UE E _u') no o0o0ooo0a F 11V1 DTH MT181 TL181 MT18HS, MT20, TL20 4 FIGURE 1—APPROXIMATE DIMENSIONS OF MITEK CONNECTOR PLATES (inches) (1 inch = 25.4 mm) Y PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactorycom